HANDBOOK

Access to the Handbook

MOBILE APPLICATIONS ONLINE

Install the Scan MyCitroën application (content View or download the handbook at the following
available offline). address:
Also available in the MyCitroën App application. http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/
Scan this QR Code for direct access.

Select:
–  the language,
–  the vehicle and body style,
–  the issue period of the handbook corresponding to
the date of 1st registration of the vehicle.

This symbol indicates the latest

information available.
Welcome Key
Safety warning
Thank you for choosing a Citroën C4 or a Citroën ë-C4.
This document contains the key information and recommendations you Additional information
will need to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly
recommend familiarising yourself with it, as well as the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide. Environmental protection feature
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the Left-hand drive vehicle
country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, Right-hand drive vehicle
equipment and accessories without having to update this document.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is Location of the equipment / button
passed on to the new owner. described using a black area.
 Contents

Overview  ■ Heated steering wheel  42 Emergency or assistance  67

Mirrors  43 Electronic stability control (ESC)  69
Rear bench seat  44 Seat belts  71
Eco-driving  ■ Heating and Ventilation  45 Airbags  73
Manual air conditioning  47 Child seats  75

Instruments  1 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 

Front demisting - defrosting 
47
50
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 
ISOFIX child seats 
77
78
Driver information  9 Heated windscreen  50 i-Size child seats  80
Instrument panels  9 Rear screen demisting/defrosting  51 Installing child seats  81
Head-up display  10 Temperature conditioning (Electric)  51 Child lock  83
Warning and indicator lamps  12 Interior fittings  52
Indicators  18
 6
Courtesy lamps  55
Manual test  22 Interior ambient lighting  55 Driving
Total distance recorder  23 Boot fittings  55 Driving recommendations  84
Lighting dimmer  23 Starting / Switching off the engine with the key  86
Trip computer  23 Starting/Switching off the engine with
Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system  24 Lighting and visibility  4 Keyless Entry and Start  87
10-inch touch screen  25 Lighting control stalk  57 Manual parking brake  89
Remotely operable functions (Electric)  27 Direction indicators  58 Electric parking brake  90
Automatic illumination of headlamps  59 6-speed manual gearbox  92

Access  2 Headlamp beam height adjustment 

Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 
59
59
Automatic gearbox 
Drive selector (Electric) 
92
94
Electronic key with remote control function and Automatic lighting systems - General Driving modes  95
built-in key  28 recommendations  60 Hill start assist  96
Proximity Keyless Entry and Start  30 Automatic headlamp dipping  60 Gear shift indicator  97
Central locking  32 Cornering lighting  61 Stop & Start  97
Back-up procedures  32 Wiper control stalk  62 Tyre under-inflation detection  99
Doors  35 Intermittent wipers  63 ConnectedCAM Citroën  100
Boot  35 Automatic wipers  63 Driving and manoeuvring aids - General
Alarm  35 Changing a wiper blade  64 recommendations  101
Electric windows  37 Road signs recognition  102
Sunroof  38
 5
Speed limiter  105
Safety Cruise control - Specific recommendations  107

Ease of use and comfort  3 General safety recommendations 

Hazard warning lamps 
66
66
Cruise control 
Highway Driver Assist 
107
109
Front seats  40 Horn  67 Adaptive cruise control  109
Steering wheel adjustment  42 Pedestrian horn (Electric)  67 Lane positioning assist  113

2
 Contents

Active lane departure warning system  118 Changing a bulb  171 Frequently asked questions  206
Blind spot monitoring  121 Fuses  174

 12
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and 12 V battery / Accessory battery  175
Intelligent emergency braking assistance  122 Towing the vehicle  178 CITROËN Connect Nav
Distraction detection  125 First steps  209
Steering mounted controls  210
 9
Parking sensors  126
Reversing camera  127 Technical data Menus  210
Top Rear Vision - 360 vision  128 Engine technical data and towed loads  181 Voice commands  212
Park Assist  132 Petrol engines  182 Navigation  215
Diesel engines  183 Connected navigation  218
Electric motor  184 Applications  220
Practical information  7 Dimensions  185 Radio  223
Compatibility of fuels  137 Identification markings  185 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  224
Refuelling  137 Media  224

 10
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)  138 Telephone  226
Charging system (Electric)  138 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system Settings  228
Charging the traction battery (Electric)  145 First steps  186 Frequently asked questions  230
Towing device  149 Steering mounted controls  186
Menus  187
 13
Towing device with quickly detachable towball  150
Roof bars  152 Radio  188 Event data recorders
Snow chains  153 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  189
Energy economy mode  153 Media  190
Bonnet  154 Telephone  191 Alphabetical index  ■
Engine compartment  155 Settings  193
Checking levels  156 Frequently asked questions  193
Checks  158
AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 
Free-wheeling 
160
162 MyCitroën Play  11 Access to additional videos
Advice on care and maintenance  162 First steps  196
Steering mounted controls  197
Menus  197
In the event of a breakdown  8 Radio  198
Warning triangle  165 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  199
Running out of fuel (Diesel)  165 Media  200
Tool kit  165 Telephone  201
Temporary puncture repair kit  166 Applications  205 http://q-r.to/bagGl9
Spare wheel  169 Settings  205

3
 Overview

Presentation 1. Courtesy lamp/Front reading lamps 2. Direct access to the Driving or Vehicle
Emergency and assistance call buttons menu
These illustrations and descriptions are intended
Sunroof Access to the touch screen menus
as a guide. The presence and location of certain
Warning lamps display for seat belts and Touch screen on/off and volume control
elements may vary, depending on the version or
front passenger airbag 3. Hazard warning lamps
trim level.
2. Interior rear view mirror 4. Central locking
Instruments and controls 3. Head-up display 5. Switching the engine on/off
4. Instrument panel 6. Air conditioning
5. Fusebox Heated seats
6. Electric windows 7. USB sockets (type A/type C)
Electric door mirrors 8. Storage compartment or Wireless
7. Bonnet release smartphone charger
8. Smart Pad Support Citroën 9. Gearbox or drive selector
9. Dashboard drawer 10. Choice of driving mode
10. Glove box 11. Access to the Energy menu
12. Electric parking brake

1. Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

or
10-inch touch screen with MyCitroën Play or
CITROËN Connect Nav

4
 Overview

Steering-mounted controls C. Start/Pause of the Speed limiter or Cruise 2. Active lane departure warning system
control with the speed setting saved 3. Alarm
Confirmation of vehicle restart after automatic 4. Heated windscreen
stop (Adaptive cruise control with Stop & Go 5. Heated steering wheel
function) 6. Temperature conditioning
D. Select/Deselect the speed limiter function 7. Head-up display controls
E. Activation of the Speed limiter or Cruise
control with the speed setting saved
Use the speed suggested by the Road signs Electric motor
recognition system
5. Horn/Driver front airbag
6. Audio system controls
F. Select previous/next media
G. Decrease/Increase volume
H. Access the Telephone menu
Manage calls
I. Voice commands

1. External lighting controls/Direction indicators / Side controls

Select the instrument panel display mode
2. Wiper controls/Screenwash/Trip computer
3. Automatic gearbox control paddles 1. Charging connectors
4. Controls for Cruise control/Speed limiter/ 2. Traction battery
Adaptive cruise control 3. Accessory battery
A. Increase/Decrease the speed setting 4. Heat pump
Display and adjustment of the distance 5. On-board charger
setting to the vehicle in front (Adaptive cruise 6. Electric motor
control) 7. Charging cable
B. Select/Deselect the cruise control function The charging connectors 1 enable 3 types of
charging:

1. Headlamp beam height adjustment

5
 Overview

–  Domestic charging in mode 2 using a

domestic socket and associated charging cable
7.
–  Accelerated charging in mode 3 using an
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox).
–  Superfast charging in mode 4 using a fast
public charger.
The 400 V traction battery 2 uses Lithium-Ion
technology. It stores and supplies the energy
required for the operation of the electric motor,
air conditioning and heating. Its charge level is
represented by an indicator and a reserve power
warning lamp on the instrument panel.
The 12 V accessory battery 3 powers the
vehicle’s conventional electrical system. It is
recharged automatically by the traction battery
via the on-board charger.
The heat pump 4 provides passenger
compartment heating and regulates traction
battery and on-board charger cooling.
The on-board charger 5 manages the domestic
charging (mode 2) and accelerated charging
(mode 3) of the traction battery as well as the
recharging of the 12 V accessory battery.
The electric motor 6 provides propulsion in
accordance with the selected driving mode and
driving conditions. It recovers energy during
vehicle braking and deceleration phases.

6
 Eco-driving

Eco-driving Control the use of electrical equipment Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
minimise wind resistance (e.g. roof bars, roof
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment
Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday rack, bicycle carrier, trailer). Preferably, use a
is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows
practices that allow the motorist to optimise roof box.
and air vents before using the air conditioning.
the vehicle's energy consumption (fuel and/or Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the
electricity) and CO2 emissions. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit
windows and leave the air vents open.
Optimise your use of the gearbox Consider using equipment that can help keep summer tyres.
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and the temperature in the passenger compartment Comply with the servicing instructions
change up promptly. While accelerating, change down (e.g. sunroof blind, window blinds). Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres
up early. Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on
With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic conditioning as soon as the desired temperature the driver's side.
mode. Do not depress the accelerator pedal has been reached. Carry out this check in particular:
heavily or suddenly. Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, –  before a long journey.
The gear shift indicator prompts you to engage if they are not managed automatically. –  at each change of season.
the most suitable gear. Whenever this indication Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. –  after a long period out of use.
is displayed on the instrument panel, follow it Adapt your use of the headlamps and/or Do not forget the spare wheel and, where
straight away. foglamps to the level of visibility, in accordance applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan.
With an automatic gearbox, this indicator with current legislation in the country in which Have your vehicle serviced regularly (e.g. engine
appears only in manual mode. you are driving. oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment
Drive smoothly Avoid running the engine before moving off, filter, etc.). Observe the schedule of operations in
particularly in winter (other than in severe wintry the manufacturer's service schedule.
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use
conditions: temperature below -23°C). The With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system
engine braking rather than the brake pedal and
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving. has a fault, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit
press the accelerator gradually. These practices
As a passenger, avoid connecting your a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
help to save on energy consumption, reduce
multimedia devices (e.g. film, music, video as soon as possible to restore your vehicle's
CO2 emissions and decrease general traffic
game) to help reduce the consumption of energy. nitrogen oxide emissions to legal levels.
noise.
Disconnect all portable devices before leaving When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after
When the traffic is flowing smoothly, select the
the vehicle. the third cut-out of the nozzle, to avoid overflow.
cruise control.
Limit the causes of excess consumption You will only see the fuel consumption of your
Spread loads throughout the vehicle. Place the new vehicle settle down to a consistent average
heaviest items in the boot as close as possible to after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres).
the rear seats.

7
 Eco-driving

Optimising the driving range (Electric)

The vehicle’s electrical consumption depends
heavily on the route, the vehicle speed and your
driving style.
Try to remain in the "ECO" zone on the power
indicator, by driving smoothly and maintaining a
steady speed.
Anticipate the need to slow down, and brake
smoothly, whenever possible using engine
braking with the regenerative braking function,
which will move the power indicator into the
"CHARGE" zone.
Use the air conditioning rather than the heating
to demist the passenger compartment.

8
 Instruments

Driver information
Instrument panel
7. Selector position and gear on automatic
gearbox
1
Gear shift indicator
The instrument panel displays all the information Driving mode selected
the driver needs about the status of the vehicle's 8. Service indicator
various systems. Trip computer information
This information appears in the form of warning 9. Fuel gauge
and indicator lamps and messages.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
instrument panel may be either: Digital instrument panel 1. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h)
–  An LCD display. The digital instrument panel can be personalised. 2. Selector position and gear on automatic
–  A fully digital display. Depending on the display mode selected, certain gearbox (Petrol or Diesel)
information is hidden or presented differently. Drive selector position (Electric)
LCD instrument panel Gear change indicator (Petrol or Diesel)
Driving mode selected
3. Personalisable area
For more information on the Display modes,
please refer to the corresponding section.
4. Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel)
Charge level indicator (Electric)
Remaining range (miles or km)
5. Total distance recorder (miles or km)
1. Coolant temperature indicator (°C)
6. Cruise control or speed limiter settings
2. Cruise control/speed limiter settings
Display of recognised signs
3. Display of speed limit signs
Indication of danger zones (with connected
4. Engine oil level indicator (depending on
navigation)
engine)
For more information on Connected
5. Total distance recorder (miles or km)
navigation, refer to the corresponding
6 Digital speedometer (mph or km/h)
section.

9
 Instruments

Display modes Contents of display modes ►  Press Settings in the banner of the
– "Minimum": digital speedometer, selector touch screen.
The available display modes vary depending on
position, driving range, distance recorder and: ►  Select "OPTIONS".
the vehicle's version and equipment.
•  Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel). ►  Select "Instrument panel
The information displayed on the instrument
•  Battery charge indicator (Electric). personalisation".
panel (indicator/warning lamps, etc.) may have
•  Power indicator (Electric). ►  Select "Personal 1" or "Personal 2".
a fixed or variable location depending on the
– "Dials" (Petrol or Diesel): digital speedometer, ►  Select the type of information using the scroll
selected display mode.
selector position, driving range, distance arrows:
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
recorder, fuel gauge, rev counter and engine • "Media".
for both operation and deactivation, there is only
coolant temperature indicator. • "Trip computer".
one dedicated location.
– "Trip computer" (Petrol or Diesel): digital • "Flow".
Display language and units • "Thermal Comfort Consumption".
speedometer, selector position, driving
These depend on the touch screen ►  Confirm to save and exit.
range, distance recorder, fuel gauge, current
settings. The information is displayed immediately on the
information and selected trip (1 or 2).
When travelling abroad, the speed must be instrument panel if the corresponding display
– "Driving": digital speedometer, selector
shown in the official units of the country you mode is selected.
position, driving range, distance recorder,
are driving in (mph, miles or km/h, km).
information about current driving aids and: The type of information selected in
•  Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel). "Personal 1" mode is not available in
Choosing the display mode
•  Battery charge indicator (Electric). "Personal 2" mode.
– "Navigation": digital speedometer, selector
position, driving range, distance recorder,
information about current navigation (map and
settings) and:
Head-up display
•  Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel). System which projects various information onto
•  Battery charge indicator (Electric). a transparent blade placed in the driver's field
►  Press the button located at the end of of vision to avoid the driver having to take their
– "Personal 1"/"Personal 2" (Electric): digital
the lighting control stalk to scroll through the eyes off the road.
speedometer, selector position, driving range,
instrument panel display modes.
distance recorder, battery charge indicator and
The selected display mode is automatically
information selected by the driver.
applied after a few moments.
Configuring a "Personal" display mode
With CITROËN Connect Nav

10
 Instruments

Display in operation Selector •  up to move the display up,

•  down to move the display down. 1
Brightness adjustment
►  With the engine running, adjust the
brightness of the information display using the
buttons 3:
•  on the "sun" to increase the brightness,
Once the system has been activated, the •  on the "moon" to decrease the brightness.
following information is grouped together in the When stationary or while driving, no
head-up display: objects should be placed around the
A. The speed of the vehicle. projection blade (or in its recess) so as not to
B. Cruise control/speed limiter information, impede its movement and correct operation.
indication of danger zones (with connected
navigation) and, where fitted, information
In certain extreme weather conditions
from the Road signs recognition function. 1. Switching on
(rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, etc.),
C. If the vehicle is so equipped, inter-vehicle 2. Switching off (long press)
the head-up display may not be legible or
distance information, lane positioning assist 3. Brightness adjustment
may suffer temporary interference.
information and automatic emergency braking 4. Display height adjustment
Some sunglasses may hamper reading of the
alerts.
information.
D. If the vehicle is so equipped, navigation Activation/Deactivation To clean the projection blade, use a clean,
information.
►  With the engine running, press any button to soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth or
activate the system and deploy the projection microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry or abrasive
For more information about Navigation,
blade. cloth, or detergent or solvent products, due to
refer to the sections describing the audio
►  Press and hold button 2 to deactivate the the risk of scratching the projection blade or
and telematics systems.
system and retract the projection blade. damaging the non-reflective coating.
The state of the system is saved when the
engine is switched off and restored on restarting.

Adjusting the height

►  With the engine running, adjust the display to
the desired height using the buttons 4:

11
 Instruments

Warning and indicator If a lamp remains lit Maximum engine coolant temperature
Fixed.
lamps The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning
and indicator lamp description indicate whether The temperature of the cooling system is
Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator you should contact a qualified professional in too high.
lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a addition to the immediate recommended actions. Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has
malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating (1): You must stop the vehicle. cooled down before topping up the level, if
status of a system (operation or deactivation Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).
indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two the ignition. Engine oil pressure (Petrol or Diesel)
ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Fixed.
Associated warnings workshop. There is a fault with the engine lubrication
(3): Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified system.
The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied
workshop. Carry out (1) and then (2).
by an audible signal and/or a message displayed
System malfunction (Electric)
in a screen.
Relating the type of alert to the operating status
List of warning and Fixed.
of the vehicle allows you to determine whether indicator lamps A fault involving the electric motor or
the situation is normal or whether a fault has traction battery has been detected.
Red warning/indicator lamps
occurred: refer to the description of each lamp Carry out (1) and then (2).
for further information. STOP Cable connected (Electric)
Fixed, associated with another warning Fixed when the ignition is switched on.
When the ignition is switched on
lamp, accompanied by the display of a The charging cable is connected to the
Certain red or orange warning lamps come on message and an audible signal. vehicle's connector.
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched A serious fault with the engine, braking system, Fixed when the ignition is switched on,
on. These warning lamps should go off as soon power steering or automatic gearbox or a major accompanied by a message.
as the engine is started. electrical fault has been detected. It is not possible to start the vehicle while the
For more information on a system or a function, Carry out (1) and then (2). charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s
refer to the corresponding section.
Engine self-diagnostic system (Petrol or connector.
Persistent warning lamp Diesel) Disconnect the charging cable and close the
flap.
Fixed.
If a red or orange warning lamp comes on, there
A major engine fault has been
may be fault which needs further investigation.
detected.
Carry out (1) and then (2).

12
 Instruments

12V battery charge

Fixed.
Fixed.
The parking brake is applied or not
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed on the instrument panel. 1
The battery charging circuit is faulty properly released. You may be able to deal with some faults
(e.g. dirty terminals, loose or severed alternator Electric parking brake yourself, such as changing the battery in the
belt). Fixed. remote control.
Carry out (1). The electric parking brake is applied. For other faults, such as with the tyre under-
If the electric parking brake stops working, Flashing. inflation detection system, carry out (3).
immobilise the vehicle: Application/release is faulty. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
►  With the manual gearbox, engage a gear. Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level message.
►  With the automatic gearbox or drive selector, surface). One or more major faults, for which there is/are
fit the chock against one of the wheels. With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected.
Clean and tighten the terminals. If the warning With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, Identify the cause of the fault using the message
lamp does not go off when the engine is started, select mode P. displayed on the instrument panel, then carry
carry out (2). Switch off the ignition and carry out (2). out (3).
Braking Fixed, accompanied by the message
Door(s) open
Fixed. "Parking brake fault".
Fixed, associated with a message
The brake fluid level in the braking circuit Automatic release of the electric parking brake is
identifying the access.
has dropped significantly. unavailable.
An audible signal supplements the alert if the
Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies Carry out (2).
speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h).
with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the Service warning lamp fixed and
A door or the boot is not properly closed.
problem persists, carry out (2). service spanner flashing then
Seat belts not fastened/unfastened fixed.
Fixed.
Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an The servicing interval has been exceeded.
The electronic brake force
increasing audible signal. The vehicle must be serviced as soon as
distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
A seat belt has not been fastened or has been possible.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
unfastened. Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines.
Manual parking brake (depending on
Orange warning/indicator lamps Braking
version)
Fixed. Service Fixed.
The parking brake is applied or not Temporarily on, accompanied by the A minor fault with the braking system has
properly released. display of a message. been detected.
One or more minor faults, for which there is/are Drive carefully.
no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. Carry out (3).

13
 Instruments

Malfunction (with electric parking brake) Automatic functions deactivated (electric Engine self-diagnostic system (Petrol or
Fixed, accompanied by the parking brake) Diesel)
message "Parking brake fault". Fixed. Flashing.
The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the The "automatic application" (on switching The engine management system has a
engine running. off the engine) and "automatic release" (on fault.
If manual application and release commands are acceleration) functions are deactivated. There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be
not working, the electric parking brake control If automatic application/release is no longer destroyed.
lever is faulty. possible: You must carry out (2).
The automatic functions must be used at all ►  Start the engine. Fixed.
times and are automatically re-enabled in the ►  Use the control to apply the electric parking The emissions control system has a fault.
event of a control lever fault. brake. The warning lamp should go off when the engine
Carry out (2). ►  Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. is started.
Fixed, accompanied by the ►  Hold the control pressed in the release Carry out (3) without delay.
message "Parking brake direction for between 10 and 15 seconds. Fixed.
fault". ►  Release the control. A minor engine fault has been
The parking brake is faulty: manual and ►  Depress and hold the brake pedal. detected.
automatic functions may not be working. ►  Pull the control in the application direction for Carry out (3).
When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: 2 seconds. Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip
►  Pull and hold the control lever for ►  Release the control and the brake pedal. regulation (ASR)
approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Flashing.
lamp comes on on the instrument panel. Fixed. DSC/ASR regulation is activated in the
If this procedure does not work, secure the The anti-lock braking system has a fault. event of a loss of grip or trajectory.
vehicle: The vehicle retains conventional braking. Fixed.
►  Park on a level surface. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry The DSC/ASR system has a fault.
►  With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. out (3). Carry out (3).
►  With an automatic gearbox or drive selector,
Power steering Emergency brake malfunction (with
select P, then place the supplied chock against
Fixed. electric parking brake)
one of the wheels.
The power steering has a fault. Fixed, accompanied by the
Then carry out (2).
Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry message "Parking brake fault".
out (3). Emergency braking does not deliver optimal
performance.

14
 Instruments

If automatic release is not available, use manual

release or carry out (3).
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible
and carry out (3).
Airbags
Fixed. 1
Hill start assist Engine pre-heating (Diesel) One of the airbags or seat belt
Fixed, accompanied by the Temporarily on pyrotechnic pretensioners is faulty.
message "Anti roll-back system (up to approximately 30 seconds in Carry out (3).
fault". severe weather conditions). Front passenger airbag (ON)
The system has a fault. When switching on the ignition, if the weather Fixed.
Carry out (3). conditions and the engine temperature make it The front passenger airbag is activated.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip necessary. The control is in the "ON" position.
regulation (ASR) Wait until the warning lamp goes off before In this case, do NOT install a "rearward
Fixed. starting. facing" child seat on the front passenger seat
The system is deactivated. When the warning lamp goes off, starting will - risk of serious injury!
The DSC/ASR system is reactivated occur immediately if you press and hold: Front passenger airbag (OFF)
automatically when the vehicle is restarted, –  the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. Fixed.
and at speeds above approximately 31 mph –  the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. The front passenger airbag is deactivated.
(50 km/h). If the engine does not start, make the engine The control is set to the “OFF” position.
At speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be starting request again, while keeping your foot A "rearward facing" child seat can be installed,
reactivated manually. on the pedal. unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags
Under-inflation Particle filter (Diesel) warning lamp on).
Fixed. Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Low fuel level (Petrol or Diesel)
The pressure in one or more tyres is too and a message about the risk of particle Fixed, with the reserve level shown in red,
low. filter blockage. accompanied by an audible signal and
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as The particle filter is nearing saturation. the display of a message.
possible. As soon as traffic conditions permit, regenerate When it first comes on, you have approximately
Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph 6 litres of fuel remaining in the tank (reserve).
the pressure. (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. Until the fuel level is topped up, this alert will
Under-inflation warning lamp Fuel filter (Diesel) be repeated every time the ignition is switched
flashing then fixed and Service Fixed. on, with increasing frequency as the fuel level
warning lamp fixed. The Diesel fuel filter contains water. decreases and approaches zero.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. Carry out (2) without delay. Risk of damaging the Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel.
Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. fuel injection system!

15
 Instruments

Never drive until completely empty, as Fixed, accompanied by a message and Stop & Start (Petrol or Diesel)
this could damage the emissions control and an audible signal. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
injection systems. The system has a fault. message.
Low traction battery level (Electric) Carry out (3). The Stop & Start system has been deactivated
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal. Fixed. manually.
The state of charge of the traction battery The system has a fault. The engine will not switch off at the next traffic
is low. If these warning lamps come on after the engine stop.
View the remaining range. is switched off and then restarted, carry out (3). Fixed.
Put the vehicle on charge as soon as possible. Active lane departure warning system The Stop & Start system has been
Fixed. deactivated automatically.
Tortoise mode with limited driving range
The system has been automatically The engine will not switch off at the next traffic
(Electric)
deactivated or placed on standby. stop, if the exterior temperature is:
Fixed.
Flashing. –  below 0°C.
The state of charge of the traction battery
You are about to cross a broken –  above +35°C.
is critical.
lane marking without operating the direction For more information, refer to the Driving
The engine power gradually decreases.
indicators. section.
You must put the vehicle on charge.
The system is activated, then corrects the Flashing then fixed, accompanied by a
If the warning lamp remains lit, carry out (2).
trajectory on the side of the detected lane message.
Pedestrian horn (Electric) The system has a fault.
marking.
Fixed. Carry out (3).
For more information, refer to the Driving
Horn fault detected.
section. AdBlue® (BlueHDi)
Carry out (3).
Fixed. On for around 30 seconds when starting
Collision Risk Alert/Active Safety Brake The system has a fault. the vehicle, accompanied by a message
Fixed, accompanied by the display of a Carry out (3). indicating the driving range.
message. The driving range is between 1,500 and 500
Lane positioning assist
The system has been deactivated via the touch miles (2,400 and 800 km).
Fixed, accompanied by the
screen (Driving/Vehicle menu). Top up the AdBlue®.
Service warning lamp.
Flashing. Fixed, on switching on the ignition,
The system has a fault.
The system activates and brakes the accompanied by an audible signal and a
Carry out (3).
vehicle momentarily to reduce the speed of message indicating the driving range.
collision with the vehicle in front. The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles
For more information, refer to the Driving (800 and 100 km).
section. Promptly top up the AdBlue®, or carry out (3).

16
 Instruments

Flashing, accompanied by an audible

signal and a message indicating the
Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting
being prevented.
Green warning/indicator lamps
Stop & Start (Petrol or Diesel)
1
driving range. Flashing AdBlue® warning lamp on
Fixed.
The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). switching on the ignition, with the
When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start
You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine Engine self-diagnostics warning lamp on fixed,
puts the engine into STOP mode.
starting being prevented, or carry out (3). accompanied by an audible signal and a
Flashing temporarily.
Flashing, accompanied by an audible message indicating that starting is prevented.
STOP mode is momentarily unavailable
signal and a message indicating that The engine immobiliser prevents the engine from
or START mode is automatically triggered.
starting is prevented. restarting (the permitted driving limit has been
For more information, refer to the Driving
The AdBlue® tank is empty: the legally required exceeded after confirmation of a malfunction of
section.
engine immobiliser system prevents the engine the emissions control system).
from starting. To start the engine, carry out (2). Vehicle ready to drive (Electric)
To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue® or carry Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal
Rear foglamp
out (2). when it comes on.
Fixed.
It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® The vehicle is ready to drive and the thermal
The lamp is on.
to the tank. comfort systems are available.
Foot on the clutch (Petrol or Diesel) The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a
SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) Fixed. speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and
Fixed when the ignition is switched Stop & Start: the change to START mode lights up again when the vehicle stops moving.
on, accompanied by an audible is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully The lamp will go out when you turn off the
signal and a message. depressed. engine and exit the vehicle.
A malfunction of the SCR emissions control Fully depress the clutch pedal.
system has been detected. Park Assist
Foot on the brake Fixed.
This alert disappears once the exhaust
Fixed. The function is active.
emissions return to normal levels.
Insufficient or no pressure on the brake For more information, refer to the Driving
Flashing AdBlue® warning lamp on
pedal. section.
switching on the ignition, with the
Engine self-diagnostics warning lamp on fixed, Automatic headlamp dipping Lane positioning assist
accompanied by an audible signal and a Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Fixed.
message indicating the driving range. and a message. The function has been activated.
Depending on the message displayed, it is A function or camera malfunction is detected. All conditions have been met: the system is
possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) Carry out (2). operating.
before the engine immobiliser is triggered. For more information, refer to the Driving
section.

17
 Instruments

Direction indicators Fully depress the clutch pedal. The value indicated is calculated
Flashing with audible signal. Foot on the brake according to the distance covered and
The direction indicators are on. Fixed. the time elapsed since the last service.
Sidelamps Insufficient or no pressure on the brake The alert may also be triggered close to a
Fixed. pedal. due date.
The lamps are on. Fuel filter (Diesel)
Service spanner
Dipped beam headlamps Fixed.
On temporarily when the ignition is
Fixed. The Diesel fuel filter contains water.
switched on.
The lamps are on. Carry out (2) without delay. Risk of damaging the
Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000
Automatic headlamp dipping fuel injection system!
km) remain before the next service is due.
Fixed. Fixed, when the ignition is switched on.
The function has been activated Indicators The next service is due in less than 620
via the touch screen (Driving/Vehicle menu). miles (1,000 km).
The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO"
position.
Service indicator Have your vehicle serviced very soon.

The servicing information is expressed in terms Service spanner flashing

For more information, refer to the Lighting and
of distance (miles or kilometres) and time Flashing then fixed, when the
visibility section.
(months or days). ignition is switched on.
Front foglamps (With BlueHDi Diesel engines, associated with
The alert is given at whichever of these two
Fixed. the Service warning lamp.)
terms is reached first.
The front foglamps are on. The servicing interval has been exceeded.
The servicing information is displayed in the
Blue warning/indicator lamps instrument panel. Depending on the version of Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Main beam headlamps the vehicle:

Resetting the service indicator
Fixed. –  The distance recorder display line indicates
the distance remaining before the next service The service indicator must be reset after each
The lamps are on.
is due, or the distance travelled since it was due service.
Black/white warning lamps If you have serviced your vehicle yourself:
preceded by the "-" sign.
–  An alert message indicates the distance ►  Switch the ignition off.
Foot on the clutch (Petrol or Diesel)
Fixed. remaining, as well as the period before the next
Stop & Start: the change to START mode service is due or how long it is overdue.
is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed.

18
 Instruments

instrument panel for a few seconds when

the ignition is switched on, after the servicing
In the event of a malfunction of the
electric gauge, the oil level is no longer 1
information. monitored.
If the system is faulty, you must check the
The level read will only be correct if the
engine oil level using the manual dipstick
vehicle is on level ground and the engine
located in the engine compartment.
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
Oil level correct
This is indicated by the display of "OIL OK" or by
►  Press and hold the button located on the end the message "Oil level correct" (depending on Coolant temperature
of the lighting control stalk.
►  Switch on the ignition without starting the
the instrument panel). indicator
Low oil level Depending on the type of instrument panel, this
engine; a temporary display window appears and
a countdown begins. This is indicated by the display of "OIL" or by information is only available in the instrument
►  When the display indicates =0, release the the message "Oil level incorrect" (depending panel's customisable area.
lighting control stalk button; the spanner symbol on the instrument panel), accompanied by the
disappears. lighting of the Service warning lamp and an
audible signal.
If you disconnect the battery following If a low oil level is confirmed by a check using
this operation, lock the vehicle and wait the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid
at least 5 minutes for the reset to be damage to the engine.
registered. For more information on Checking levels, refer
With the engine running:
to the corresponding section.
–  In zone A, the temperature is correct.
Reminder of the servicing information Oil gauge malfunction –  In zone B, the temperature is too high.
You can view the servicing information by This is indicated by the display of "OIL_ _" The associated warning lamp and the
pressing the "Check" button in the or by the message "Oil level measurement STOP warning lamp light up in red on the
Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. invalid" (depending on the instrument panel), instrument panel, accompanied by the display of
accompanied by the lighting of the Service a message and an audible signal.
Engine oil level indicator warning lamp and an audible signal. You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is
(Depending on version) Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified safe to do so.
On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the workshop. Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine oil level status is displayed on the engine.

19
 Instruments

After switching off the ignition, carefully Manual display of driving range
Warning/ Action Remaining
open the bonnet and check the coolant While the driving range is greater than
indicator range
level. 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed
lamps on
automatically.
For more information on Checking You can view the range information by Top up. Between
levels, refer to the corresponding pressing the "Check" button in 1,500 miles
section. the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. and 500
miles (2,400
Actions required related to a lack of km and 800
AdBlue® range indicators AdBlue® km)
(BlueHDi) The following warning lamps light up when the Top up as Between
The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with quantity of AdBlue® is below the reserve level: soon as 500 miles
a system that associates the SCR (Selective driving range of 1,500 miles (2,400 km). possible. and 62
Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system Together with the warning lamps, messages miles (800
and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the regularly remind you of the need to top up to km and
treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to 100 km)
function without AdBlue® fluid. the Warning and indicator lamps section for
A top-up is Between 62
When the level of AdBlue® falls below the details of the messages displayed.
vital, there is miles and 0
reserve level (between 1,500 and 0 miles (2,400
For more information on AdBlue® a risk that the miles (100
and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up when
(BlueHDi) and in particular on topping engine will km and 0
the ignition is switched on and an estimate
up, refer to the corresponding section. be prevented km)
of the distance that can be travelled before
from starting.
engine starting is prevented is displayed in the
instrument panel. To be able 0 miles (km)
to restart the
The engine starting prevention system engine, add at
required by regulations is activated least 5 litres of
automatically once the AdBlue® tank is empty. AdBlue® to the
It is then no longer possible to start the tank.
engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has
been topped up.

20
 Instruments

Malfunction of the SCR emissions

control system
While driving, the message is displayed every 30
seconds. The alert is repeated when switching
Charge level indicator
(Electric)
1
on the ignition.
Malfunction detection
You can continue driving for up to 685 miles
If a malfunction is detected, (1,100 km) before the engine starting
these warning lamps come prevention system is triggered.
The traction battery's actual charge level and
on, accompanied by an Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or the remaining range are displayed continuously
audible signal and the a qualified workshop. when the vehicle is started.
display of an "Emissions
control fault" message. Starting prevented With the ignition off, opening the driver's
door activates the indicator.
The alert is triggered while driving when the Every time the ignition is switched on, the
fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter message "Emissions control fault: Starting
when switching on the ignition for subsequent prevented" is displayed. Associated warning lamps
journeys, for as long as the cause of the fault Two successive alert levels indicate that the
To restart the engine
persists. energy available has dropped to a low level:
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
If the fault is temporary, the alert workshop. 1st level: Reserve
disappears during the next journey, after The state of charge of the traction battery
self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions is low.
control system.
Power indicator (Electric) Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal.
►  View the remaining range on the instrument
Malfunction confirmed during the panel.
permitted driving phase (between 685 ►  Put the vehicle on charge as soon as
miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km)) CHARGE possible.
Traction battery charging during deceleration 2nd level: Critical
If the fault indication is still displayed
and braking. The state of charge of the traction battery
permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the
ECO is critical.
fault in the SCR system is confirmed.
Moderate energy consumption and optimised Fixed, together with the reserve warning lamp,
The AdBlue warning lamp flashes and
driving range. accompanied by an audible signal.
a message is displayed ("Emissions
POWER ►  You must put the vehicle on charge.
control fault: starting prevented in X miles
Energy consumption by the drive train during
(kms)"), indicating the driving range in miles or
acceleration.
kilometres.

21
 Instruments

The remaining range is no longer Thermal comfort select the maximum heating or cooling
calculated. The drive train power setting.
gradually decreases.
consumption indicator When the heating is on maximum, the gauge
The heating and air conditioning are switched (Electric) on the thermal comfort consumption indicator
off (even if the thermal comfort consumption (Depending on version) is in the MAX zone. When the air conditioning
indicator is not at the "ECO" level). It is available in the "Personal 1"/"Personal 2" is on maximum, it stays in the ECO zone.
display modes of the instrument panel. Excessive use of thermal comfort equipment,
particularly at low speed, can significantly
Flow indicator (Electric) For more information on the Display modes,
refer to the corresponding section. decrease the vehicle's range.
The flow indicator displays the energy flows in Remember to optimise equipment settings
the vehicle in real time. upon achieving the desired level of comfort,
It is available in the "Personal 1"/"Personal 2" and adjust them if necessary whenever you
display modes of the instrument panel. start the vehicle.
For more information on the Display modes, The gauge shows the consumption of the After an extended period without using the
refer to the corresponding section. traction battery's electrical energy by the thermal heating, you may notice a slight odour during
comfort devices in the passenger compartment. the first few minutes of use.
The devices in question are the heating and air
conditioning systems.
This equipment can be used:
–  If the vehicle is not plugged in, when the
Manual test
READY lamp is lit. This function allows you to check certain
–  If the vehicle is plugged in, when the ignition is indicators and display the alerts log.
switched on ("Lounge" mode). It can be accessed via the "Check" button
Selecting ECO mode limits the performance of in the Driving/Vehicle touch screen
some of this equipment. The thermal comfort menu.
The indicator changes colour depending on how Depending on version, the following information
consumption indicator then moves into the
energy from the traction battery is being used: is displayed on the instrument panel:
"ECO" zone.
Blue: energy consumption –  Engine oil level.
Green: energy recovery To quickly heat or cool the passenger –  Next service due.
compartment, feel free to temporarily –  Tyre pressures.
This indicator does not represent the
battery's actual level of charge. –  Driving range associated with the AdBlue® and
the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel).
–  Current alerts.

22
 Instruments

This information is also displayed

automatically every time the ignition is
With BLUETOOTH touch
screen audio system
►  Select "Turn off screen" or "Dark",
depending on equipment. 1
switched on. The screen goes off completely.
►  Press on the Settings menu. ►  Press the screen again (anywhere on its
surface) to turn it on.
Total distance recorder ►  Select "Display".
With CITROËN Connect Nav
The total distance recorder measures the total ►  Adjust the brightness by With the lamps switched on:
distance travelled by the vehicle since its initial pressing the buttons. ►  Press this button to select the
registration. You can also switch off the screen: Settings menu.
With the ignition on, the total distance is ►  Select "Turn off screen". ►  Select "OPTIONS".
displayed at all times. It remains displayed for
►  Select "Screen configuration".
30 seconds after switching off the ignition. It is The screen goes off completely.
displayed when the driver's door is opened, and ►  Press the screen again (anywhere on its ►  Select the "Brightness” tab.
when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. surface) to activate it. ►  Adjust the instrument panel and
When travelling abroad, you may have to screen brightness by using the arrows or
change the distance units (km or miles):
With MyCitroën Play moving the slider.
the road speed must be displayed in the local  /  ►  Press Settings from the ►  Press this button to save and exit.
country’s official unit (km/h or mph). status bar or from the menus
The unit is changed via the screen buttons. You can also switch off the screen:
configuration menu, with the vehicle  /  ►  Select "Brightness" or ►  Press this button to select the
stationary. "Screen configuration", Settings menu.
depending on equipment. ►  Select "Turn off screen".
►  Adjust the instrument panel and
Lighting dimmer screen brightness by using the arrows or
moving the slider.
The screen goes off completely.
►  Press the screen again (anywhere on its
This system allows the brightness of the  /  ►  Press this button to save and surface) to turn it on.
instruments and controls to be adjusted manually exit, depending on equipment.
to suit the ambient light level. You can also switch off the screen:
 /  ►  Press Settings from the Trip computer
status bar or from the menus Displays information related to the current trip
buttons. (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.).

23
 Instruments

Data displayed on the Definitions / Calculated since the last trip

computer reset.
instrument panel Range
Average speed
(miles or km)
(mph or km/h)
Distance that can still be travelled with the
Calculated since the last trip computer
fuel remaining in the tank (based on the
reset.
average fuel consumption over the last few miles
(kilometres) travelled).
Distance travelled
This value may vary following a change in driving
(miles or km)
style or terrain, leading to a significant change in
Calculated since the last trip computer
current fuel consumption.
►  Pressing the button located on the end of the reset.
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km),
wiper control stalk displays the following tabs in dashes are displayed.
turn:
Stop & Start time counter
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range
–  Current information: (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62
•  Driving range (Petrol or Diesel). miles (100 km).
•  Current fuel consumption. If your vehicle is fitted with the Stop & Start
Dashes appearing permanently in place of
•  Stop & Start time counter (Petrol or Diesel). function, a time counter calculates the time spent
numbers while driving indicates a malfunction.
–  Trips "1" then "2": in STOP mode during a journey.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
•  Average speed. The time counter is reset each time the ignition is
workshop.
•  Average fuel consumption. switched on.
•  Distance travelled. Current consumption

Trip reset
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) Touch screen
►  When the desired trip is displayed,
(miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) (Electric)
/ Calculated during the last few
BLUETOOTH audio
press the button on the end of the wiper seconds. system
control stalk for more than 2 seconds. This function is only displayed at speeds above
Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used 19 mph (30 km/h) (Petrol or Diesel).
in the same way.
Average consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
(miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) (Electric)

24
 Instruments

This system gives access to the following

elements:
Menus
Radio
–  Vehicle functions and equipment setting
menus. 1
–  Audio system and telephone controls and –  Audio system and telephone controls and
display of related information. display of related information.
Media
–  Vehicle function and equipment setting menus. –  Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions
(visual parking sensor information, Park Assist,
For safety reasons, always stop the Telephone
etc.).
vehicle before performing operations
–  Internet services and display of related
that require sustained attention. Driving
information.
Some functions are not accessible while Activation, deactivation and settings for
–  Navigation system controls and
driving. certain functions.
display of related information (depending on
Settings
version).
Main system settings.
Recommendations For safety reasons, always stop the
For more information about the menus,
Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. vehicle before performing operations
refer to the sections describing the audio
Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. that require sustained attention.
and telematics systems.
Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch screen. Some functions are not accessible while
driving.
Main controls
With the ignition off: system start-up 10-inch touch screen
With the engine running: mute Recommendations
Volume adjustment This screen is of the capacitive type.
–  Do not use pointed objects on the touch
Access to menus screen.
–  Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
Return to the previous screen or confirm –  Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch
screen.
This system gives access to the following
elements:
After a few moments with no action on
–  Permanent display of the time and outside
Principles
the second page, the first page is
temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if Use this button to access the menus, then
displayed automatically.
there is a risk of ice). press the buttons that appear on the
–  Heating/air conditioning system controls touch screen.
(depending on version).

25
 Instruments

Use this button for direct access to the Climate – Time.

Driving/Vehicle menu. Settings for temperature, air flow, etc.
Some menus may display across two pages: For more information on Manual air Energy menu (Electric)
press the "OPTIONS" button to access the conditioning and Dual-zone automatic air It can be accessed directly by pressing
second page. conditioning, refer to the corresponding the button located on the centre console.
sections. The pages available vary depending on the
After a few moments with no action on
Navigation (Depending on equipment) audio equipment.
the second page, the first page is
displayed automatically.
Driving or Vehicle (Depending on Flow
To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" equipment) The page displays a real-time representation of
or "ON". Activation, deactivation and settings for certain the electric drive train’s operation.
Configuring a function functions.
The functions are organised in 2 tabs: "Driving
Access to additional information on the functions" and "Vehicle settings".
function Telephone
Confirm
Applications
Return to the previous page or confirm Access to certain configurable equipment.
Settings
Audio system on/off Main settings for the audio system, touch 1. Active driving mode
Volume adjustment/mute screen and digital instrument panel. 2. Electric motor
3. Estimated traction battery charge level
Menus Information banner(s) 4. Energy flows
Certain information is displayed permanently in
Press the touch screen with three fingers The energy flows have a specific colour for each
the touch screen banner(s).
to show all of the menu buttons. type of driving:
–  Outside temperature (a blue warning lamp
A. Blue: energy consumption
appears if there is a risk of ice).
For more information about the menus, B. Green: energy recovery
–  Access to the Settings for the touch screen
refer to the sections describing the audio and the digital instrument panel (date/time,
and telematics systems. languages, units, etc.). Statistics
–  Notifications. This page shows electrical energy consumption
Radio/Media
–  Reminder of the air conditioning information, statistics.
and direct access to the corresponding menu.

26
 Instruments

The following functions are

available from the MyCitroën
1
App application, which is
accessible from a smartphone:
– Managing the traction battery charging
–  Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy
(deferred charging).
supplied by the traction battery.
–  Managing the temperature pre-conditioning.
–  Green bar chart: energy recovered during
–  Viewing the state of charge and range of the
deceleration and braking, used to recharge the
vehicle.
battery.
The average result for the current trip is stated in Installation procedure
kWh/100 km. ►  Download the MyCitroën App app from the
►  You can change the displayed time scale by appropriate online store for your smartphone.
pressing the - or + buttons. ►  Create an account.
A current trip is any trip of more than 20 ►  Enter the vehicle’s VIN (code beginning with
minutes without switching off the ignition. "VF" on the vehicle registration certificate).
For more information on Identification
markings, refer to the corresponding section.
Charging
Network coverage
This page allows you to programme deferred
In order to be able to use the various
charging.
remotely operable features, ensure that your
For more information on Charging the traction
vehicle is located in an area covered by the
battery (Electric), refer to the corresponding
mobile network.
section.
A lack of network coverage may prevent
communication with the vehicle (for example,
Remotely-operable if it is in an underground car park). In such

functions (Electric) cases, the application will display a message

indicating that the connection with the vehicle
could not be established.

27
 Access

Electronic key with Built-in key ►  To eject the key or put it back in place, pull
and hold the button.
remote control function The key built into the remote control can be
used for the following operations, depending on Once the built-in key is ejected, always
and built-in key version: keep it with you to be able to carry out
–  Locking/Unlocking the vehicle. the corresponding back-up procedures.
Remote control function –  Activation/Deactivation of the manual child
lock.
–  Activation/Deactivation of the front passenger Unlocking the vehicle
airbag.
–  Back-up Unlocking/Locking of the doors.
–  Switching on the ignition and starting/switching Selective unlocking is configured in the
off the engine. Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
Without Keyless Entry and Start
Complete unlocking
►  Press the unlocking button.

Selective unlocking
Driver’s door and fuel filler/charging flap
The remote control can be used for the following
►  Press the unlocking button.
remote functions, depending on version:
►  Press it again to unlock the other doors and
–  Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle.
the boot.
–  Remote operation of lighting.
The charging nozzle can be unplugged on the
–  Folding/Unfolding the door mirrors.
second press.
–  Activating/Deactivating the alarm.
►  To unfold or fold the key, press the button. Complete or selective unlocking, and alarm
–  Locating the vehicle.
With Keyless Entry and Start deactivation (depending on version), is confirmed
–  Opening/Closing the windows.
by the flashing of the direction indicators.
–  Closing the sunroof.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
–  Activating the vehicle’s electronic immobiliser.
Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be Locking the vehicle
locked/unlocked in the event of a failure of the
remote control, the central locking, the battery,
etc. For more information on the Back-up
procedures, refer to the corresponding section.

28
 Access

Normal locking
►  Press the locking button.
audible signal indicates that the vehicle is not
deadlocked.
Remote lighting of the
lamps
2
The locking, and the activation of the alarm
depending on version, is confirmed by the Opening / Closing the ►  Press this button. The sidelamps,
dipped beam headlamps, number plate
lighting of the direction indicators. windows lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
Opening the windows seconds.
An access (door or boot) that is not ►  Press the unlocking button for more Pressing again before the end of the timed
properly closed prevents locking of the than 3 seconds. period switches off the lamps immediately.
vehicle. However, if the vehicle is fitted with Depending on version, the windows stop when
an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds. the button is released or by pressing the button Advice
If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or boot a second time.
are not subsequently opened, the vehicle Remote control
will automatically lock itself again after about
Closing the windows and sunroof The remote control is a sensitive, high-
30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an
(depending on version) frequency device; avoid handling it in your
alarm, it will be reactivated automatically. ►  Press the locking button for more than pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally
3 seconds. unlocking the vehicle.
Depending on version, the windows and the Avoid pressing the remote control buttons
Deadlocking sunroof stop when the button is released or by while out of range of the vehicle, due to
pressing the button a second time. the risk of rendering the remote control
Deadlocking renders the interior door
inoperative. It would then be necessary to
controls inoperative. It also disables the Ensure that no person or object could reset it.
central locking button. prevent the correct closing of the The remote control does not work when the
The horn remains operational. windows and sunroof. key is in the ignition switch, even when the
Never leave anyone inside the vehicle If, on versions with alarm, you want to ignition is switched off.
when it is deadlocked. leave the windows and/or sunroof partially
open, you must first deactivate the interior
►  Press the locking button. Anti-theft protection
volumetric alarm protection.
►  Press the locking button again within 3 Do not modify the electronic vehicle
For more information on the Alarm, refer to
seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by immobiliser, as this might result in
the corresponding section.
the temporary lighting of the direction indicators). malfunctions.
For the vehicles equipped with the Proximity For vehicles with a key ignition switch,
Keyless Entry and Start system, a double remember to remove the key and turn the
steering wheel to engage the steering lock.

29
 Access

Locking the vehicle Selective unlocking is configured via the

Driving with the doors locked could make Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
it more difficult for the emergency services Selective unlocking is deactivated by default.
to enter the passenger compartment in an
emergency. Complete unlocking
As a safety precaution, remove the key from The vehicle (doors and boot) unlocks:
the ignition or take the electronic key with you ►  Either automatically as the driver approaches
when leaving the vehicle, even for a short in zone C, if the automatic functions are
time. activated.
►  Or by gently pressing the driver's door
Purchasing a second-hand vehicle handle.
Zone A: welcome lighting on approaching
Have the key codes memorised by a Unlocking, and alarm deactivation (depending
the vehicle (between 3 and 5 metres from the
CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the keys in on version), is confirmed by the flashing of the
vehicle).
your possession are the only ones able to direction indicators.
Zone B: automatic locking on leaving the vehicle
start the vehicle. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
(about 2 metres from the vehicle).
Zone C: automatic unlocking on approaching If the electronic key remains around the
the vehicle (between 1 and 2 metres from the vehicle (zones A, B or C) for more than
Proximity Keyless Entry vehicle). 15 minutes without action, the automatic
and Start The automatic functions are configured
via the Driving/Vehicle touch screen
functions are deactivated. To unlock or lock
the vehicle, use the remote control or press
This is a Keyless Entry and Start system. menu. the driver's door handle.
It enables automatic vehicle locking/unlocking If using the door handle does not lock/unlock
simply by detecting the electronic key. Unlocking the vehicle the vehicle, bring the electronic key closer
As long as the driver has the electronic key and repeat the desired action.
on their person, the vehicle unlocks as they
approach and locks when they walk away.
If the electronic key is present in an area Selective unlocking
between 2 and 7 m from the vehicle for more Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap
than 30 minutes, the system is deactivated to They unlock:
preserve the battery. ►  Either automatically when approaching the
Key recognition zones: driver’s door, if the automatic functions are
activated.

30
 Access

►  Or by gently pressing the driver's door

handle.
Deadlocking
Deadlocking renders the interior door
The automatic door mirror folding/
unfolding function is configured via the 2
►  Once inside the vehicle, to unlock all touch screen's Driving/Vehicle menu.
accesses, press the central locking button or pull controls inoperative. It also deactivates
the opening control on any door. the central locking button.
As a safety measure, never leave the
The horn remains operational.
vehicle, even for a short time, without
Locking the vehicle Never leave anyone inside the vehicle
taking the Keyless Entry and Start system’s
when it is deadlocked.
electronic key with you.
Normal locking Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if
the key is present in one of the defined areas
while the vehicle is unlocked.

In order to preserve the battery in the

►  Gently press the driver's door handle to lock electronic key and the vehicle's battery:
With the doors and boot closed, the vehicle the vehicle. –  The unlocking on approach function
locks: ►  Press it again within 3 seconds to deadlock (zone C) automatically switches to hibernation
►  Either automatically, upon leaving zone B, if the vehicle (confirmed by the temporary lighting mode after several days (approximately one
the automatic functions are activated. of the direction indicators). week) without being used. To unlock the
►  Or by gently pressing the driver's door A double audible signal indicates that the vehicle vehicle, use the remote control or press on
handle. is not deadlocked. one of the door handles. The next time the
Locking is confirmed by the lighting of the
vehicle is started, the automatic unlocking
direction indicators, and by a double audible Advice and locking functions will be reactivated.
signal when the vehicle is locked upon walking
–  If the welcome lighting is triggered
away. If one of the doors or the boot is still open
several times in succession without the
or if the electronic key for the Keyless
The alarm does not activate when vehicle subsequently being started, it will be
Entry and Start​system has been left inside
locking automatically from a distance (the deactivated.
the vehicle, central locking will not take place.
direction indicators do not light up). –  All "hands-free" functions switch to
hibernation mode after 21 days without being
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if the If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or
used. To restore these functions, unlock the
electronic key is left inside the vehicle. boot are not subsequently opened, the
vehicle using the remote control and start the
vehicle will automatically lock itself again after
engine.
about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with
an alarm, it will be reactivated automatically.

31
 Access

Electrical interference ►  After normal locking, pull one of the identification documents and if possible, the label
The electronic key may not work if it is interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. bearing the key code.
close to an electronic device (e.g. mobile ►  After deadlocking, you must use the The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the
telephone (switched on or on standby), laptop remote control or the Keyless Entry and Start key code and the transponder code, enabling a
computer, strong magnetic fields). If this system to unlock the vehicle. new key to be ordered.
occurs, move the electronic key away from
the electronic device. Complete unlocking/locking
Automatic (anti-intrusion
of the vehicle with the key
security) Use this procedure in the following situations:
Central locking The doors and boot lock automatically while –  Remote control battery discharged.
driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). –  Remote control malfunction.
To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated –  Vehicle battery discharged.
by default): –  Vehicle in an area subject to strong
►  Press the button until a confirmation electromagnetic interference.
message appears. In the first case, change the remote control
Transporting long or voluminous battery.
objects In the second case, reinitialise the remote
Press the central locking control to drive control.
with the boot open and the doors locked. Refer to the corresponding sections.
Otherwise, every time the speed of the
Manual vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the sound
►  Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle of the locks rebounding will be heard and an
(doors and boot) from inside the passenger alert will be displayed.
compartment.

Central locking does not take place if any

of the doors are open. Back-up procedures ►  Insert the key in the door lock.
►  Turn the key towards the front or the rear to
unlock or lock the vehicle.
When locking/deadlocking from the Lost keys, remote control,
outside
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
electronic key
from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes Go to a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's
and the button is deactivated. registration certificate, your personal

32
 Access

If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will

not be activated when locking with the
Locking Battery type: CR2032/3 volts.
Without Keyless Entry and Start
2
key.
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
when the door is opened; switch on the
ignition to stop it.

Central locking not

functioning
Use these procedures in the following cases:
–  Central locking malfunction.
–  Battery disconnected or discharged. ►  Open the doors.
►  For the rear doors, check that the child lock
In the event of a malfunction of the
is not on. With Keyless Entry and Start
central locking system, the battery must
Refer to the corresponding section.
be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is
►  Gently insert the key into the latch located in
locked fully.
the door lock, then turn the latch an eighth of a
turn towards the outside of the door.
Front left-hand door ►  Close the doors and check from the outside
►  Insert the key into the lock and turn it towards that the vehicle is locked.
the front or rear of the vehicle to lock and unlock
the door.
Changing the battery
If the battery is flat, this warning lamp
Other doors comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message.
Unlocking
►  Pull the interior door opening control. ►  Unclip the cover by inserting a small
screwdriver in the slot and lift the cover.
►  Remove the flat battery from its housing.
►  Put the new battery in place, respecting the
polarity. Start by inserting it into the contacts

33
 Access

located in the corner, then clip the cover onto Risk of explosion or leaking of ►  Immediately press the closed padlock button
the unit. inflammable liquid or gas! for a few seconds.
►  Reinitialise the remote control. Do not use in/store in/place in an environment ►  Switch off the ignition and remove the key
For more information on Reinitialising the where the temperature is extremely high or from the ignition switch.
remote control, refer to the corresponding where the pressure is extremely low due to The remote control is now fully operational
section. very high altitude. again.
Do not try to burn, crush or cut a used battery.
Do not throw remote control batteries With Keyless Entry and Start
away, as they contain metals that are
harmful to the environment. Take them to an Reinitialising the remote
approved disposal point.
control
Following replacement of the battery or in
This equipment contains a button type
the event of a fault, it may be necessary to
battery.
reinitialise the remote control.
Do not swallow the battery. Risk of chemical
To reinitialise the remote control, visit a
burns!
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Swallowing the battery can cause serious
internal burning in only 2 hours and can be Without Keyless Entry and Start
fatal.
►  Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into
If batteries have been swallowed or inserted
the remote control) into the lock to open the
into a part of the body, seek immediate
vehicle.
medical advice.
►  Place the electronic key against the back-up
Keep new and used batteries out of the reach
reader on the steering column and hold it there
of children.
until the ignition is switched on.
If the battery compartment does not close
►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
properly, stop using the product and keep it
in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.
out of the reach of children.
►  With an automatic gearbox or drive
selector, while in mode P, depress the brake
Risk of explosion if the battery is
pedal.
replaced with an incorrect type!
►  Switch the ignition off. ►  Switch on the ignition by pressing the
Replace the battery with the same type.
►  Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on). "START/STOP" button.

34
 Access

If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without
Boot Back-up release
To manually unlock the boot in the event of a
2
delay.
Opening battery or central locking failure.

Doors Unlocking
►  Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock
Opening from inside the boot.

From outside
►  After unlocking the vehicle or with the
"Keyless Entry and Start" system electronic key
in the recognition zone, pull the door handle.

From inside
►  Pull the interior opening control of a door; this
unlocks the vehicle completely. ►  After unlocking the vehicle, press the opening ►  Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
control and then lift the tailgate. lock to unlock the boot.
With selective unlocking activated: ►  Move the latch to the left.
–  Opening the driver's door unlocks Closing
the driver's door only (if the vehicle has not
►  Lower the tailgate using one of the interior
Locking after closing
already been completely unlocked). If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
grab handles.
–  Opening one of the passenger doors will remain locked.
unlocks the rest of the vehicle. In the event of a malfunction or if you
experience difficulty opening or closing In the event of a fault with the central
the tailgate, have it checked by a CITROËN locking system, it is essential to
Closing dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so
If a door is not properly closed, this to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent ensure complete locking of the vehicle.
warning lamp comes on accompanied by any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially
a message if the engine is running, and an causing serious injury.
audible signal when the vehicle is travelling at Alarm
more than 6 mph (10 km/h).
(Depending on version)

35
 Access

Locking the vehicle with full The monitoring system is deactivated: the
indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
alarm system direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.

Activation After unlocking using the remote

►  Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle. control
►  Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the If the vehicle automatically locks itself again
remote control or by pressing on the driver's (as happens if a door or the boot is not
door handle. opened within 30 seconds of unlocking), the
When the monitoring system is active, the red monitoring system is automatically activated.
System which protects and provides a deterrent
indicator lamp in the button flashes once per
against theft and break-ins.
Exterior perimeter monitoring
second and the direction indicators come on for Locking the vehicle
about 2 seconds.
The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated with exterior perimeter
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric monitoring only
door, the boot or the bonnet, for example. monitoring after 45 seconds. Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring to
Interior volumetric monitoring The alarm does not activate when avoid the unwanted triggering of the alarm, in
The system checks for any variation in volume in locking automatically from a distance. certain cases such as:
the passenger compartment. –  Slightly open window.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a –  Washing the vehicle.
If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not
window, enters the passenger compartment or –  Changing a wheel.
properly closed, the vehicle is not locked,
moves inside the vehicle. –  Towing the vehicle.
but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be
–  Transport on a ship or ferry.
Self-protection function activated after 45 seconds, at the same time
as the interior volumetric monitoring.
The system checks whether any of its Deactivating interior volumetric
components are out of service. monitoring
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central Deactivation ►  Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds
control or the siren wiring is put out of service or ►  Press the remote control unlocking press the alarm button until the indicator lamp is
damaged. button. on fixed.
Work on the alarm system or ►  Exit the vehicle.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified ►  Unlock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s ►  Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote
workshop. door handle. control or by pressing on the driver's door
handle.

36
 Access

Only exterior perimeter monitoring is activated;

the red indicator lamp in the button flashes every
Failure of the remote control
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
Electric windows 2
second.
►  Unlock the vehicle using the key in the front
To take effect, this deactivation must be
left-hand door lock.
performed whenever the ignition is switched
►  Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
off.
►  Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Reactivating interior volumetric
monitoring 1. Left-hand front
Locking the vehicle without 2. Right-hand front
►  Deactivate exterior perimeter monitoring by
unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or
activating the alarm 3. Right-hand rear
►  Lock the vehicle using the key (built-in the 4. Left-hand rear
the "Keyless Entry and Start" system.
remote control) in the front left-hand door lock. 5. Deactivation of electric window controls
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
located by rear seats
►  Reactivate the full alarm system by locking
the vehicle using the remote control or by Malfunction
pressing the driver’s door handle. When the ignition is switched on, the fixed Manual operation
The red indicator lamp in the button once again lighting of the red indicator lamp in the button ►  To open/close the window, press/pull the
flashes every second. indicates a system malfunction. switch without passing the point of resistance;
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a the window stops as soon as the switch is
Triggering of the alarm qualified workshop. released.
This is indicated by sounding of the siren
and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 Automatic activation Automatic operation
seconds. (Depending on version) ►  To open/close the window, press/pull the
Depending on the country of sale, certain The system is activated automatically 2 minutes switch past its resistance point: the window
monitoring functions remain active until the alarm after the last door or the boot is closed. opens/closes completely when the switch is
has been triggered eleven times consecutively. ►  To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the released.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the Operating the switch again stops the movement
control or the Keyless Entry and Start system, remote control or unlock the vehicle using the of the window.
rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp in the "Keyless Entry and Start" system.
button informs you that the alarm was triggered
during your absence. When the ignition is
switched on, this flashing stops.

37
 Access

The electric window controls remain Reinitialising the electric Do not put your head or arms through the
operational for approximately 45 seconds open windows when the vehicle is moving -
after switching off the ignition.
windows risk of serious injury!
After that time, the controls are disabled. To After reconnecting the battery, or in the event
reactivate them, switch the ignition on again. of abnormal window movement, the anti-pinch
function must be reinitialised.
The anti-pinch function is disabled during the
Sunroof
Anti-pinch
following sequence of operations. The sunroof consists of a movable glass panel
If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it that slides over the roof and a blind that can
For each window:
stops and immediately partially lowers again. be opened independently. Opening the sunroof
►  Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will
automatically opens the blind.
Deactivating the rear rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the
►  To operate the panoramic sunroof, use the
control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the
controls for the rear electric window is fully closed. button in the roof console.
windows ►  Continue to pull the control for at least one
second after the window reaches the closed
position.

If an electric window meets an obstacle

during operation, the movement of the
For your children's safety, press control 5 to window must be reversed. To do this, press
deactivate the controls for the rear electric the relevant control.
windows, irrespective of their positions. When the driver operates the passengers’
The red indicator lamp in the button comes on. electric window controls, it is important to The sunroof can be operated when the ignition
The rear electric windows can still be controlled ensure that nothing can prevent the window is turned on (if the battery is charged enough),
using the driver's controls. from closing properly. with the engine running, in STOP mode of Stop
It is important to ensure that passengers use & Start, and up to 45 seconds after turning off
In the event of a serious impact, use of the electric windows correctly. the ignition.
the rear electric window controls is Pay particular attention to children when Precautions
re-enabled, if they had been deactivated. operating the windows.
Be aware of passengers and/or other persons Do not put your head or arms through the
present when closing windows using the key sunroof while the vehicle is moving - risk
or the "Keyless Entry and Start" system. of serious injury!

38
 Access

Ensure that any luggage or accessories

carried on the roof bars do not interfere
Before operating the sunroof control
button, ensure that no object or person
►  When the sunroof is closed: pressing once
without passing the point of resistance moves it 2
with the movement of the sunroof. might prevent the movement. to the partially open position.
Do not place heavy loads on the movable Pay particular attention to children when ►  When the sunroof is partially open: pressing
glass panel of the sunroof. operating the sunroof. once on the front part of the button, without
If something is trapped when operating the going beyond the point of resistance, closes it
If the sunroof is wet, following a shower sunroof, reverse the movement of the sunroof completely.
or washing the vehicle, wait until it is by pressing the control button in question.
The sunroof and windows can be closed
completely dry before opening. The driver must ensure that passengers use
by holding down the remote control
Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by the sunroof correctly.
locking button.
snow or ice - risk of damage! Any manual intervention on the position of
Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or the sunroof may disturb the anti-pinch device.
Opening/closing the blind
ice from the sunroof. Perform a reinitialisation.
►  To open the blind, pull its handle backwards
Anti-pinch system until the desired position is reached.
Regularly check the condition of the ►  To close the blind, push its handle forwards
sunroof seals (e.g. presence of dust, If the sunroof encounters an obstacle when
until the desired position is reached.
dead leaves). closing, the movement is automatically reversed.
If using a car wash, check first that the roof is Opening/closing the sunroof Reinitialisation
correctly closed and keep the high-pressure
►  To open the sunroof, use the part of the Reinitialisation is required after reconnecting the
jet at least 30 centimetres from the seals.
button located towards the rear. battery, or if the sunroof malfunctions or moves
►  To close the sunroof, use the part of the in a jerky manner.
Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof button located towards the front. ►  Check that nothing is affecting the movement
open. of the sunroof and that the seals are clean.
Operating the button
►  With the ignition on, press and hold
►  Pressing the button beyond its point of
Operation resistance opens or closes the sunroof fully.
the front part of the button to close the
sunroof.
When opening the sunroof fully, the movable ►  Pressing the button again stops the
The sunroof closes step by step. When fully
glass moves to a partially open position, then movement in progress.
closed, it performs a slight opening/closing
slides over the roof. Any intermediate position is ►  By keeping the button pressed (without going
movement.
possible. beyond the point of resistance), the movement of
►  Release the button 1 second after the end of
the glass stops when this button is released.
the movement.

39
 Ease of use and comfort

Correct driving position Front head restraints Refitting a head restraint

►  Insert the head restraint rods into the guides
For safety reasons, adjustments must
only be made when the vehicle is
Adjusting the height in the corresponding seat backrest.
►  Push the head restraint fully down.
stationary. ►  Press the lug A to release the head restraint
and push it down.
Before taking to the road and to make the most
►  Adjust the height of the head restraint.
of the ergonomic layout of the instruments and
controls, carry out these adjustments in the Never drive with the head restraints
following order: removed; they should be in place and
–  head restraint height. adjusted for the occupant of the seat.
–  seat backrest angle.
–  seat cushion height.
–  longitudinal seat position. Upwards:
►  Pull the head restraint up to the desired
Front seats
–  steering wheel height and reach.
–  rear view mirror and door mirrors. position; you can feel the head restraint clicking
Before moving the seat backwards,
into position.
ensure that there is no person or object
Downwards:
that might prevent the full travel of the seat.
►  Press lug A to lower the head restraint.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
The head restraint is correctly adjusted passengers if present in the rear seats or of
when its upper edge is level with the top jamming the seat if large objects are placed
of the head. on the floor behind the seat.

Removing a head restraint Manual adjustments

►  Tilt the backrest to the rear to make it easier
to remove the head restraint. Longitudinal
►  Pull the head restraint fully up.
Once these adjustments have been ►  Press lug A to release the head restraint and
made, check that the instrument panel raise it fully.
can be viewed correctly from your driving ►  Stow the head restraint securely.
position.

40
 Ease of use and comfort

►  Raise the control bar and slide the seat

forwards or backwards.
Lumbar
(driver only)
Lumbar
3
►  Release the control bar to lock the seat in
position on one of the notches.

Backrest angle

►  Press one of the controls to obtain the

desired lumbar support.
►  Turn the knob to obtain the desired level of
lumbar support. Massage function
►  Turn the knob to obtain the desired angle. Electric adjustments This function provides lumbar massage; it only
operates when the engine is running as well as
Backrest angle in STOP mode of the Stop & Start system.
Height
Activation/Deactivation
►  Press this button to activate/deactivate
the function.
Upon activation, the indicator lamp comes on.
The massage function is activated for a period
of one hour.
►  Pull the control upwards to raise or push it ►  Tilt the control forwards or rearwards. During this time, massage is performed in
downwards to lower, until you obtain the position 6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage
required. Cushion height
followed by a 4-minute break).
After one hour, the function is deactivated; the
indicator lamp goes off.

►  Tilt the rear of the control upwards or

downwards to obtain the required height.

41
 Ease of use and comfort

Heated seats Prolonged use of heated seats is not ►  Adjust the height and reach to suit your
recommended for people with sensitive driving position.
skin. ►  Push the control to lock the steering wheel.
There is a risk of burns for people whose
For safety reasons, these adjustments
perception of heat is impaired (e.g. illness,
must only be carried out with the vehicle
taking medication).
stationary.
To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent
a short circuit:
–  Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the
seat. Heated steering wheel
The function is active only with the engine –  Do not kneel or stand on the seat. (Depending on country of sale)
running and when the outside temperature is –  Do not spill liquids onto the seat. In cold weather, this function heats the circular
below 20°C. –  Never use the heating function if the seat part of the steering wheel.
►  Press the button corresponding to the seat. is damp. It can be activated when the outside temperature
►  Each press changes the heating level; the is below 20°C.
corresponding number of indicator lamps come
on. Steering wheel
►  To switch off the heating, press the button
until all of the indicator lamps are off.
adjustment
The system status is memorised when the
ignition is switched off.

Do not use the function when the seat

is not occupied.
Reduce the heating intensity as soon as ►  With the engine running, press this button to
possible. activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by the
When the seat and passenger compartment indicator lamp coming on/going out).
have reached a satisfactory temperature, The system is automatically deactivated every
switch the function off; reducing electrical time the engine is switched off.
consumption in turn decreases energy
consumption.
►  When stationary, pull the control to release
the steering wheel.

42
 Ease of use and comfort

Mirrors Manual folding

The mirrors can be folded manually (parking
Demisting/Defrosting
The demisting/defrosting of the door
3
Door mirrors obstruction, narrow garage, etc.).
►  Turn the mirror towards the vehicle.
mirrors works with the demisting/
defrosting of the rear screen.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should For more information on Rear screen
be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". Electric folding demisting/defrosting, refer to the
The objects that you see in the mirrors are Depending on equipment, the door mirrors can corresponding section.
in fact closer than they appear. Take this be folded electrically.
into account in order to correctly judge the ►  From the inside, with the
Interior rear view mirror
distance of vehicles approaching from behind. ignition on, place control A in the Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
central position. darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
Adjustment ►  Pull control A backwards.
headlamps of other vehicles, etc.
►  Lock the vehicle from the outside.
Manual model
If the mirrors are folded using control A,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is Day/night position
unlocked.

Electric unfolding
►  From outside: unlock the vehicle.
►  From inside: with the ignition on, place
control A in the central position and then pull it
rearwards.
►  Move control A to the right or to the left to ►  Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle
The remote-controlled automatic door
select the corresponding mirror. "night" position.
mirror folding/unfolding function is
►  Move control B in any of the four directions ►  Push the lever to change to the normal "day"
configured via the Driving / Vehicle touch
to adjust. position.
screen menu.
►  Return control A to its central position. Adjustment
►  Adjust the mirror to the normal "day" position.

43
 Ease of use and comfort

Automatic "electrochrome" model Rear head restraints Never drive with passengers seated at
the rear when the head restraints are
removed; the head restraints should be in
place and in the high position.
The head restraint for the centre seat
and those for the outer seats are not
interchangeable.

The electrochrome system uses a sensor that

detects the level of exterior brightness and that Folding the backrests
coming from the rear of the vehicle, in order to Manoeuvring the backrests should only
They have two positions:
automatically and gradually switch between day be done when the vehicle is stationary.
– A high position, for when the seat is in use:
and night usage.
►  Pull the head restraint fully up.
First steps:
To ensure optimum visibility while – A low position, for stowing, when the seat is
►  Lower the head restraints.
manoeuvring, the mirror automatically not in use:
►  If necessary, move the front seats forward.
brightens when reverse gear is engaged. ►  Press the lug A to release the head
►  Check that no person or object might interfere
The system is deactivated if the load in the restraint and push it down.
with the folding of the backrests (e.g. clothing,
boot exceeds the height of the load space The rear head restraints can be removed.
luggage).
cover or if the load space cover has items Removing a head restraint
placed on it.
►  Release the backrest using control 1.
►  Tilt the backrest slightly forwards.

Rear bench seat ►  Pull the head restraint fully up.

►  Press the lug A to release the head restraint
Bench seat with fixed cushions and split folding and remove it completely.
backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot load space. Refitting a head restraint
The rear seat cushion remains fixed. To ►  Insert the head restraint rods into the guides
increase the boot loading volume, tilt the in the corresponding backrest.
bench seat backrest. ►  Push the head restraint fully down.
►  Press the lug A to release the head restraint
and push it down. ►  Press the backrest release grip 1.

44
 Ease of use and comfort

►  Guide the backrest 2 down to the horizontal

position.
passengers in the event of sudden braking or
an accident.
Do not use the function when the seat
is not occupied. 3
The contents of the boot may be thrown Reduce the heating intensity as soon as
When the backrest is released, the red
forwards - risk of serious injury! possible.
indicator in the release grip is visible.
When the seat and passenger compartment
have reached a satisfactory temperature,
Repositioning the backrests Heated seats switch the function off; reducing electrical
consumption in turn decreases energy
First check that the outer seat belts are consumption.
lying vertically flat alongside the backrest
latching rings.
Prolonged use of heated seats is not
recommended for people with sensitive
skin.
There is a risk of burns for people whose
perception of heat is impaired (e.g. illness,
taking medication).
To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent
a short circuit:
–  Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the
The control knobs for each side seat are located
seat.
at the rear of the centre console.
–  Do not kneel or stand on the seat.
►  Turn the corresponding knob to switch on and
–  Do not spill liquids onto the seat.
select a setting:
–  Never use the heating function if the seat
►  Put the backrest 2 in the upright position and •  0 = off.
is damp.
push it firmly to latch it home. •  1 = low.
►  Check that the red indicator is no longer •  2 = medium.
•  3 = high.
visible in the release grip 1.
►  Ensure that the outer seat belts were not The function is active only with the engine Heating and Ventilation
trapped during the operation. running and when the outside temperature is
Air intake
below 20°C.
Please note: an incorrectly latched The air circulating in the passenger compartment
backrest compromises the safety of is filtered and originates either from the
exterior, via the grille located at the base of the

45
 Ease of use and comfort

windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation Advice time in the sunshine, air the passenger
mode. compartment for a few moments.
Controls Using the ventilation and air Put the air flow control at a setting high
conditioning system enough to quickly change the air in the
Depending on version, the controls are ►  To ensure that air is distributed evenly, passenger compartment.
accessible in the Climate touch screen menu keep the external air intake grilles at the base
or are grouped together on the centre console of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the
panel. Condensation created by the air
air outlets and the air extractor in the boot conditioning results in a discharge of
Air distribution free from obstructions. water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly
►  Do not cover the sunshine sensor located normal.
on the dashboard; this sensor is used to
regulate the automatic air conditioning
Servicing the ventilation and air
system.
conditioning system
►  Operate the air conditioning system for at
►  Ensure that the passenger compartment
least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to
filter is in good condition and have the filter
keep it in good working order.
elements replaced regularly.
►  If the system does not produce cold air,
We recommend using a composite passenger
switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or
compartment filter. Its specific active additive
a qualified workshop.
helps protect against polluting gases and bad
When towing a large load on a steep gradient
smells.
in high temperatures, switching off the air
►  To ensure correct operation of the
conditioning increases the available engine
air conditioning system, have it checked
power, enhancing the towing capacity.
1. Windscreen demisting/de-icing vents according to the recommendations in the
2. Front side window demisting/de-icing vents Manufacturer’s service schedule.
3. Adjustable and closable side air vents Avoid driving for too long with the
4. Adjustable and closable central air vents ventilation off or with prolonged operation
Stop & Start
5. Air outlets to the front footwells of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and
The heating and air conditioning systems
6. Air outlets to the rear footwells deterioration of the air quality!
only operate when the engine is running.
7. Adjustable and closable air vents Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
If the interior temperature is very high system to maintain a comfortable temperature
after the vehicle has stood for a long in the passenger compartment.

46
 Ease of use and comfort

For more information on the Stop &

Start system, refer to the corresponding
Air flow adjustment
►  Turn the thumbwheel 2 to obtain a sufficient
–  lower the temperature in summer,
–  increase the effectiveness of demisting in 3
section. winter, above 3°C.
air flow to ensure your comfort.
►  Press knob 1 to turn the air conditioning on/
ECO driving mode If the air flow control is in off.
Selecting this mode reduces electrical the minimum position (system When the system is activated, the indicator lamp
energy consumption, but restricts the deactivated), the temperature in the vehicle comes on.
performance of the heating and air will no longer be controlled. A slight flow of air
Air conditioning does not operate when
conditioning systems, although it does not can still be felt, due to the forward movement
the air flow is disabled.
deactivate them. of the vehicle.
To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior
air recirculation for a brief period. Then return
Adjusting the air distribution to the intake of exterior air.
Manual air conditioning Windscreen and side windows Switching off the air conditioning may result in
some discomfort (humidity or misting).
Central and side air vents
Switching the system off
Footwells
►  Press knob 2; all the indicator lamps of the
1. Adjusting the temperature system go out.
►  Press one of the buttons 3 to adjust the air
Air conditioning on/off This action deactivates all of the functions of the
distribution inside the passenger compartment.
2. Adjusting the air flow air conditioning system.
The lighting of the button indicates that air
System switch-off The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight
is being blown in the specified direction. It
3. Adjusting the air distribution flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward
is possible to activate the following buttons
4. Interior air recirculation movement of the vehicle.
simultaneously:
5. Rear screen demisting/de-icing
–  Central and side air vents + footwells.
The air conditioning system only operates with –  Windscreen and side windows + footwells. Dual-zone automatic air
the engine running.
Air conditioning on/off conditioning
Adjusting the temperature The air conditioning system is designed to This system automatically controls the activation
►  Turn the knob 1 from blue (cold) to red (hot). operate effectively in all seasons, with the of the air conditioning system, regulating the
windows closed. temperature, air flow and air distribution inside
It is used to: the passenger compartment.

47
 Ease of use and comfort

To adjust the system, use the central controls 2. Right-hand side temperature adjustment  Automatic Comfort
or press the button in the Climate menu on the
touch screen to display the controls page.
Maximum air conditioning (central controls) programme
3. Adjusting the air flow
This automatic mode ensures optimum
Automatic Comfort programme (central
management of the passenger compartment
controls)
temperature, air flow and air distribution, based
4. Interior air recirculation
on the selected comfort level.
5. Automatic Visibility programme
►  Press knob 3 on the central controls or button
6. Rear screen demisting/de-icing
Central controls 10 on the touch screen to activate/deactivate the
7. Direct access to the Climate menu
air conditioning system's automatic mode.
8. Adjusting the air distribution
The indicator lamp in the button lights up
9. Air conditioning on/off
when the air conditioning system is operating
10. Automatic Comfort programme
automatically.
11. Mono-zone/Dual-zone
You can adjust the intensity of the
12. Access to the secondary page
automatic Comfort programme by using the
13. Temperature conditioning (depending on
"OPTIONS" button to select one of the available
version)
settings:
14. Selection of setting for the Automatic
– "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by
Comfort programme (Soft/Normal/Fast).
limiting air flow.
This system works with the engine running but – "Normal": offers the best compromise
access to the ventilation and its controls remains between a comfortable temperature and quiet
possible with the ignition on. operation (default setting).
– "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow.
Adjusting the temperature To change the current setting (shown by the
The driver and front passenger can each choose corresponding indicator lamp), press button 14
their own temperature setting. repeatedly until the desired setting is displayed.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of To ensure passenger comfort in the rear seats,
comfort and not to a precise temperature. favour "Normal" and "Fast" settings.
►  Turn the knob 1 or 2 or press one of the This setting is associated with automatic mode
Touch screen buttons 1 or 2 on the touch screen to increase only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode,
(red) or decrease (blue) the value. the indicator lamp for the most recently selected
1. Left-hand side temperature adjustment 
It is recommended that you avoid a difference of setting remains on.
Air conditioning on/off (central controls)
more than 3°C in the settings for left and right.

48
 Ease of use and comfort

Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO

mode if it was deactivated.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in according
to the request.
When the system is activated, the indicator lamp
comes on. 3
When the air flow is reduced to a minimum,
In cold weather with the engine cold, the Air conditioning does not operate when
ventilation stops.
air flow is increased gradually until the the air flow is disabled.
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
comfort setting has been reached, in order to To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior
limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger Adjusting the air distribution air recirculation for a brief period. Then return
compartment. to the intake of exterior air.
►  Press the buttons 8 on the touch screen
On entering the vehicle, if the interior Switching off the air conditioning may result in
to adjust the air flow distribution inside the
temperature is much colder or warmer than some discomfort (humidity or misting).
passenger compartment.
the comfort setting requested, there is no
Windscreen and side windows
need to alter the value displayed to more
quickly reach the required level of comfort.
Maximum air conditioning
Central and side air vents This function automatically adjusts the
The system automatically corrects the
temperature difference as quickly as possible. temperature setting to the lowest possible, the
Footwells air distribution towards the central and side air
vents, the air flow to maximum and activates
Manual control The lighting of the button indicates that air is interior air recirculation.
It is possible to manually adjust one or more being blown in the specified direction. ►  Press knob 2 to activate/deactivate the
of these functions, while the system retains It is possible to activate the following buttons function (confirmed by the indicator lamp coming
automatic control of the other functions: simultaneously: on/switching off).
–  air flow. –  Central and side air vents + footwells Once the function is deactivated, the system
–  air distribution. –  Windscreen and side windows + footwells returns to the previous settings.
The indicator lamp in the "AUTO” button goes
out if a setting is changed.
Air conditioning on/off Mono-zone/Dual-zone
►  Press knob 3 or button 10 of the touch The air conditioning system is designed to The passenger temperature setting can be linked
screen again to reactivate the automatic Comfort operate effectively in all seasons, with the to the driver's setting (mono-zone function).
programme. windows closed. ►  Press button 11 to activate the "MONO"
It is used to: function.
Adjusting the air flow –  lower the temperature in summer, The function is automatically deactivated if the
►  Turn the knob 3 or press one of the buttons –  increase the effectiveness of demisting in passenger uses their temperature adjustment
3 on the touch screen to increase or decrease winter, above 3°C. buttons (dual-zone function).
the air flow. ►  Press knob 1 or button 9 on the touch screen
to activate/deactivate the air conditioning.

49
 Ease of use and comfort

Automatic Visibility Front demisting It is possible to manually change the air flow
without deactivating the automatic Visibility
programme - defrosting programme.
For more information on button 5, refer to the
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
“Front Demisting/Defrosting” section. With manual air been activated, STOP mode is not
Ventilation with the ignition conditioning available.

on ►  Adjust the temperature to maximum (red).

►  Adjust the air flow to maximum. In wintry conditions, before moving off,
When the ignition is switched on, you can use
►  Press this button to activate the air remove all snow or ice on the windscreen
the ventilation system to adjust the air flow
distribution to the "Windscreen" position; near the camera.
settings and the air distribution in the passenger
its indicator lamp comes on. Otherwise, the operation of the equipment
compartment, for a period which depends on the
►  Check that the recirculation of interior air is using the camera may be affected.
battery charge.
deactivated; its indicator lamp must be off.
This function does not operate the air
►  Switch on the air conditioning by pressing the
conditioning.
"A/C" button; its indicator lamp comes on. Heated windscreen
Interior air recirculation With automatic dual-zone
The intake of exterior air prevents the formation air conditioning
of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
Recirculating the interior air isolates the Automatic Visibility programme
passenger compartment from outside odours This mode allows the windscreen and side
and fumes and allows the desired passenger windows to be demisted or defrosted as quickly
compartment temperature to be achieved more as possible.
rapidly. ►  Press this button to activate/deactivate In cold weather, this function heats the entire
►  Press this button to activate/deactivate the mode (confirmed by the illumination/ windscreen and complements the Automatic
the function (confirmed by the extinction of the indicator lamp). Visibility programme to speed up the evacuation
illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). The programme automatically manages the air of elements that interfere with visibility (e.g. dew,
conditioning (depending on version), air flow mist, frost, snow), located on either side of the
This function is activated automatically windscreen.
and air intake, and provides optimum distribution
when reverse gear is engaged. It can be used both before setting off and while
towards the windscreen and side windows.
driving.

50
 Ease of use and comfort

Switching on/off Demisting/defrosting therefore switches

off automatically to prevent an excessive
To optimise the driving range, we recommend
starting a programme while the vehicle is 3
consumption of electrical current. connected.

Programming can also be carried out

Temperature conditioning from a smartphone using the MyCitroën
(Electric) App application.
For more information on Remote functions,
This function allows you to programme the refer to the corresponding section.
temperature in the passenger compartment to
reach a pre-defined, non-modifiable temperature The fan noise that occurs during
►  With the engine running, press this button to (approx. 21°C) before you enter the vehicle, on temperature pre-conditioning is perfectly
activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an the days and at the times of your choice. normal.
indicator lamp). This function is available when the vehicle is
The period of operation depends on the outside
temperature.
connected or not connected.
Operating conditions
The function switches off automatically to Programming –  The function is only activated when the
prevent excessive power consumption. ignition is switched off and the vehicle
With 10-inch touch screen locked.

Rear screen demisting/ In the Climate > OPTIONS menu:

Select Temperature conditioning.
–  When the vehicle is not connected, the
function is only activated if the battery charge
defrosting level is greater than 50%.
►  Press + to add a programme. –  When the vehicle is not connected and a
This demisting/de-icing only works with the
►  Select the time of entry into the vehicle and recurring programme is active (e.g. from Monday
engine running.
the desired days. Press OK. to Friday), if two temperature pre-conditioning
It also demists/de-ices the door mirrors.
►  Press ON to activate this programme. sequences are run without the vehicle being
►  Press this button to activate/deactivate
The temperature pre-conditioning sequence used, the programme will be deactivated.
the function (confirmed by the indicator
begins approximately 45 minutes before the
lamp coming on/switching off).
programmed time when the vehicle is connected
The function can be activated whatever the
(20 minutes when it is not connected) and is
outside temperature may be.
maintained for 10 minutes after.
The period of operation depends on the outside
temperature. You can set multiple programmes.
Each one is saved in the system.

51
 Ease of use and comfort

Interior fittings act like a magnifying glass under the effect of

the sun's rays and cause a fire - risk of fire or
Smart Pad Support Citroën
This allows you to place a mobile device, such
damage to interior surfaces!
as a smartphone or touch screen tablet, into a
dedicated holder (sold separately).
Sun visor ►  Press the bracket to make it pop out.
►  Open the clamp on the back of the holder to
►  With the ignition on, raise the concealing
insert the mobile device.
flap; depending on the version, the mirror is
illuminated automatically. Remove the mobile device before
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket stowing the bracket.
holder.

Glove box USB sockets

►  To open the glove box, lift the handle. These symbols determine the type of use of a
With the ignition on, the glove box is lit when USB socket:
open. Power supply and recharging.

Never drive with the glove box open Likewise, plus exchange of multimedia
1. Sun visor when a passenger is at the front. It may data with the audio system.
2. Smart Pad Support Citroën cause injury during sharp deceleration!
3. Dashboard drawer
4. Glove box
5. Wireless smartphone charger Dashboard drawer
USB sockets (type A/type C) ►  To open the drawer, press the handle and
6. Storage compartment pull.
12 V socket
Never drive with the drawer open and a
7. Storage compartment with cup holders
passenger in the front seat - risk of injury
8. Centre armrest with storage compartment USB sockets allow the connection of a portable
during sharp deceleration!
9. Door pockets device.
10. USB sockets The USB socket located at the
Heated rear seats front on the left-hand side also
allows a smartphone to be connected by Android
Make sure you do not leave any item in
the passenger compartment which could

52
 Ease of use and comfort

Auto® or CarPlay®, enabling certain smartphone

applications to be used on the touch screen.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as a
With the Keyless Entry and Start system, the
charger’s operation may be briefly disrupted 3
For best results, use a cable made or approved USB charger, may adversely affect the when a door is opened or the ignition is switched
by the device manufacturer. operation of vehicle electrical systems, off.
These applications can be managed using the causing faults such as poor radio reception or
steering-mounted controls or the audio system interference with displays in the screens. Charging
controls. ►  With the charging area clear, place a device
in its centre.
When the USB socket is used, the Wireless smartphone
portable device charges automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed if the
charger
When the portable device is detected, the
power drawn by the portable device exceeds charger’s indicator lamp lights up green. It
the current supplied by the vehicle. remains lit for the whole time that the battery is
For more information about how to use this being charged.
equipment, refer to the sections describing
the audio and telematics systems. The system is not designed to charge
multiple devices simultaneously.

12 V accessory socket Do not leave metal objects (e.g. coins,

keys, vehicle remote control) in the
This system allows wireless charging of a
charging area while a device is being charged
portable device such as a smartphone, using the
- Risk of overheating or interrupting the
magnetic induction principle, in accordance with
charging!
the Qi 1.1 standard.
The portable device to be charged must be
compatible with the Qi standard, either by design
or by using a compatible holder or shell.
A mat can also be used provided that it is
►  Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum
approved by the Manufacturer. When using applications for a long time
rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter.
The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol. in combination with wireless charging,
Observe the maximum power rating to The charger works with the engine running and some smartphones may switch to thermal
avoid damaging the accessory. with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode. safety and cause some functions to stop.
Charging is managed by the smartphone.

53
 Ease of use and comfort

Checking operation –  remove the device and try again in a quarter Mats
The state of the indicator lamp allows the of an hour.
operation of the charger to be monitored. If the problem persists, have the system checked Fitting
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
State of the Meaning
indicator lamp CITROËN Hi-Fi system
Off Engine switched off. (Depending on version)
No compatible devices
detected.
Charging complete.
Fixed green Compatible portable
device detected.
Charging. When fitting it on the driver's side, only use
the mountings present on the carpet (a "click"
Flashing orange Foreign object detected in
indicates proper locking).
the charging zone. The vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity
The other mats are simply laid over the carpet.
Portable device not well acoustic system.
centred in the charging 8 speakers offer the pleasure of pure and
Removing/refitting
zone. detailed sound inside the vehicle:
►  To remove it on the driver's side, move the
–  2 tweeters and 2 woofers in the front
Fixed orange Malfunction of the seat backwards and unclip the fasteners.
–  2 full range speakers in the rear
portable device's battery ►  To refit it, position the mat and secure it by
–  1 speaker in the central area of the dashboard
meter. pressing down.
–  1 subwoofer under the trunk carpet
Device battery ►  Check that the mat is secured correctly.
temperature too high.
Charger malfunction. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
–  Only use mats which are suited to the
fixings already present in the vehicle; these
fixings must be used.
If the indicator lamp is fixed orange:
–  Never fit one mat on top of another.
–  remove the device, then place it back in the
The use of mats not approved by CITROËN
centre of the charging zone.
may interfere with access to the pedals and
or
hinder the operation of the cruise control/
speed limiter.

54
 Ease of use and comfort

The approved mats have two fasteners

located underneath the seat.
–  when a door is opened.
–  when the remote control locking button is
Interior ambient lighting
The interior ambient lighting casts soft lighting in
3
activated, in order to locate the vehicle.
It switches off gradually: the passenger compartment, both day and night.

Courtesy lamps –  when the vehicle is locked. Activation/deactivation and adjustment of

the brightness are set via the Driving/
–  when the ignition is switched on.
–  30 seconds after the last door is closed. Vehicle touch screen menu.
Permanently off.
Boot fittings
Permanent lighting.

1. Front courtesy lamp In "Permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time

2. Front reading lamps varies according to the circumstances:
–  With the ignition off, approximately 10 minutes.
–  In energy saving mode, approximately 30
seconds.
–  With the engine running, unlimited.

When the front courtesy lamp is in the

1. Boot lamp
"Permanent lighting" position, the rear
2. Stowing rings
courtesy lamp also comes on, unless it is in
3. Side storage boxes
the "Permanently off" position.
4. Boot carpet or 2-position boot floor
To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it in
3. Rear courtesy lamp 5. Storage well
the "Permanently off" position.
4. Rear reading lamps
The stowing rings are designed to secure
Front and rear courtesy Reading lamps luggage using different types of retaining
►  With the ignition on, operate the nets.
lamps corresponding switch. These retaining nets are available as an
In this position, the courtesy lamp comes accessory.
on gradually: Do not place anything against the For more information, contact a CITROËN
–  when the vehicle is unlocked. courtesy lamps. dealer or a qualified workshop.
–  when the key is removed from the ignition
switch.

55
 Ease of use and comfort

2-position boot floor Storage well

This two-position floor allows the boot volume to
be optimised using the lateral stops located on
the sides:
–  High position (100 kg max.): to obtain a flat
floor up to the front seats, when the rear seats
are folded down.
–  Low position (150 kg max.): maximum boot
volume.
►  Lift the boot floor as far as possible, then lift
On certain versions, the adjustable boot the carpet to access the storage well.
floor cannot be fitted in the low position. Depending on version, it includes:
–  A temporary puncture repair kit with the tool
To change the height: kit.
►  Lift and pull the floor towards you using its –  A spare wheel with the tool kit.
central handle, then use the lateral stops to –  The traction battery charging cable (Electric).
move it.
►  Push the floor all the way forwards to place it Boot lamp
in the desired position.
It comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
The lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
–  When the ignition is off, approximately 10
minutes.
–  In energy saving mode, approximately 30
To keep it in the inclined position: seconds.
►  From the high position, lift the floor towards –  With the engine running, unlimited.
the boot.
►  Take it past the retractable stops, then rest
the floor on these stops.

56
 Lighting and visibility

Lighting control stalk In "AUTO" and sidelamps mode, pull the lighting
control stalk to switch the main beam headlamps 4
on directly ("headlamp flash").
Main lighting
Display
Illumination of the corresponding indicator ►  Rotate the ring forwards:
lamp on the instrument panel confirms that the •  once to switch on the front foglamps,
selected lighting is on. •  a second time to switch on the rear foglamp.
A fault with a lamp is signalled by the ►  Turn in the opposite direction to switch off.
permanent illumination of this warning If the lighting is switched off automatically
lamp, accompanied by the display of a message ("AUTO" position) or the dipped beam
and an audible signal. headlamps are switched off manually, the
foglamps and sidelamps remain on.
Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime Rear foglamp ►  Rotate the ring backwards to switch the
running lamps It only works if the dipped or main beam foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch off.
Sidelamps only headlamps are on.
Switching on the foglamps is prohibited
Dipped or main beam headlamps in clear weather or in rain, both day and
night. In these situations, the power of their
beams may dazzle other drivers. They must
Headlamp dipping only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may
vary depending on country).
Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when
►  Rotate the ring forwards/backwards to turn
they are no longer necessary.
it on/off.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
("AUTO" position) the foglamp and the Switching off of the lighting when the
sidelamps remain on. ignition is switched off
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
Front foglamps/Rear lamps turn off immediately, except for the
sidelamps and the dipped beam headlamps
foglamp if automatic guide-me-home lighting is
►  Pull the lighting control stalk to switch They operate with the sidelamps, dipped activated.
between dipped and main beam headlamps. or main beam headlamps on.

57
 Lighting and visibility

Switching on the lamps after

switching off the ignition
Travelling abroad
If planning to use your vehicle in a
Direction indicators
To reactivate the lighting control, rotate the country that drives on the other side of the
ring to the "AUTO" position, then to the road, the dipped beam headlamps must be
desired position. adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming drivers.
If the driver's door is opened, a temporary Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
audible signal warns the driver that the lamps workshop.
are on.
They will go off automatically after a period
of time that depends on the level of charge in
Daytime running lamps/
the battery (entering energy economy mode). Sidelamps
These LED lamps at the front and rear of the
In some weather conditions (e.g. low vehicle light up automatically when the engine
temperature or humidity), misting on the starts. ►  Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control
internal surface of the glass of the headlamps They perform the following functions: stalk, beyond the point of resistance.
and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear –  Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk If you keep the direction indicators on for
after the lamps have been on for a few at position "AUTO" with adequate ambient light). more than 20 seconds, the volume of the
minutes. –  Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position audible signal will increase if the speed is
"AUTO" with low ambient light or "Sidelamps above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Never look too closely at the light beam only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps").
of LED technology lamps - risk of serious
eye injury! Three flashes
►  Press briefly upwards or downwards, without
going beyond the point of resistance; the
direction indicators will flash 3 times.

Parking lamps
(Depending on version)
Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps
on the traffic side only.
►  Within one minute after switching off the
ignition, operate the lighting control stalk

58
 Lighting and visibility

upwards or downwards, depending on the side

of the traffic (e.g. when parking on the right, push
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
To avoid dazzling other road users, the height
of these headlamp beams must be adjusted 4
the lighting control stalk down to light up on the according to the load in the vehicle.
Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor
left). 0 (Initial setting)
located at the top centre of the
This is confirmed by an audible signal and the Driver only or driver + front passenger
windscreen behind the interior rear view
lighting of the corresponding direction indicator 1 5 people
mirror; the associated functions would no
lamp on the instrument panel. 2 5 people + load in the boot
longer be controlled.
►  To switch off the parking lamps, return the 3 Driver only + load in the boot
lighting control stalk to the central position. 4 5 6 Not used
In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. For this
Automatic illumination of reason, the lighting will not come on Guide-me-home and
lamps automatically.
welcome lighting
With the lighting control stalk in the “AUTO”
The inner surface of the windscreen may
position and if a low level of exterior brightness
is detected by the rain/sunshine sensor, the
become misted up and affect the proper Guide-me-home lighting
operation of the rain/sunshine sensor. Automatic
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
In humid and cold weather, demist the
switched on automatically, without any action on With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the
windscreen regularly.
the part of the driver. They may also come on if "AUTO" position and when the light is poor, the
rain is detected, at the same time as automatic sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps come
operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient Headlamp beam height on automatically when the ignition is switched
off.
level or after the windscreen wipers are switched adjustment You can activate/deactivate this function
off, the lamps are switched off automatically. and adjust the guide-me-home lighting
duration in the Driving/Vehicle touch screen
Malfunction menu.
In the event of a malfunction of the rain/
sunshine sensor, the vehicle’s lamps
come on and this warning lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and/or the display of a message.

59
 Lighting and visibility

Manual –  when the vehicle is unlocked. Maintenance

–  when a door is opened. Clean the windscreen regularly,
–  when a request to locate the vehicle is particularly the area in front of the camera.
received from the remote control. The internal surface of the windscreen can
Whatever the position of the front courtesy lamp also become misted around the camera.
switch, they also come on with the welcome In humid and cold weather, demist the
lighting and guide-me-home lighting functions. windscreen regularly.
They go off automatically after 30 seconds. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
►  With the ignition off, pull the lighting control
stalk toward you ("headlamp flash") to activate/
Automatic lighting obstruct the camera.

deactivate the function. systems - General

Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
recommendations Automatic headlamp
automatically after a period of time.
The automatic lighting systems use a detection dipping
Welcome lighting camera, located at the top of the windscreen.
For more information, refer to the
When the vehicle is unlocked, if the ambient Operating limits General recommendations for
light is low and the "Automatic illumination of The system may be disrupted or not work automatic lighting systems.
headlamps" function is activated, this system correctly:
automatically turns on certain exterior lamps –  When visibility conditions are poor With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the
as well as certain lamps in the passenger (e.g. snowfall, heavy rain). "AUTO" position and the function activated on
compartment. –  If the windscreen is dirty, misted-up or the touch screen, this system automatically
You can activate/deactivate this function masked (e.g. sticker) in front of the camera. switches between dipped and main beam
and adjust the welcome lighting duration –  If the vehicle is facing highly reflective signs headlamps, according to lighting and traffic
in the Driving / Vehicle touch screen tablet or safety barrier reflectors. conditions, using a camera located at the top of
menu. The system is not able to detect: the windscreen.
–  Road users that do not have their own
Door mirror spotlamps lighting, such as pedestrians.
These spotlamps facilitate access to the vehicle –  Vehicles with hidden lighting (e.g. travelling
by lighting the ground near the front doors. behind a safety barrier on the motorway).
When the front courtesy lamp switch is in –  Vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep
this position, the spotlamps come on slope, on winding roads, on crossroads.
automatically:

60
 Lighting and visibility

The state of the system stays in the memory

when switching off the ignition.
If the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator lamps
were on, the system changes to dipped beam. 4
►  To reactivate the function, once again switch
Operation the headlamps manually between dipped and
If the ambient light level is very low and traffic main beam.
conditions permit:
–  The main beam headlamps Malfunction
come on automatically. These If a malfunction occurs with the system or
indicator lamps light up on the instrument panel. the camera, this warning lamp lights up
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the on the instrument panel, accompanied by an
traffic conditions do not allow the main beam audible signal and a message.
headlamps to be lit: Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
–  The dipped beam headlamps qualified workshop.
remain lit. These indicator lamps
light up on the instrument panel.
The function is deactivated if the foglamps
Cornering lighting
are switched on or if the system detects poor This system makes use of the beam from a front
This system is a driving aid.
visibility conditions (e.g. fog, heavy rain, foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when
The driver remains responsible for
snowfall). the main or dipped beam headlamps are on and
the vehicle's lighting, its correct use in the
When the foglamps are switched off or when the the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)
prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions,
visibility conditions become favourable again, the (urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking
and for compliance with driving and vehicle
function is automatically reactivated. manoeuvres).
regulations.
This indicator lamp goes out when the
function is deactivated.
The system becomes operational when
the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h). Pause
When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h),
If the situation requires a change of headlamp
the function is no longer operational.
beam, the driver can take over at any time.
►  Switch the headlamps manually between
Activation/Deactivation dipped and main beam to pause the function.
Without/With cornering lighting
It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch If the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator
screen menu. lamps were on, the system changes to main
beam.

61
 Lighting and visibility

Activation / Deactivation and poorer wiping performance.  You do not Automatic wipers
need to replace the wiper blades.
It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch
Switching off
screen menu.
With intermittent wipers
Switching on/off Manual

This system starts:

–  when the corresponding direction indicator is In position 1 or 2, the wiping frequency is
switched on. automatically reduced when the speed of
or the vehicle drops below 3 mph (5 km/h).
–  from a certain angle of rotation of the steering When the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h)
wheel. again, the wiping frequency returns to the
It becomes inactive: original frequency (fast or normal).
–  below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
–  above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). With automatic Wipers Single wipe
–  when reverse gear is engaged. ►  Press and release the control stalk or briefly
pull the control stalk towards you.

Wiper control stalk Windscreen wash

►  Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and
Before operating the wipers in wintry
hold.
conditions, clear any snow, ice or frost
Windscreen wipers A final wiping cycle is performed when
from the windscreen and around the wiper
►  To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the screenwashing ends.
arms and blades.
stalk to the desired position. With automatic air conditioning, any
Fast wiping (heavy rain) action on the screenwash control results
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windscreen. In extremely hot or cold in temporary closure of the air intake to
Normal wiping (moderate rain) protect the passenger compartment from any
weather, check that the wiper blades are not
stuck to the windscreen before operating the odour.
Intermittent wipers
wipers.
or
After using an automatic car wash, you
may temporarily notice abnormal noises

62
 Lighting and visibility

To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do

not operate the screenwash if the
control stalk in the INT, 1 or 2 position, when
the ignition is switched on again:
A wiping cycle, accompanied by the display of
a message, confirms that the request has been 4
screenwash reservoir is empty. –  the system works as soon as the vehicle taken into account.
Only operate the screenwash if there is no exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), if the outside ►  To switch off, put the wiper control stalk in
risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen temperature is below +3°C. another position or in the 0 position.
and hindering visibility. During the winter –  the system works immediately, if the
period, use "very cold climate" rated products. outside temperature is above +3°C. Adjusting the sensitivity
Never top up with water.

Automatic windscreen
Front intermittent wiping wipers
In Intermittent mode, the driver can adjust the
In AUTO mode, the front wipers work
wiping frequency by turning the ring to one of the The first position (upper) corresponds to the
automatically and adapt to the intensity of
5 available positions. lowest sensitivity of the sensor.
precipitation depending on the sensitivity of the
sensor selected. The last position (lower) corresponds to the
The rainfall detection function uses a rain/ highest sensitivity of the sensor.
sunshine sensor located at the top centre of the The higher the sensitivity, the faster the system
windscreen, behind the rear view mirror. reacts and increases the wiping frequency.
A rotation of the ring from a higher position to a
The first (upper) position corresponds to the In certain weather conditions (e.g. fog, lower position triggers a confirmation wiping.
longest time interval between 2 wipes for light frost, snow, projections on salty roads),
rain. the driver may have to return to manual After the ignition has been switched off
The last (lower) position corresponds to the wiping. for more than 1 minute with the wiper
shortest time interval between 2 wipes for heavy control stalk in the AUTO position, when the
rain. ignition is switched on again:
Switching on/off –  the system works, depending on the
A rotation of the ring from a higher position to a
To switch on: volume of rain detected, as soon as the
lower position triggers a confirmation wiping.
►  Put the wiper control stalk in the AUTO vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), if the
After the ignition has been switched off position. outside temperature is below +3°C.
for more than 1 minute with the wiper ►  Turn the ring to adjust the sensitivity of the –  the system works immediately, depending
sensor. on the volume of rain detected, if the outside
temperature is above +3°C.

63
 Lighting and visibility

Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor. Before removing a windscreen wiper blade Changing a wiper blade
When using an automatic car wash,
switch off the automatic wipers and the Removing/Refitting at the front
ignition.
In winter, wait until the windscreen is
completely clear of ice before activating the
automatic wipers.

Malfunction Operating the wiper control stalk immediately

If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the after switching off the ignition will place the wiper
wipers operate in intermittent mode. blades in a vertical position.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a ►  Proceed with the desired operation or the
qualified workshop. replacement of the wiper blades.
After refitting a windscreen wiper blade
Special position of the ►  Carry out these wiper blade replacement
►  To return the wiper blades to their initial
windscreen wipers position after the operation, switch on the ignition
operations from the driver's side.
►  Starting with the wiper blade farthest from
This maintenance position is used while cleaning and operate the wiper control stalk. you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise
or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be
it as far as possible.
useful, in wintry weather (ice, snow), to release
the wiper blades from the windscreen. Do not touch the wiper blades - risk of
irreparable deformation.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
Do not release them while moving them. Risk
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
of damaging the windscreen!
–  handle them with care.
–  clean them regularly using soapy water. ►  Clean the windscreen using screenwash
–  avoid using them to hold cardboard on the fluid.
windscreen.
–  replace them at the first signs of wear. Do not apply "Rain X" type water-
repellent products.

►  Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you

and remove it.

64
 Lighting and visibility

►  Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the

arm. 4
►  Repeat the procedure for the other wiper
blade.
►  Starting with the wiper blade closest to you,
once again hold each arm by the rigid section,
then guide it carefully onto the windscreen.

65
 Safety

General safety CITROËN dealers or qualified workshops,

equipped with the special tools required (risk
Hazard warning lamps
recommendations of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic
systems that could cause breakdowns or
Do not remove the labels attached in serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot
different places on your vehicle. They be held responsible if this advice is not
include safety warnings as well as followed.
identification information for the vehicle. –  Any modification or adaptation not intended
or authorised by CITROËN or carried out
For all work on your vehicle, use a without meeting the technical requirements
qualified workshop that has the technical defined by the Manufacturer will result in the
►  Pressing this red button causes all the
information, skills and equipment required, all suspension of the commercial warranty.
direction indicators to flash.
of which a CITROËN dealer is able to
They can work with the ignition switched off.
provide. Installation of accessory radio
communication transmitters Automatic operation of
Depending on country regulations, Before installing a radio communication
certain safety equipment may be transmitter with an external aerial, you must
hazard warning lamps
mandatory: high visibility safety vests, without fail contact a CITROËN dealer for When braking in an emergency, depending on
warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the specification of transmitters which can the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial lamps come on automatically. They switch off
flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. position, specific installation requirements), automatically when you next accelerate.
in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic They can be turned off by pressing the button
Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC). again.
Installing electrical accessories:
–  The fitting of electrical equipment or
accessories not approved by CITROËN may Declarations of conformity for radio
cause excessive current consumption and equipment
faults and failures with the electrical system The relevant certificates are available on the
of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/ website.
for information on the range of approved
accessories.
–  As a safety measure, access to the
diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's
electronic systems, is reserved strictly for

66
 Safety

Horn Emergency or assistance

call
►  To make an emergency call manually, press
button 1 for more than 2 seconds. 5
The lit indicator lamp and a voice message
confirm that the call has been made to the
emergency services*.
The eCall (SOS) system immediately locates
your vehicle and puts you in contact with the
appropriate emergency services**.
►  Pressing again immediately cancels the
request.
The indicator lamp flashes while the vehicle
►  Press the central part of the steering wheel. data is being sent, and then remains lit when
1. eCall (SOS) communication is established.

Pedestrian horn (Electric) 2. ASSISTANCE

In the event that a serious accident is
detected by the sensors built into the
This system alerts pedestrians that the vehicle is eCall (SOS) vehicle, such as the airbag control unit, an
approaching.
Your vehicle may be fitted with the eCall (SOS) emergency call is made automatically.
The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle
system either as standard or as an option.
is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph
The eCall (SOS) system provides direct contact The eCall (SOS) system is a public
(30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear.
to the emergency services and is fully built service of general interest and is
This function cannot be deactivated.
into the vehicle. This contact is made either free-of-charge.
Malfunction automatically via the sensors built into the
In the event of a malfunction, this warning vehicle, or by pressing button 1.
lamp comes on on the instrument panel. According to the country of sale, the eCall (SOS) Operation of the system
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a system corresponds to the systems PE112, –  Upon switching on the ignition, the indicator
qualified workshop. ERAGLONASS, 999, etc. lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes
The eCall (SOS) system is activated by default. out: the system is operating correctly.

* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations.
** Depending on the geographic coverage provided by the "eCall (SOS)" and "ASSISTANCE" systems.
The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

67
 Safety

–  The indicator lamp flashes red: replace the The eCall (SOS) function is only able to Access to data
back-up battery. collect and process the following data You have the right of access to data and
–  The indicator lamp is fixed red: system relating to the vehicle: vehicle identification as appropriate to request the rectification,
malfunction. The emergency and assistance call number, vehicle type (passenger vehicle or erasure or restriction of processing of any
services may not work. light commercial vehicle), fuel type or power personal data not processed in accordance
–  If the indicator lamp does not come on when source, three most recent locations and with the provisions of GDPR. Third parties
the ignition is switched on, this also means that direction of travel, number of passengers to which data has been disclosed shall
there is a system malfunction. and a timestamped log file of the automatic be notified of any rectification, erasure or
If the problem persists, contact a qualified activation of the system and its timestamp. restriction carried out in compliance with
workshop as soon as possible. The recipients of the processed data are the GDPR, unless it proves impossible or
emergency call handling centres designated involves a disproportionate effort.
A system fault does not prevent the
by the relevant national authorities in the You also have the right to lodge a complaint
vehicle from being driven.
territory in which they are located, enabling with the respective data protection
priority routing and handling of calls to the supervisory authority.
Data processing “112” emergency number. If you want to claim your above-mentioned
All processing of personal data by rights please contact us per email at:
the eCall (SOS) function complies with privacyrights@stellantis.com.
Data storage
the framework for protection of personal For more information regarding our contact
Data contained in the system’s memory
information established by Regulation details please take a look at our Privacy &
is not accessible from outside the system until
2016/679 (General Data Protection Cookies Policy on the brand's website.
a call is made. The system is not traceable
Regulation - GDPR) and Directive 2002/58/
and is not continuously monitored in its
EC of the European Parliament and the
Council, and in particular, seeks to protect
normal operating mode.
The data in the system's internal memory is
ASSISTANCE
the vital interests of the data subject, in ►  If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2
automatically and continuously erased. Only
accordance with Article 6 (1) d) GDPR. for more than 2 seconds to request assistance
the vehicle’s three most recent locations,
The processing of personal data is strictly (confirmed by a voice message*).
necessary for the normal functioning of the
limited to the purpose of handling the eCall ►  Pressing again immediately cancels the
system, are stored.
(SOS) function used with the “112” single request.
When an emergency call is triggered, the data
European emergency call number.
log is stored for no more than 13 hours.

* Depending on the geographic coverage of the "eCall (SOS)" and "ASSISTANCE" systems and the official national language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

68
 Safety

Privacy mode allows you to manage the

level of sharing (data and/or location)
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The fixed illumination of this warning lamp
signals that there is a fault with the ABS. 5
between your vehicle and CITROËN. The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
It can be configured in the Settings touch The electronic stability control programme carefully at a moderate speed.
screen menu. includes the following systems: Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
By default, depending on equipment, –  Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic qualified workshop.
deactivate/reactivate geolocation by brake force distribution (EBFD). This warning lamp, when lit together with
simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then –  Emergency braking assistance (EBA). the STOP and ABS warning lamps,
press the "ASSISTANCE" button to confirm. –  Post Collision Safety Brake (PCSB). accompanied by a message and an audible
–  Anti-slip regulation (ASR). signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the –  Dynamic stability control (DSC). You must stop the vehicle.
CITROËN dealer network, we invite you Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
to have a dealer check the configuration of Anti-lock braking system the ignition.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
these services and, if desired, modify them to (ABS)/Electronic brake force workshop.
suit your wishes. In a multilingual country,
configuration is possible in the official national distribution (EBFD) When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
language of your choice. These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability
ensure that these are approved for your
and handling during braking, and enable greater
vehicle.
For technical reasons, in particular to control while cornering, particularly on poor or
improve the quality of telematic services slippery road surfaces.
After an impact
for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
right to carry out updates to the vehicle's emergency braking.
a qualified workshop.
on-board telematic system at any time. Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
manages overall braking pressure on each

If you benefit from the Citroën Connect

individual wheel. Post Collision Safety Brake
►  When braking in an emergency, depress
Box offer with the SOS and Assistance
the pedal very firmly and maintain this
(PCSB)
Pack included, there are additional services If an accident is detected, the vehicle initiates
pressure.
available to you in your personal space, via automatic post collision braking. The goal of this
the website for your country. Normal operation of the ABS may make system is to reduce the risk of further collisions if
For information about the SOS and itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake the driver does not react.
Assistance Pack, please refer to the general pedal. The system is not operational if the capability
conditions for these services. of the vehicle is to trigger and execute the

69
 Safety

automatic post collision braking is not available, It is triggered in relation to the speed at which Reactivate the system as soon as the level of
as it can occur in destructive accidents or in the brake pedal is depressed. The effect of this grip permits.
other specific accident scenarios. is a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and This function is set via theDriving/Vehicle
It is possible to override the automatic braking by an increase in braking efficiency. touch screen menu.
pressing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Deactivation is confirmed by the lighting
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) of this indicator lamp on the instrument
Operating conditions
/ Dynamic stability control panel and the display of a message.
The system operates, if the following conditions The ASR system is reactivated automatically
are met: (DSC) every time the ignition is switched off, or at
–  Airbags or pyrotechnic seat belt pretensioners Anti-slip regulation (or traction control) optimises speeds over 31 mph (50 km/h).
have been deployed by the collision. traction by using engine braking and by applying Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h).
–  Braking systems and electric functions remain the brakes on the driving wheels to avoid one
continuously operational during and after or more wheels spinning. It also enhances the Malfunction
collision. vehicle's directional stability. In the event of a malfunction, this warning
–  Driver has not depressed the brake or If there is a difference between the vehicle’s lamp comes on on the instrument panel,
accelerator pedal. trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the accompanied by the display of a message and
dynamic stability control system automatically an audible signal.
Malfunction uses engine braking and the brakes on one or Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
In the event of a more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired qualified workshop.
malfunction, one of these path, within the limits of the laws of physics.
ASR/DSC
warning lamps will come on fixed on the These systems are activated automatically every
These systems enhance safety during
instrument panel, accompanied by the Service time the vehicle is started.
normal driving, but should not encourage
warning lamp, the display of a message and an These systems are activated in the event
the driver to take extra risks or drive at high
audible signal. of a problem with grip or trajectory
speed.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a (confirmed by this warning lamp flashing on the
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow,
qualified workshop. instrument panel).
ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It
Emergency braking Deactivation/Reactivation is therefore important for your safety to keep
these systems activated in all conditions, and
assistance (EBA) In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
particularly in difficult conditions.
This system reduces the emergency stopping Correct operation of these systems depends
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate
distance, by optimising the braking pressure. on compliance with the manufacturer's
the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn
recommendations relating to the wheels
freely and regain grip.

70
 Safety

(tyres and rims), braking and electronic

components, as well as the assembly and
tightens the seat belts against the body of the
occupants.
Rear seat belts 5
repair procedures provided by CITROËN The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are
dealers. enabled when the ignition is on.
In order to ensure that these systems remain Force limiting system
effective in wintry conditions, the use of snow This system reduces the pressure of the seat
or all-season tyres is recommended. All four belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving
wheels must be fitted with tyres approved for their protection.
your vehicle.
In the event of an impact
All tyre specifications are listed on the
Depending on the nature and
tyre/paint label. For more information
seriousness of the impacts, the pyrotechnic
on Identification markings, refer to the
device may trigger before and independently
corresponding section.
of airbag deployment. Deployment of the Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat belt
pretensioners is accompanied by a slight with inertia reel.
discharge of harmless smoke and a noise,
Seat belts due to the activation of the pyrotechnic
The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic
pretensioning and force limiting system.
Inertia reel cartridge incorporated in the system.
The seat belts are equipped with an inertia In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes Fastening
reel which allows the strap length to adjust on. ►  Pull the strap, then insert the tongue into the
automatically to the shape of the user. The seat Following an impact, have the seat belt buckle.
belt returns to its storage automatically when it system checked, and if necessary replaced, ►  Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly
is not used. by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified by pulling on the strap.
The inertia reels are fitted with a device which workshop.
automatically locks the strap in the event of a Unfastening
collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls
over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly
Front seat belts ►  Press the red button on the buckle.
►  Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
Pyrotechnic pretensioning pretensioning system and a force limiting
This system improves safety in the event of a system.
frontal or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly

71
 Safety

Seat belts warning lamps Rear seat belt not fastened alert 2) comes on in red. At a speed greater than 12
When the ignition is switched on, if one of mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp flashes red,
display the rear passengers has not fastened their seat accompanied by an audible signal for around 2
belt, the corresponding warning lamp (3, 4 or 5) minutes. After this time has elapsed, the warning
comes on in red for 60 seconds. lamp remains on fixed in red until the seat belt is
Seat belt unfastened alert fastened.
After the ignition is switched on, if the Rear seat belt not fastened alert
driver or a passenger unfastens their seat belt, When the ignition is switched on, if one of
the corresponding warning lamp (1, 2, 3, 4 or the rear passengers has not fastened their seat
5) comes on in red. At a speed greater than belt, the corresponding warning lamp (3, 4 or 5)
12 mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp flashes, comes on in red for 60 seconds.
1. Front left seat belt warning lamp accompanied by an audible signal for around 2 Seat belt unfastened alert
2. Front right seat belt warning lamp minutes. After this time has elapsed, the warning After the ignition is switched on, if the
3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp lamp remains on until the seat belt has been driver or a passenger unfastens their seat belt,
4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp fastened again. the corresponding warning lamp (1, 2, 3, 4 or
5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp With the ignition on, if the driver or a 5) comes on in red. At a speed greater than
passenger fastens their seat belt, the 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp flashes,
Not fastened/unfastened warning lamp corresponding warning lamp (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) accompanied by an audible signal for around 2
It comes on in red on both the instrument panel comes on in green on the display. minutes. After this time has elapsed, the warning
and on the seat belts warning lamps display as With the ignition on, if one of the front or lamp remains on until the seat belt has been
soon as the system detects that a seat belt is not rear passenger seats is detected as being fastened again.
fastened or has been unfastened. unoccupied, the corresponding warning lamp (2,
Type 1 3, 4 or 5) comes on in grey. Advice
Front seat belt not fastened alert When there are no longer any not fastened/
The driver must ensure that passengers
When the ignition is switched on, if the unfastened alerts, the green or grey warning
use the seat belts correctly and that they
driver or front passenger has not fastened their lamps remain on for around 30 seconds, then
are all fastened before setting off.
seat belt, the corresponding warning lamp (1 or go off.
Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must
2) comes on in red. At a speed greater than 12 Type 2 always fasten the seat belt, even for short
mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp flashes red, Front seat belt not fastened alert journeys.
accompanied by an audible signal for around 2 When the ignition is switched on, if the Do not invert the seat belt buckles, as they
minutes. After this time has elapsed, the warning driver or front passenger has not fastened their will not fulfil their role properly.
lamp remains on fixed in red until the seat belt is seat belt, the corresponding warning lamp (1 or
fastened.

72
 Safety

To ensure the proper functioning of the belt

buckles, make sure that there are no foreign
For more information on Child seats, refer to
the corresponding section.
occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not 5
bodies present (e.g. a coin) before fastening. to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the
Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt Maintenance occupants.
is reeled in correctly. In accordance with current safety –  In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench regulations, for all work on your vehicle's and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned seat belts, contact a qualified workshop with may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to
and reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a protect you in these situations.
CITROËN dealer is able to provide. The seriousness of the impact depends on the
Installation Have the seat belts checked regularly by a nature of the obstacle and the speed of the
The lower part of the strap must be CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop, vehicle at the moment of collision.
positioned as low as possible over the pelvis. particularly if the straps show signs of The airbags do not operate when the
The upper part must be positioned in the damage. ignition is switched off.
hollow of the shoulder. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or This equipment will only deploy once. If a
In order to be effective, a seat belt must: a textile cleaning product, sold by CITROËN second impact occurs (during the same or a
–  be tightened as close to the body as dealers. subsequent accident), the airbag will not be
possible. deployed again.
–  be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, ensuring that it is not twisted. Airbags Impact detection zones
–  only be used to secure one person.
–  not show signs of tearing or fraying.
–  not be changed or modified, in order to
General information
avoid affecting its performance. System designed to help improve the safety
of the occupants sitting in the front seats and
the rear outer seats, in the event of a violent
Recommendations for children
collision. The airbags supplement the action
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger
of the seat belts equipped with a force limiting
is less than 12 years old or shorter than 1.5
system. A. Front impact zone
metres.
Electronic detectors record and analyse the B. Side impact zone
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
front and side impacts sustained in the impact
than one child.
detection zones: When one or more airbags are deployed,
Never carry a child on your lap.
–  In the event of violent impact, the airbags the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge
deploy instantly and help better protect the

73
 Safety

incorporated in the system makes a noise and Deployment Deployment

releases a small quantity of smoke. They deploy, except the front passenger airbag The lateral airbags are deployed on one side in
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious front the event of a serious side impact applied to all
individuals may experience irritation. impact to all or part of the front impact zone A. or part of the side impact zone B.
The detonation noise associated with the The front airbag inflates between the thorax and The lateral airbag inflates between the chest of
deployment of one or more airbags may result head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the the vehicle's occupant and the corresponding
in a slight loss of hearing for a short time. steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, door panel.
passenger's side, to cushion their forward
Front airbags movement. Curtain airbags
System contributing towards greater protection
Lateral airbags for the driver and passengers (with the exception
of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a
serious side impact in order to limit the risk of
injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.

Deployment
It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding
lateral airbag in the event of a serious side
impact applied to all or part of the side impact
System that protects the driver and front zone B.
passenger in the event of a serious front impact, The curtain airbag inflates between the front
limiting the risk of head and chest injury. In the event of a serious side impact, this system and rear occupants of the vehicle and the
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the protects the driver and front passenger to corresponding windows.
steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. the hip and the shoulder. Malfunction
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest In the event of a malfunction, this warning
frame, on the door side. lamp lights up on the instrument panel.

* For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.

74
 Safety

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop to have the system checked.
discharging the hot gas via openings provided
for this purpose.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
nearer to the door than necessary. 5
The airbags may not be deployed in the event of After an accident or if the vehicle has been The vehicle's front door panels include side
a serious impact. stolen, have the airbag systems checked. impact sensors.
All work must be carried out only by a A damaged door or any unauthorised or
In the event of a minor impact or bump at
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop incorrectly executed work (modification or
the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle
repair) on the front doors or their interior trim
rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed.
Front airbags could compromise the operation of these
In the event of a rear or front collision, none of
Do not drive holding the steering wheel sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral
the lateral airbags are deployed.
by its spokes or resting your hands on the airbags!
centre part of the wheel. All work must be carried out only by a
Advice Passengers must not place their feet on the CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
dashboard.
For the airbags to be fully effective,
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags Curtain airbags
observe the safety recommendations
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,
below.
cigarette or pipe. as this could cause head injuries when the
Adopt a normal and upright sitting position.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or curtain airbag is deployed.
Fasten your seat belt and position it correctly.
hit it violently. Do not remove the grab handles installed on
Do not place anything between the occupants
Do not fix or attach anything to the steering the roof.
and the airbags (e.g. child, animal, object), do
wheel or dashboard, as this could cause
not fix or attach anything near or in the path of
injuries when the airbags are deployed.
the airbags, as this could cause injuries when
they are deployed.
Child seats
Lateral airbags
Never modify the original definition of the
Use only approved seat covers The regulations on carrying children are
vehicle, particularly in the area directly around
compatible with the deployment of these specific to each country. Refer to the
the airbags.
airbags. For information on the range of seat legislation in force in your country.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned are
covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a
observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to For maximum safety, please observe the
CITROËN dealer.
the head, chest or arms cannot be ruled out following recommendations:
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
when an airbag is deployed. The bag inflates –  In accordance with European regulations,
backrests (e.g. clothing) as this could cause
almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) all children under the age of 12 or less than
injuries to the chest or arm when the airbag is
then deflates within the same time, 1,5 metres tall must travel in approved child
deployed.

75
 Safety

seats suited to their weight, on seats fitted with When installing a child seat using the seat –  a child alone and unattended in a vehicle,
a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened –  a child or an animal in a vehicle which is
–  Statistically, the safest seats in your correctly on the child seat and that it secures exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,
vehicle for carrying children are the rear the child seat firmly on the seat of the vehicle. –  the keys within reach of children inside the
seats. If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it vehicle.
–  Children weighing less than 9 kg must forwards if necessary.
travel in the "rearward facing" position, Remove the head restraint before
whether in the front or rear of the vehicle. installing a child seat with a backrest on a
Child seat at the rear
passenger seat.
It is recommended that children travel
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
Forward-facing or rearward-facing
on the rear seats of the vehicle:
attached securely to prevent it from being
– ‘rearward facing’ up to the age of 3,
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
– ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3.
sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once
the child seat has been removed.
Make sure that the seat belt is correctly
positioned and tightened.
Installing a booster seat
For child seats with a support leg, ensure that
The chest part of the seat belt must be
the support leg is in firm and steady contact
positioned on the child's shoulder without
with the floor.
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt ►  Move the vehicle's front seat forward and
Advice passes correctly over the child's thighs. straighten the backrest so that the legs of the
Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped child in the forward-facing or rearward-facing
An incorrectly installed child seat with a belt guide at shoulder level. child seat itself do not touch the vehicle's front
compromises the child's safety in the seat.
event of an accident. ►  Check that the backrest of the forward-facing
Additional protections
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt child seat is as close as possible to the backrest
To prevent accidental opening of the
buckle under the child seat, as this could of the vehicle's rear seat, and ideally in contact
doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock".
destabilise it. with it.
Take care not to open the rear windows by
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
more than one third.
harness of child seats, keeping the slack Centre rear seat
To protect young children from the rays of the
relative to the child's body to a minimum, A child seat with a support leg must never be
sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
even for short journeys. installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:

76
 Safety

Child seat at the front The front passenger airbag must be

deactivated before installing a rearward
Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
5
facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks
being seriously injured or killed if the
airbag is deployed.

►  Adjust the front passenger seat to the

highest and fully back longitudinal position, Passenger airbag OFF
with the backrest straightened. To ensure the safety of the child, the front
passenger airbag MUST be deactivated
"Forward facing" when a "rearward facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
Warning label - Front passenger airbag injured or killed in the event of deployment of
the airbag.

Vehicles not equipped with a

deactivation/reactivation control
Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on
You must leave the front passenger the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited
airbag active. - risk of death or serious injury in the event of
You must comply with the following instruction,
airbag deployment!
as reminded by the warning label on both sides
"Rearward facing" of the passenger sun visor:
Deactivating/Reactivating the front
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
passenger airbag
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the For vehicles on which it is fitted, the switch is
CHILD can occur. located on the side of the dashboard or inside
the glove box.

77
 Safety

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L1 L6
"RÖMER Baby-Safe" "GRACO Booster"
Installed in the "rearward facing" position. The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Only suitable for installation on the front
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg passenger seat or on the rear side seats.

With the ignition off: "ISOFIX" mountings

►  To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX
switch to the "OFF" position. compliant mountings:
►  To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON"
position. L5
When the ignition is switched on: "RÖMER KIDFIX 2R"
This warning lamp comes on and remains Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
lit to signal deactivation. mountings.
Or The child is restrained by the seat belt.
This warning lamp comes on for about 1 Only suitable for installation on the side rear
minute to signal activation. seats.
The head restraint on the vehicle seat must The mountings comprise three rings for each
Recommended child seats be removed. seat, indicated by a marking:
Range of child seats secured using a three- –  Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat
point seat belt. backrest and cushion.

78
 Safety

►  Remove and stow the head restraint before

installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once
"RÖMER Baby-Safe and its ISOFIX base"
(size category: E)
5
the child seat has been removed).
►  Pass the strap of the child seat behind the Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
seat backrest, centring it between the openings
for the head restraint rods.
►  Secure the upper strap hook to ring B.
►  Tighten the upper strap.
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX
These rings are located behind zips. When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the base which is attached to rings A.
The 2 latches on ISOFIX child seats are left-hand rear seat of the bench seat, The base has a support leg, height-
secured to them. before fitting the seat, first move the centre adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor.
–  One ring B, located behind the seat, called the rear seat belt towards the middle of the This child seat can also be secured with a
TOP TETHER, for attaching seats fitted with an vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used
upper strap. with the operation of the seat belt. and attached to the vehicle seat using the
three-point seat belt.
An incorrectly installed child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's safety in
the event of an accident. "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
Strictly observe the fitting instructions (size category: B1)
provided in the user guide supplied with the
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
child seat.

For information about the options for

fitting ISOFIX child seats in your vehicle,
This system prevents the child seat from tipping
refer to the summary table.
forwards in the event of a front impact.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the Recommended ISOFIX child seats
vehicle.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: Also consult the user guide from the child
seat’s manufacturer to find out how to
install and remove the seat.

79
 Safety

"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"

(size category: B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Suitable for forward-facing installation only.
Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as
TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,
lying down.
This child seat can also be used in seat
positions not equipped with ISOFIX
mountings. In this case, it must be secured to
the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.
Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the
child's feet do not touch the backrest.

i-Size child seats

i-Size child seats have two latches that are anchored to the two rings A.
These i-Size child seats also have:
–  either an upper strap that is attached to ring B.
–  or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position.
Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section.

80
 Safety

Installing universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child seats

In compliance with European regulations, this table indicates the possibilities for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
5
(a) as well as the largest ISOFIX and i-Size child seats for the seat positions fitted with ISOFIX anchorage points in the vehicle.
Seat number
Front seats Rear seats
(j) (j)
1 3 4 5 6

3 1 4 5 6

Front passenger airbag Deactivated "OFF" Activated "ON" (c)

(b)

Position compatible with a universal (a) no yes (d) (h) yes (d) (i) yes yes (e) yes
child seat
Position compatible with an i-Size child no no (f) yes no (f) yes
seat
Position equipped with a TOP TETHER no no (f) yes no (f) yes
hook

"Carrycot" type child seat no no (f) no

"Rearward facing" ISOFIX child seat no no (f) R3 (g) no (f) R3 (g)
"Forward facing" ISOFIX child seat no no (f) F3 (g) no (f) F3 (g)
Booster child seat no B3 (f) (k) B3 (g) B3 (f) B3 (g)

81
 Safety

Rules: (h) For a "rearward facing" and/or "forward

–  A position that is i-Size compatible is also facing" universal child seat (U) in groups 0,
compatible with R1, R2 and F2X, F2, B2. 0+, 1, 2 or 3.
–  A position that is R3 compatible is also
compatible for R1 and R2. (i) For a "forward facing" universal child seat
–  A position that is F3 compatible is also (UF) in groups 1, 2 or 3.
compatible for F2X and F2. (j) Depending on version, refer to the
–  A position that is B3 compatible is also legislation in force in your country before
compatible with B2. installing a child in this seat position.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. (k) Adjust the front passenger seat to the fully
backward position.
(b) To install a "rearward facing" child seat at
this seat position, the front passenger airbag
must be deactivated ("OFF").

(c) Only a "forward facing" child seat is

authorised at this seat position with the front
passenger airbag activated ("ON").

(d) For a seat with height adjustment, adjust the

seat to the highest position and move it fully
back, with the backrest straightened.
For a seat without height adjustment,
move the seat fully back, with the backrest
straightened. Key
Seat position where the installation of a
(e) Never install a child seat with a support leg child seat is forbidden.
on the centre rear seat. Front passenger airbag deactivated.
(f) Seats not fitted with "ISOFIX" mountings.
Front passenger airbag activated.
(g) Adjust the front passenger seat to the
middle longitudinal position with the Seat position suitable for the installation
backrest straightened. of a child seat secured using the seat belt

82
 Safety

and universally approved "rearward facing"

and/or "forward facing" (U) for all sizes and
For seat adjustments, refer to the table
"Installing universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child 5
weight groups. seats".
Seat position suitable for the installation
of a child seat secured using the seat belt
and universally approved "forward facing"
Manual child lock
(UF) for groups 1, 2 & 3 only. The system prevents a rear door from being
Seat position authorised for the opened using its interior handle.
installation of an i-Size child seat. The control is located on the edge of each rear
Seat position not suitable for the door (marked by a label on the bodywork).
installation of a child seat with support
leg. Activation/Deactivation
Presence of a Top Tether anchorage
point at the rear of the backrest,
authorising the installation of a universal ISOFIX
child seat.
"Rearward facing" ISOFIX child seat:

–  R1: ISOFIX child seat for a baby.

–  R2: ISOFIX reduced size child seat. ►  To activate, turn the built-in key fully:
–  R3: ISOFIX large size child seat. •  To the right on the left-hand rear door.
"Forward facing" ISOFIX child seat: •  To the left on the right-hand rear door.
►  To deactivate, turn it in the opposite direction.
–  F2X: ISOFIX child seat for toddlers.
–  F2: ISOFIX reduced height child seat.
–  F3: ISOFIX full height child seat.
Booster child seat:

–  B2: reduced width booster seat.

–  B3: full width booster seat.
Seat position where the installation of an
ISOFIX child seat is forbidden.

83
 Driving

Driving recommendations Never park the vehicle and never

leave the engine running on a
On flooded roads
►  Observe the driving regulations and remain We strongly advise against driving on flooded
flammable surface (e.g. dry grass, dead
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. roads, as this could cause serious damage to the
leaves).The vehicle exhaust system is very
►  Monitor your environment and keep your engine or gearbox, as well as to your vehicle's
hot, even several minutes after the engine
hands on the wheel to be able to react to electrical systems.
stops. Risk of fire!
anything that may happen any time.
►  Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for
Never drive on surfaces covered with
braking and maintain a longer safety distance,
vegetation (e.g. tall grass,
especially in bad weather.
accumulated dead leaves, crops, debris)
►  Stop the vehicle before performing operations
such as a field, a country lane overgrown
that require sustained attention (e.g. settings).
with bushes or a grassy verge.
►  During long trips, take a break every 2 hours.
This vegetation could come into contact with
If the vehicle absolutely must drive through a
Important! the vehicle's exhaust system or other systems
which are very hot. Risk of fire! flooded section of road:
►  Check that the depth of the water does not
Never leave the engine running in a
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
closed space without sufficient Make sure you do not leave any item in
might be generated by other users.
ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit the passenger compartment which could
►  Deactivate the Stop & Start function.
toxic exhaust gases such as carbon act like a magnifying glass under the effect of
►  Drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In
monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death! the sun's rays and cause a fire. Risk of fire or
all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h).
damage to interior surfaces!
►  Do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
In very severe wintry conditions On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety
(temperature below -23°C), let the engine Never leave the vehicle unattended, conditions allow, make several light brake
run for 4 minutes before moving off, to ensure with the engine running. If you have to applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
the correct operation and durability of the leave your vehicle with the engine running, If in doubt about the state of your vehicle,
mechanical components of your vehicle apply the parking brake and put the gearbox contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
(engine and gearbox). into neutral or position N or P (depending on workshop.
the type of gearbox).
Never drive with the parking brake
applied. Risk of overheating and Never leave children inside the vehicle
damaging the braking system! unsupervised.

84
 Driving

Noise (Electric)
On the outside
Do not exceed the maximum towable
weights.
If a genuine CITROËN towing device is
used, the rear parking sensors will be 6
At altitude: reduce the maximum load by deactivated automatically to avoid the audible
Due to the vehicle’s quiet operation when 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower signal.
driving, the driver must pay particular attention. air density at high altitudes decreases engine
When manoeuvring, the driver must always performance.
check the vehicle's immediate surroundings.
When driving
At speeds of up to 19 mph (30 km/h), the New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the Cooling
pedestrian horn warns other road users of the vehicle has driven at least 620 miles Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant
vehicle’s presence. (1,000 kilometres). temperature to increase. The maximum towable
Cooling the traction battery load depends on the gradient and the exterior
The cooling fan comes on during If the outside temperature is high, let the temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does not
charging to cool the on-board charger and the engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the increase with engine speed.
traction battery. vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. ►  Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to
limit the amount of heating produced.
On the inside ►  Pay constant attention to the coolant
Before setting off temperature.
During use, you may hear certain perfectly
Nose weight If this warning lamp and the STOP
normal noises specific to electric vehicles, such
warning lamp come on, stop the
as: ►  Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as
–  Traction battery relay when starting. heaviest items are as close as possible to the
possible.
–  Vacuum pump when braking. axle and the nose weight (at the point where it
–  Vehicle tyres or aerodynamics when driving. joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum Brakes
–  Jolting and knocking noise during hill starts. permitted without exceeding it. Using the engine brake is recommended to limit
Tyres the overheating of the brakes. Braking distances
Towing are increased when towing a trailer.
►  Check the tyre pressures of the towing
Driving with a trailer places greater vehicle and of the trailer, observing the Side wind
demands on the towing vehicle and recommended pressures. Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more
particular care must be taken. Lighting susceptible to wind when towing.
►  Check the electrical signalling on the trailer
and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle.

85
 Driving

Anti-theft protection down on its shaft in the ignition switch and

could cause a malfunction.
Petrol engines
After a cold start, preheating the catalytic
converter can cause noticeable engine
Electronic immobiliser Ignition on position vibrations, for anything up to 2 minutes
The keys contain a code, which must be (accelerated idle speed).
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
recognised by the vehicle before starting is
equipment or the charging of accessories.
possible. ►  With a Diesel engine, turn the key to position
Once the state of charge of the battery drops to
If the system malfunctions, indicated by the 2, to activate the engine preheating system.
the reserve level, the system switches to energy
display of a message, the engine will not start. Wait until this warning lamp goes off on
economy mode: the power supply is cut off
Contact a CITROËN dealer. the instrument panel, then turn the key to
automatically to preserve the remaining battery
position 3 without pressing the accelerator pedal,
charge.
Starting / Switching off the to operate the starter motor. Once the engine
Starting the engine has started, release the key and allow it to return
engine with the key With the parking brake applied:
to position 2.

►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
Key ignition switch in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. may stay on for a longer period. When
►  With an automatic gearbox, place the gear the engine is hot, the warning lamp does not
selector in mode N or P then depress the brake come on.
pedal. In mild conditions, do not leave the engine
►  Insert the key into the ignition switch; the to warm up while stationary, but move off
system recognises the code. straight away and drive at moderate speed.
►  Unlock the steering column by simultaneously
turning the steering wheel and the key. If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition. Wait a few
In certain cases, you may need to apply
It has 3 positions: seconds before operating the starter motor
significant force to move the steering
–  1. Stop: inserting and removing the key, again. If the engine does not start after a few
wheel (e.g. wheels turned to full lock).
steering column locked. attempts, do not keep trying - risk of
–  2. Ignition: steering column unlocked, ignition ►  With a petrol engine, operate the starter damaging the starter motor and the engine!
on, Diesel preheating, engine running. motor by turning the key to position 3 without Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
–  3. Starting. pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine workshop.
starts. Once the engine has started, release the
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key
key and allow it to return to position 2.
or the remote control. It would weigh

86
 Driving

Switching off the engine

►  Immobilise the vehicle.
For more information on Energy
economy mode, refer to the
Starting 6
corresponding section.
►  With the engine at idle, turn the key to
position 1.
►  Remove the key from the ignition switch. Key left in
►  To lock the steering column, turn the steering When the driver's door is opened, a
wheel until it locks. message is displayed, accompanied by an
audible signal, if the key has been left in the
To facilitate unlocking of the steering ignition switch in position 1.
column, it is recommended that the If the key has been left in the ignition switch
wheels be returned to the straight ahead in position 2, the ignition will be switched off
position before switching off the engine. automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the key to ►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
Never switch off the ignition before the position 1, then back to position 2. in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal.
complete immobilisation of the vehicle. ►  With an automatic gearbox, select mode P
With the engine off, the braking and steering or N and press the brake pedal.
assistance systems are also cut off - risk of
loss of control of the vehicle!
Starting/switching off the ►  Press the "START/STOP" button while
maintaining pressure on the pedal until the
engine with Keyless Entry engine starts.
Check that the parking brake is correctly and Start Diesel engines
In negative temperatures and/or when the
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
engine is cold, starting takes place only after the
When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in The electronic key must be present in the
preheating warning lamp goes out.
your possession and lock the vehicle. passenger compartment.
If this warning lamp comes on after
The electronic key is also detected in the
pressing the "START/STOP" button:
boot.
Energy economy mode ►  Keep the pedal fully depressed and do not
If the electronic key is not detected, a
After the engine has stopped (position 1. Stop), press the "START/STOP" button again until the
message is displayed.
for a maximum combined duration of 30 minutes, engine is running.
Move the electronic key so that the engine
you can still use functions such as the audio and In all circumstances, if one of the starting
can be started or switched off.
telematics system, courtesy lamps or dipped conditions is not met, a message is displayed.
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key
beam headlamps. In some circumstances, a message indicates
not detected - Back-up starting or Back-up
that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel
switch-off" section.

87
 Driving

while pressing the "START/STOP" button to Never leave your vehicle with the
assist unlocking of the steering column. electronic key still inside.

Petrol engines
With Petrol engines, after a cold start, Switching on the ignition
pre-heating the catalytic converter can cause
noticeable engine vibrations, for anything up
without starting the engine
to 2 minutes (accelerated idle speed).

If the engine stalls, release the clutch ►  Place and hold the remote control against the
pedal and fully depress it again, the reader.
engine will restart automatically. ►  With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal.
►  With an automatic gearbox or a drive
Switching off selector, select mode P, then depress the brake
►  Immobilise the vehicle using the parking pedal.
brake. ►  Press the "START/STOP" button.
►  With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear With the electronic key in the passenger The engine starts.
lever into neutral. compartment, pressing the "START/STOP"
►  With an automatic gearbox, ideally select button, without depressing any of the pedals, Back-up switch-off
mode P or N. allows the ignition to be switched on without
►  Press the "START/STOP" button. starting the engine.
In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn ►  Press this button again to switch off the
the steering wheel to lock the steering column. ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.
On certain versions with an automatic gearbox
(EAT8), the steering column does not lock, but Key not detected
the gearbox locks in mode P.
Back-up starting
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
engine will not stop. A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column,
to enable the engine to be started if the system
fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or
With the engine off, the braking and
if the battery in the electronic key is flat. If the electronic key is not detected or is no
steering assistance systems are also cut
off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle! longer in the recognition zone, a message

88
 Driving

appears in the instrument panel when closing a

door or trying to switch off the engine.
signal is emitted, indicating that the vehicle is
ready to drive.
the Keyless Entry and Start system, refer to
the Starting/Switching off the engine 6
►  To confirm the instruction to switch off the ►  With your foot on the brake, select mode D using Keyless Entry and Start section.
engine, press the "START/STOP" button for or R.
approximately 5 seconds. ►  Release the brake pedal, then accelerate.
In the event of a fault with the electronic key, On starting, the instrument panel lights up and Manual parking brake
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified the power indicator cursor moves to the "neutral"
workshop. position. The steering column automatically
unlocks (you may hear a sound and feel the
Release
Emergency switch-off steering wheel move).
In case of emergency only, the engine can be Switching off
switched off without conditions (even when
►  If using a remote control key, turn the key
driving).
fully to position 1 (Stop).
►  Press the "START/STOP" button for about
►  If using Keyless Entry and Start, press the
5 seconds.
"START/STOP" button.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
Before exiting the vehicle, check that:
as the vehicle stops. ►  Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press
–  The drive selector is in mode P.
– The READY indicator lamp is off. the release button, then lower the lever fully.
Starting/Switching off the The drive selector moves automatically
 /  When driving the vehicle, if this
warning lamp and the STOP
electric motor to mode P when the motor is switched off warning lamp come on, accompanied by an
or when the driver's door is opened. audible signal and the display of a message, this
Starting
means that the parking brake is still applied or
The drive selector must be in mode P. If the driver's door is opened while the has not been fully released.
►  If using a remote control key, depress the required conditions for switching off are
brake pedal and turn the key until it reaches not met, an audible signal is emitted, Application
position 3 (Start). accompanied by the display of a warning ►  Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise
►  If using Keyless Entry and Start, depress the message. the vehicle.
brake pedal and briefly press the "START/STOP"
button. When parking on a slope, turn the
For the procedures for switching on the
►  Keep your foot on the brake pedal until the wheels against the kerb, apply the
ignition without starting the engine and
READY indicator lamp comes on and an audible parking brake, engage a gear and switch off
those for back-up starting/switching off using
the ignition.

89
 Driving

Electric parking brake The indicator lamp flashes in response to a

manual request to apply or release the brake.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle, as they could release the parking
In automatic mode, this system applies the brake.
parking brake when the engine is switched off In the event of a battery failure, the
and releases it when the vehicle moves off. electric parking brake will not operate.
As a safety measure, with a manual gearbox, When the vehicle is parked: on a
if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise steep slope, heavily loaded or during
the vehicle by engaging a gear. towing
As a safety measure, with an automatic With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels
gearbox or drive selector, if the parking brake toward the pavement and engage a gear.
is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by With an automatic gearbox or a drive selector,
placing the supplied chock against one of the turn the wheels toward the pavement and
wheels. select mode P.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified When towing, the vehicle is approved for
At any time, with the engine running: workshop. parking on slopes of up to 12%.
►  To apply the parking brake, briefly pull the
control.
Manual operation
►  To release it, briefly push the control while
pressing the brake pedal.
Manual release
Automatic mode is activated by default.
With the ignition on or engine running:
This automatic operation can be temporarily
►  Press the brake pedal.
deactivated.
►  While maintaining pressure on the brake
Indicator lamp pedal, briefly push the control.

This indicator lamp comes on both on the Before leaving the vehicle, check that the If the brake pedal is not depressed, the
instrument panel and on the control to parking brake is applied: the parking parking brake is not released and a
confirm that the parking brake has been applied, brake indicator lamps on the instrument panel message is displayed.
accompanied by display of the message and the control must be on fixed.
"Parking brake applied". If the parking brake is not applied, there is an
audible signal and a message is displayed on Manual application
The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the
release of the parking brake, accompanied by opening the driver's door. With the vehicle stationary:
the display of the message "Parking brake ►  Briefly pull the control.
released". The control indicator lamp flashes to confirm the
application request.

90
 Driving

Automatic operation Automatic application

With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
selected when the ignition is switched off. The
wheels are blocked. 6
Automatic release is applied automatically when the engine is For more information on Free-wheeling, refer
switched off. to the corresponding section.
First ensure that the engine is running and that
the driver's door is closed. It is not applied automatically if the
The electric parking brake gradually releases With an automatic gearbox or drive
engine stalls or enters STOP mode with
automatically as the vehicle moves off. selector, while mode N is selected,
Stop & Start.
With a manual gearbox opening the driver’s door triggers an audible
►  Fully depress the clutch pedal and engage signal. It stops when the driver's door closes
In automatic mode, the parking brake again.
first gear or reverse.
can be manually applied or released at
►  Depress the accelerator pedal and release
any time using the control.
the clutch pedal.
With an automatic gearbox
Deactivating automatic
►  Depress the brake pedal. Special cases operation
►  Select mode D, M or R. In some situations, for example when it is
►  Release the brake pedal and depress the Immobilising the vehicle with the extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan,
accelerator pedal. engine running breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate
With a drive selector automatic operation of the system.
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine
►  Depress the brake pedal. ►  Start the engine.
running, briefly pull the control.
►  Select mode D, B or R. ►  Use the control to apply the parking brake, if
►  Release the brake pedal and depress the Parking the vehicle with the brake it is released.
accelerator pedal. released ►  Take your foot fully off the brake pedal.
►  Keep the control pushed in the release
With an automatic gearbox or drive
In very cold conditions (ice), applying the direction for 10 to a maximum of 15 seconds.
selector, if the brake does not release
parking brake is not recommended. ►  Release the control.
automatically, check that the front doors are
To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or ►  Depress and hold the brake pedal.
properly closed.
place the chocks against one of the wheels. ►  Pull the control in the application direction for
2 seconds.
When stationary with the engine running, This indicator lamp on the instrument
With an automatic gearbox or drive
do not depress the accelerator pedal panel comes on to confirm deactivation of
selector, mode P is automatically
unnecessarily. Risk of parking brake release. the automatic functions.
►  Release the control and the brake pedal.

91
 Driving

From this point onwards, only the manual

functions, using the control, allow the parking
6-speed manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
brake to be applied and released. Automatic 8-speed gearbox with push selector.
►  Follow this procedure again to reactivate
Engaging 5th or 6th gear It also offers a manual mode with gear changes
automatic operation (confirmed by the indicator ►  Move the gear selector fully to the right to via control paddles located behind the steering
lamp on the instrument panel going out). engage 5th or 6th gear. wheel.

Emergency braking Failure to follow this instruction could Push selector

cause permanent damage to the gearbox
If depressing the brake pedal fails to provide (inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th gear).
effective braking or in exceptional circumstances
(e.g. driver unwell, assisted driving), the vehicle
can be braked by sustained pulling on the Engaging reverse gear
electric parking brake control. Braking continues
for as long as the control is kept pulled, and
ceases when the control is released.
The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle
during emergency braking.
If emergency braking malfunctions, the message
"Parking brake fault" will be displayed on the P. Auto Park
instrument panel. Press this button to switch to Parking mode.
If the ABS and DSC systems For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are
malfunction, indicated by lighting ►  Raise the ring under the knob and move the blocked.
one or both warning lamps on the instrument gear selector to the left, then forwards. R. Reverse
panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer ensured. N. Neutral
Only engage reverse gear when the
►  In this case, ensure the vehicle's stability by To free-wheel and move the vehicle, with the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at
successive and repeated "pull-release" actions ignition off.
idle.
on the electric parking brake control until the For more information on Free-wheeling, refer
vehicle comes to a complete stop. to the corresponding section.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate D. Driving in automatic mode
starting the engine: The gearbox manages gear changes
–  Always select neutral. according to the style of driving, the road
–  Press the clutch pedal. profile and the vehicle load.

92
 Driving

M. Driving in manual mode

Press this button to switch to manual mode.
With the engine running and the brakes
released, if R, D or M is selected, the 6
The driver changes gear using the steering- vehicle moves off, even without pressing the
mounted controls. accelerator pedal.
Never depress the accelerator and brake
►  In mode N, with your foot on the brake pedal, pedals at the same time - risk of damage to
push without passing the point of resistance: the gearbox!
•  Forwards, mode R is selected.
•  Backwards, mode D is selected.
If you open the driver's door while mode
Release the selector fully after each push; it ►  Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and
N is engaged, an audible signal will
will then return to its initial position. release to shift up or down a gear, respectively.
sound. The audible signal stops when the
Special cases
Information displayed on driver's door is closed.
To avoid mode N (quick change from D to R and
back again): the instrument panel At very low speeds, opening the driver's
►  In mode R, push backwards past the point of When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox door triggers the gearbox to switch to
resistance, mode D is selected. status is displayed on the instrument panel: mode P.
►  In mode D, push forwards past the point of P Parking
resistance, mode R is selected. R Reverse In the event of battery failure, it is
►  To return to mode N, push without passing N Neutral essential to place the chock(s) supplied
the point of resistance. D1...8 Automatic forward gear with the tool kit against one of the wheels to
M1...8 Manual forward gear immobilise the vehicle.
Steering-mounted controls The state of the gearbox remains displayed on
(Depending on equipment)
the instrument panel for a few seconds after Special aspects of automatic mode
In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control
switching off the ignition.
paddles can be used to change gear manually. The gearbox selects the gear that provides
They cannot be used to select neutral or to Operation optimal performance based on ambient
engage or disengage reverse gear. temperature, road profile, vehicle loading and
Only appropriate mode change instructions are
driving style.
validated.
For maximum acceleration, press the accelerator
With the engine running, if it is necessary to
fully down (kick-down). The gearbox changes
depress the brake pedal to change modes,
down automatically or holds the selected gear
an alert message will be displayed on the
until the maximum engine speed is reached.
instrument panel.

93
 Driving

Steering mounted controls allow the driver to Check that mode P has been engaged and Major malfunction
temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle speed that the electric parking brake was applied This warning lamp comes on,
and engine speed conditions permit. automatically; if not, apply it manually. accompanied by the display of a
The corresponding indicator lamps on the message.
Special aspects of manual mode gear selector and the electric parking
The gearbox only changes from one gear to brake control must be on, as well as the You must stop the vehicle.
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed indicator lamps on the instrument panel. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and
conditions permit. switch off the ignition.
Gearbox malfunction Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Starting the vehicle This warning lamp comes on, workshop.
►  Fully depress the brake pedal. accompanied by an audible signal and
►  Start the engine. the display of a message.
►  With your foot on the brake pedal, push once Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. Drive selector (Electric)
or twice backwards to select automatic mode D, Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h),
or forwards to shift into reverse gear R. keeping to the speed limit.
►  Release the brake pedal. Switching of the gearbox to back-up mode
►  Accelerate gradually to automatically release
Mode D locks in third gear.
the electric parking brake.
The paddles on the steering wheel do not work
The vehicle moves off immediately.
and mode M is no longer accessible.
Automatic gearbox You may feel a significant jolt on engaging
Never try to start the engine by pushing reverse gear. This will not damage the gearbox.
the vehicle.
Selector malfunction
Switching the vehicle off Minor malfunction
The drive selector is a pulse selector with a
Regardless of the current gearbox mode, mode This warning lamp comes on, regenerative braking function.
P is immediately engaged automatically when accompanied by the display of a message The drive selector provides traction control
the ignition is switched off. and an audible signal. based on the driving style, the road profile and
However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged Drive carefully. the vehicle load.
after a delay of 5 seconds (time to enable free- Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. With regenerative braking activated, it also
wheeling mode). In some cases, the selector indicator lamps may manages engine braking when the accelerator
no longer come on, but the gearbox state is still pedal is released.
displayed on the instrument panel.

94
 Driving

P. Park
Button for parking the vehicle: the front
Operation
►  In mode N, with your foot on the brake pedal,
►  From mode D, press button B to activate/
deactivate the function (the button lights up when 6
wheels are locked (the button lights up to the function is activated).
push without passing the point of resistance:
indicate that it is activated). B is displayed on the instrument panel.
•  Forwards, mode R is selected.
R. Reverse The system status is not saved when the ignition
•  Backwards, mode D is selected.
To engage reverse gear, with your foot on the is switched off.
Release the selector fully after each push; it
brake pedal. will then return to its initial position. In some situations (e.g. battery full,
N. Neutral extreme temperatures), the amount of
Special cases
To move the vehicle with the ignition off and regenerative braking may be temporarily
so allow it to free-wheel. To avoid mode N (quick change from D to R and
limited, resulting in less deceleration.
For more information on Free-wheeling, refer back again):
The driver must remain alert to traffic
to the corresponding section. ►  In mode R, push backwards past the point of
conditions and must always be ready to use
D. Drive (automatic forward gear) resistance, mode D is selected.
the brake pedal.
B. Brake (regenerative braking) ►  In mode D, push forwards past the point of
Button for changing to Drive/automatic resistance, mode R is selected.
With the brake pedal
forward gear mode with regenerative braking ►  To return to mode N, push without passing
the point of resistance. When the brake pedal is depressed, the
function (the button lights up to indicate that it
intelligent braking system automatically recovers
is activated).
Regenerative braking some of the energy and uses it to recharge the
traction battery.
Information displayed on With the Brake function and when
This energy recovery also reduces use of the
decelerating
the instrument panel The Brake function emulates engine braking,
brake pads, thereby limiting their wear.
When the ignition is switched on, the drive The driver may experience a different
slowing the vehicle with no need to depress the
selector status is displayed on the instrument sensation when depressing the brake
brake pedal. The vehicle slows more quickly
panel: pedal compared to a vehicle without
when the driver releases the accelerator pedal.
P : Park. regenerative braking.
The energy recovered when the accelerator
R : Reverse.
pedal is released is then used to partially
N : Neutral.
recharge the traction battery, thereby increasing
D : Drive (automatic forward gear).
the vehicle's driving range. Driving modes
B : Brake (automatic forward gear with
regenerative braking function activated). The resulting deceleration of the vehicle The driving modes available depend on the
does not cause the brake lamps to come engine and equipment of the vehicle.
on.

95
 Driving

Driving modes are selected using the following fully off the accelerator pedal in anticipation of brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its
control: slowing down. operation.
To reduce consumption of the traction battery's
electrical energy by limiting engine torque.
Operation
Sport
To obtain more dynamic driving with action
on the accelerator and gear changes with an
automatic gearbox.

Hill start assist

This system keeps the vehicle briefly stationary
(for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill Facing uphill, with the vehicle stationary,
►  Press the control to display the modes on the start, while you transfer your foot from the brake the vehicle is held for a short time when the
instrument panel. pedal to the accelerator pedal. driver releases the brake pedal:
When the message disappears, the selected The system is only active when: –  If first gear or neutral is engaged on a manual
mode is activated and remains indicated on the –  The vehicle is completely stationary, with your gearbox.
instrument panel (except Normal mode). foot on the brake pedal. –  If mode D or M is selected on an automatic
Whenever the ignition is switched on, –  Certain slope conditions are met. gearbox.
Normal driving mode is selected by default. –  The driver’s door is closed. –  If mode D or B is selected on the drive
selector.
Normal Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
To restore the default settings. held temporarily by hill start assist.
Eco If someone needs to get out of the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the parking
To reduce energy consumption by reducing the
brake manually. Then check that the parking
performance of the heating and air conditioning,
brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp
without deactivating them.
in the electric parking brake control are on
Free-wheeling in Eco mode: depending on
fixed.
version, with the EAT8 gearbox, switching Facing downhill, with the vehicle stationary
into "free-wheeling" is encouraged to slow the and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held
vehicle down without using engine braking. You The hill start assist function cannot be for a short time when the driver releases the
can save fuel by taking your foot gradually and deactivated. However, using the parking brake pedal.

96
 Driving

Malfunction
If the event of a malfunction, these
The information appears on the
instrument panel, in the form of an arrow
A message on the instrument panel confirms the
change of status. 6
and the recommended gear. When the function is deactivated, if the engine
warning lamps light up on the
was in standby, it restarts immediately.
instrument panel, accompanied by the display of The system adapts the gear change
a message. instructions according to the driving Associated indicator lamps
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a conditions (e.g. slope, load) and driving style Function activated.
qualified workshop. (e.g. power demand, acceleration, braking).
The system never suggests: Function deactivated or malfunction.
Gear shift indicator –  engaging first gear;
–  engaging reverse gear.
(Depending on engine) Opening the bonnet
This system is designed to reduce fuel Before doing anything under the bonnet,
consumption by recommending the most suitable
gear.
Stop & Start deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid
any risk of injury caused by the engine
The Stop & Start function puts the engine restarting automatically.
Operation temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during
Depending on the driving situation and phases when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. red
the vehicle's equipment, the system may lights, traffic jams). The engine automatically
recommend skipping one or more gears. restarts - START mode - as soon as the driver
Gear engagement recommendations are indicates the intention of moving off again.
Primarily designed for urban use, the function Driving on flooded roads
not to be considered mandatory. Indeed, the
is intended to reduce fuel consumption and Before entering into a flooded area, it is
configuration of the road, the traffic density and
exhaust emissions as well as the noise level strongly recommended that you deactivate
safety remain determining factors when choosing
when stationary. the Stop & Start system.
the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains
The function does not affect the functionalities of For more information on Driving
responsible for deciding whether or not to follow
the vehicle, in particular the braking. recommendations, particularly on flooded
the system’s advice.
roads, refer to the corresponding section.
The system cannot be deactivated.
Deactivation/Reactivation
With an automatic gearbox, the system is
only active in manual operation.
The function is activated by default when the
ignition is switched on.
Operation
The settings are changed via the Main conditions for operation
Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. –  The driver’s door must be closed.
–  The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

97
 Driving

–  The level of charge in the battery must be –  Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature Special cases
sufficient. in the passenger compartment.
The engine will restart automatically if the
–  The temperature of the engine must be within –  Demisting active.
conditions for operation are met again and in the
its nominal operating range. In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes
following cases:
–  The outside temperature must be between for a few seconds, then goes off.
–  With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed
0°C and 35°C.
After the engine has restarted, STOP exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h).
Putting the engine into standby mode is not available until the vehicle –  With an automatic gearbox, in mode N, vehicle
has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). speed exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h).
(STOP mode)
In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes
The engine automatically enters standby mode
During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode for a few seconds, then goes off.
as soon as the driver indicates their intention to
is not available for a few seconds after
stop:
coming out of reverse gear or turning the Malfunctions
–  With a manual gearbox: with the gear lever
steering wheel. In the event of a fault with the system, this
in neutral and the clutch pedal released.
warning lamp flashes for a few moments
–  With an automatic gearbox: with the gear
on the instrument panel, then remains on,
selector in mode D or M, the brake pedal Restarting the engine (START mode) accompanied by the display of a message.
depressed until the vehicle stops or the gear The engine automatically restarts as soon as the Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
selector in mode N, with the vehicle stationary. driver indicates the intention of moving off again: qualified workshop.
Time counter With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal
The vehicle stalls in STOP mode
A time counter adds up the time spent in standby fully depressed.
With an automatic gearbox: All of the instrument panel warning lamps come
during the journey. It is reset to zero every time
–  With the selector in mode D or M: with the on if there is a fault.
the ignition is switched on.
brake pedal released. ►  Switch off the ignition then start the engine
Special cases: –  With the selector in mode N and the brake again with the key or the "START/STOP" button.

The engine will not go into standby if the pedal released: with the selector at D or M. 12 V battery
conditions for operation are not met and in the –  With the selector in mode P and the brake The Stop & Start system requires a
following cases: pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, D 12 V battery of specific technology and
–  Steep slope (ascending or descending). or M. specification.
–  Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) –  With reverse gear engaged. All work must be carried out only by a
since the last engine start (with the key or the CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
START/STOP button).

98
 Driving

Tyre under-inflation
detection
The inflation pressures defined for the
vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
The loss of pressure detected may not
always cause visible deformation of the 6
label. tyre.
This system alerts the driver if one or more tyres For more information on the Identification Do not rely on just a visual check.
suffer a drop in pressure. markings, refer to the corresponding section.
►  Using a compressor, such as the one in
The alert is raised when the vehicle is moving,
the temporary puncture repair kit, check the
not when stationary. Checking tyre pressures
pressures of all four tyres when cold.
It compares the information given by the wheel This check should be done monthly
►  If it is not possible to carry out this check
speed sensors with reference values, which when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for
immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.
must be reinitialised every time the tyre 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles
►  In the event of a puncture, use the
pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. (10 km) at moderate speeds).
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel
It takes into account the last values stored Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
(depending on equipment).
during the reinitialisation request. It is therefore shown on the label.
essential that the tyre pressure is correct during Driving too slowly may not ensure
the operation. This operation is the driver’s Snow chains optimum monitoring.
responsibility. The system does not have to be The alert is not immediately triggered in the
reinitialised after fitting or removing snow event of a sudden loss of pressure or tyre
The tyre under-inflation detection cannot,
chains. blow-out. This is because analysis of the
in any circumstances, replace the need
values read by the wheel's speed sensors
for vigilance on the part of the driver.
can take several minutes.
This system does not avoid the need to Under-inflation alert The alert may be delayed at speeds below
regularly check the tyre pressures (including
This is signalled by the fixed illumination 25 mph (40 km/h), or when adopting a sporty
the spare wheel), especially before a long
of this warning lamp, accompanied by an driving mode.
journey.
audible signal and, depending on equipment, the
Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly
display of a message. The alert is kept active until the system is
in adverse conditions (heavy load, high
►  Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive reinitialised.
speed, long journey):
steering movements and avoid sudden braking.
–  worsens road-holding.
►  Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
–  lengthens braking distances.
so. Reinitialisation
–  causes premature wear of the tyres.
►  The system must be reinitialised after any
–  increases energy consumption.
adjustment to the pressure of one or more tyres,
and after changing one or more wheels.

99
 Driving

Before reinitialising the system, make

sure that the pressures of the four tyres
ConnectedCAM Citroën Without exception, any action which the
driver takes concerning the camera must
are correct for the conditions of use of the (Depending on country of sale) be with the vehicle stationary.
vehicle and conform to the values written on
the tyre pressure label.
Check the pressures of the four tyres before
Operation
performing the reinitialisation. To use all camera functions, you must perform
The system does not advise if a pressure is the following operations:
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. ►  Download the ConnectedCAM
Citroën application onto a smartphone.
With the vehicle stationary, the system is ►  Pair the smartphone with the camera
reinitialised via the Driving/Vehicle touch following the instructions given by the
screen menu. This camera, installed at the top of the application.
windscreen and connected wirelessly, allows Pairing is necessary at the first connection. After
Malfunction you to: this it will be automatic.
In the event of a malfunction, –  Take photos and videos on demand and share The default pairing code is: "ConnectedCAM".
these warning lamps light up on them.
the instrument panel. –  Send the vehicle's GPS coordinates to a On/Off
A message appears, accompanied by an audible smartphone. ►  Press and hold this button to switch
signal. –  Record videos automatically in the event of a the camera on/off (confirmed by the
In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring vehicle impact. indicator lamp coming on/going off).
function is no longer performed. As the use of the ConnectedCAM When the camera is switched on, video
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a Citroën® is under your control and your recording is automatic and permanent.
qualified workshop. responsibility, you must comply with the The status of the function is stored when the
regulations for the protection of personal data ignition is switched off.
Non-standard or 'space-saver' spare
wheel (e.g. images of other people, vehicle number
plates, protected buildings, etc.). Check first
Managing photos and videos
The use of this type of spare wheel may
that your insurance company accepts the ►  Press this button briefly to take a
suspend tyre pressure monitoring.
footage collected from the ConnectedCAM photo.
In this case, the malfunction warning lamp
Citroën® as evidence. An audible signal confirms that the request has
comes on and disappears once the wheel
been acknowledged.
has been replaced by one of uniform size (the
►  Press and hold this button to record a video.
same as the others), the pressure readjusted
and the reinitialisation carried out.

100
 Driving

A micro USB socket also allows the data from

the camera to be saved onto other media such
Driving and manoeuvring
aids - General
the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the
mirrors. 6
as computers, tablets, etc.
Thanks to the ConnectedCAM Citroën recommendations Radar(s)
application, you can then automatically and The operation of the radar(s), along with
immediately share your photos and videos on Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in any associated functions, may be affected
social networks or by email. any circumstances, replace the need for by the accumulation of dirt (e.g. mud, ice),
An audible signal confirms that the request has vigilance on the part of the driver. in poor weather conditions (e.g. heavy rain,
been acknowledged. The driver must comply with the Highway snow), or if the bumpers are damaged.
Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact
Resetting the system all circumstances and must be able to retake a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop;
►  Press and hold these 2 buttons control of it at all times. The driver must adapt certain types of paint could interfere with the
simultaneously to reset the the speed to climatic conditions, traffic and operation of the radar(s).
system. the state of the road.
This action erases all data recorded in the It is the driver's responsibility to constantly
camera and reinitialises the camera’s default monitor traffic conditions, assess the distance
pairing code. and relative speed of other vehicles, and
For safety reasons, the driver must not anticipate their manoeuvres before using the
use the ConnectedCAM Citroën direction indicator and changing lanes.
application from a smartphone while driving. These systems do not make it possible to
exceed the laws of physics. Driving aids camera
He or she must perform any action requiring
This camera and its associated functions
sustained attention when the vehicle is
may be impaired or not work if the windscreen
stationary. Driving aids
area in front of the camera is dirty, misty,
You should hold the steering wheel with
frosty, covered with snow, damaged or
both hands, always use the door and interior
Malfunction mirrors, always leave your feet close to the
masked by a sticker.
When a system fault occurs, the indicator In humid and cold weather, demist the
pedals and take a break every 2 hours.
lamp in the button flashes. windscreen regularly.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
Manoeuvring aids
or a qualified workshop. heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle
The driver must always check the
(headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun,
surroundings of the vehicle before and during
reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel,

101
 Driving

alternating shade and light) can also impair A front or rear impact to the vehicle can Units of speed
detection performance. upset the sensors’ settings, which is not Ensure that the units of speed displayed
In the event of a windscreen replacement, always detected by the system: distance on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified measurements may be distorted. those for the country you are driving in.
workshop to recalibrate the camera; The sensors do not systematically detect If this is not the case, when the vehicle is
otherwise, the operation of the associated obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) stationary, set the display to the required
driving aids may be disrupted. or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). units of speed so that it complies with what is
Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind authorised locally.
Other cameras spots may not be detected or may no longer In case of doubt, contact a CITROËN dealer
The images from the camera(s) be detected during the manoeuvre. or a qualified workshop.
displayed on the touch screen or on the Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound
instrument panel may be distorted by the waves: pedestrians may not be detected.
terrain. Road signs recognition
In the presence of areas in shade, or in Maintenance
conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and For more information, refer to the
lighting, the image may be darkened and with the field of vision of the cameras regularly. General recommendations on the use
lower contrast. When washing your vehicle at high pressure, of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Obstacles may appear further away than they direct the spray from at least 30 cm away
actually are. from the radar, sensors and cameras.

Sensors Mats/Pedal trims

The operation of the sensors, as well as The use of mats or pedal trims not
any associated functions, may be disrupted approved by CITROËN may interfere with
by noise pollution such as that emitted by the operation of the speed limiter or cruise
noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, control.
pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
snow or dead leaves on the road or in the –  Ensure that the mat is secured correctly. This system displays the maximum speed
event of damaged bumpers and mirrors. –  Never fit one mat on top of another. authorised locally on the instrument panel, using:
When reverse gear is engaged, an audible –  Speed limit signs detected by the camera.
signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors –  Speed limit information from the navigation
may be dirty. system’s mapping.

102
 Driving

–  Signs indicating a shared traffic zone detected

by the camera.
Supplementary
traffic sign detected
Display of
the speed
Supplementary
traffic sign detected
Display of
the speed
6
Sign detected Suggested speed associated with associated with
(calculated) the supplementary the supplementary
Entry into a shared Without CITROËN traffic sign traffic sign
traffic zone Connect Nav Speed limit when If the wiper control Speed limit for 56 mph (90 km/h)
Example: 10 mph or 20 km/h raining stalk is in the vehicles with a (for example)
(depending on Examples: "intermittent wipe" gross vehicle
the units on the or "automatic wipe" weight or gross
instrument panel) position (in order train weight less
With CITROËN to activate the rain than 3.5 tonnes
Connect Nav sensor):
Display of the speed 68 mph (110 km/h)
in force in the country (for example) Speed limit in case If the outside
you are driving in.
Speed limit when If an approved towing of snow temperature is below
–  Some supplementary traffic signs detected by towing device is fixed to the Example: 3°C:
the camera. vehicle: 19 mph (30 km/h)
56 mph (90 km/h) (for example)
(for example) with a "snowflake"
symbol
Speed limit 43 mph (70 km/h)
applicable over a (for example) Speed limit at 19 mph (30 km/h)
certain distance certain times of the (for example)
Example: day with a "clock" symbol
Example:

Navigation mapping should be regularly

updated in order to receive accurate
speed limit information from the system.

103
 Driving

The units for the speed limit (mph or Information displayed on Operating limits
km/h) depend on the country you are
driving in.
the instrument panel The system does not take account of reduced
speed limits, especially those imposed in the
This should be taken into account to ensure
following cases:
you observe the speed limit.
–  Atmospheric pollution.
For the system to work properly when
1. Detected speed limit indication – Towing.
changing countries, the speed unit of the
or –  Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel
instrument panel must match that of the
2. End of speed limit indication or snow chains fitted.
country you are driving in.
–  Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture
repair kit.
Automatic sign reading is a driving aid –  Young drivers.
system and does not always display the The system may not display the speed limit if it
correct speed limits. does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset
The speed limit signs present on the road period and in the following situations:
always take priority over those displayed by The system is active but is not detecting speed
–  Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard,
the system. limit information.
damaged or bent.
The system is designed to detect signs that –  Obsolete or incorrect maps.
conform to the Vienna Convention on road
signs. Speed setting
recommendations
Specific speed limits, such as those for On detecting speed limit information, the system The driver can select the speed displayed by the
heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. displays the value. Road signs recognition system as the speed
The display of the speed limit on the
setting for the speed limiter, cruise control or
instrument panel is updated when passing
adaptive cruise control using the OK button.
a speed limit sign intended for cars (light
In the event of rain detection, the system offers
vehicles).
the driver a speed setting lower than the speed
read/from the map in order to adapt to weather
Activation/Deactivation For a suggested maximum speed, the first time
that the vehicle exceeds it by more than 3 mph
conditions (e.g.on motorways, the proposed
By default, the system is automatically activated speed is 68 mph (110 km/h) instead of 81 mph
(5 km/h) (e.g. 59 mph (95 km/h)), the speed is (130 km/h).
at every engine start. displayed and flashes for 10 seconds (depending
The settings are changed via the on version).
Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.

104
 Driving

For more information on the Speed

limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive
4. Current speed setting
5. Speed memorisation prompt
6
cruise control, refer to the corresponding 6. Current speed limit indication
sections.
This additional system recognises these road
Memorising the speed setting signs and displays them on the instrument panel
Steering-mounted controls ►  Switch on the speed limiter 1-LIMIT or cruise if the appropriate display mode is selected:
control 2. –  No entry: when entering a lane in the wrong
Information related to the speed limiter or cruise direction, an alert message, including the symbol
control is displayed. of this sign, is displayed on the instrument panel
When a new speed setting is detected, the (request to check the direction of traffic).
system displays the value and “OK?“ flashes –  Other signs: as you approach it, the symbol
for a few seconds to suggest saving it as a new of the corresponding sign is displayed on the
speed setting. instrument panel.
If there is a difference of less than 3 mph The actual road signs always take priority
(5 km/h) between the speed setting and over the display from the system.
the speed displayed by the Road signs The signs must comply with the Vienna
recognition, the "OK?“ symbol is not Convention on road signs.
displayed.
1. Select speed limiter mode
2. Select cruise control mode Depending on the road conditions, several Activation / Deactivation
3. Memorise the speed setting speeds may be displayed. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch
►  Press 3-OK to confirm the new speed setting. screen menu.
The display then reverts to its previous state.
Information displayed on the
instrument panel Extended Traffic Sign Speed limiter
Recognition For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
For more information, refer to the
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids. This system prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver (speed setting).

105
 Driving

The speed limiter is switched on manually. Information displayed on When the speed setting remains below
The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). the vehicle's speed for a prolonged
The speed setting remains in the system
the instrument panel period of time, an audible warning is emitted.
memory when the ignition is switched off.

Steering-mounted controls Adjusting the speed setting

You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in
order to set the speed.
To change the speed setting using the vehicle’s
current speed:
►  For steps of +/- 1 mph (1 km/h), make
successive short presses upwards/downwards
on 3 to increase/decrease.
►  For steps of +/- 5 mph (5 km/h), press and
hold upwards/downwards on 3 to increase/
decrease.
To modify the cruise speed setting based on the
5. Speed limiter mode selection indication speed suggested by the Road signs recognition,
6. Speed limiter on (green)/pause (grey) as shown on the instrument panel:
1. Speed limiter selection indication –  When passing the sign:
2. Switch on/pause the speed limiter at the 7. Speed setting value ►  Press 4-OK to save the suggested speed.
previously saved speed setting 8. Speed suggested by the Road signs This value is then immediately shown as the new
3. Increase/Decrease the speed setting recognition function (depending on version) speed setting on the instrument panel.
4. Activate the speed limiter at the previously –  After passing the sign:
saved speed setting
Use the speed suggested by the Road signs
Switching on/Pausing ►  Press 4-OK. The message “OK?" is
displayed to confirm the request to save.
recognition function ►  Press 1-LIMIT to select the speed limiter
►  Press 4-OK again to save the suggested
mode; the function is paused (grey).
For more information on the Road signs speed. The new speed setting value is displayed
►  If the limit speed setting is suitable (most
recognition function, refer to the corresponding on the instrument panel.
recent speed setting programmed in the system),
section. press 2-I I> or 4-OK to switch the speed limiter
on (green).
Temporarily exceeding the
►  Pressing 2-I I> again temporarily pauses the speed setting
function. ►  Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

106
 Driving

The speed limiter is temporarily deactivated and

the displayed speed setting flashes.
Cruise control - Specific
recommendations
Operating limits
Never use the system in the following 6
►  Release the accelerator pedal to return to situations:
below the speed setting. –  In an urban area with the risk of
When exceeding the speed is not due to the The cruise control function does not pedestrians crossing the road.
driver's action (e.g. in case of a steep slope), an guarantee compliance with the maximum –  In heavy traffic (except versions with the
audible signal is triggered immediately. authorised speed and the safety distance Stop & Go function).
between vehicles, the driver remains –  On winding or steep roads.
On a steep descent or in the event of responsible for their driving. –  On slippery or flooded roads.
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will In the interest of public safety, only use cruise –  In poor weather conditions.
not be able to prevent the vehicle from control if the traffic conditions enable vehicles –  Driving on a speed circuit.
exceeding the speed setting. to drive at a steady speed and maintain an –  Driving on a rolling road.
If necessary, apply the brakes to control your adequate safety distance. –  When using snow chains, non-slip covers
vehicle’s speed. Remain vigilant while cruise control is or studded tyres.
activated. If you press and hold one of the
When the vehicle speed returns to the speed
speed setting modification buttons, your
setting level, the speed limiter operates again:
the speed setting display becomes fixed again.
vehicle may change speed very abruptly.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
Cruise control
Off control system cannot prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the set speed. Brake if
For more information, refer to the
►  Press 1-LIMIT: the speed limiter information General recommendations on the use
necessary to control the vehicle speed.
display disappears. of driving and manoeuvring aids and the
On steep climbs or when towing, the set
Cruise control - particular
speed may not be reached or maintained.
Malfunction recommendations.
In the event of a malfunction, dashes are
Exceeding the programmed speed This system automatically maintains the
displayed flashing and then fixed instead of the
setting vehicle’s speed at the value programmed
speed setting.
You can temporarily exceed the speed by the driver (speed setting), without the use of
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the the accelerator pedal.
qualified workshop.
programmed speed flashes). Cruise control is switched on manually.
To return to the speed setting, release the It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
accelerator pedal (when the set speed is (40 km/h).
reached again, the displayed speed stops With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must
flashing). be engaged.

107
 Driving

With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second 3. Increase/Decrease the speed setting (if 8. Speed suggested by the Road signs
gear or higher in mode M must be engaged. cruise control activated) recognition function (depending on version)
With a drive selector, mode D or B must be Activation of cruise control in progress (if
engaged. cruise control deactivated) Switching on/pausing
Cruise control remains active after 4. Activation of cruise control in progress
►  Press button 1 to select the cruise control
changing gear, regardless of the gearbox Use the speed suggested by the Road signs
mode; the function is paused (grey).
type, on engines fitted with the Stop & Start recognition
►  Press 3 upwards/downwards, or press 4-OK
function. For more information on the Road signs to activate the cruise control and save a speed
recognition function, refer to the corresponding setting as soon as the vehicle speed reaches the
Switching off the ignition cancels any section. desired level (green).
speed setting. ►  Pressing button 2-I I> temporarily pauses the
Information displayed on function.

Steering-mounted controls the instrument panel ►  Pressing 2-I I> or 4-OK again will reactivate
cruise control (green).

Cruise control operation is also

temporarily interrupted (pause):
–  by pressing the brake pedal.
–  automatically, if the electronic stability
control (ESC) system is triggered.
–  by shifting to neutral or engaging reverse
gear.
–  by using the electric parking brake.

Modifying the speed setting

The cruise control must be active.
1. Cruise control selection To change the speed setting using the vehicle’s
2. Switch on/pause cruise control at the 5. Cruise control mode selection indication current speed:
previously saved speed setting 6. Cruise control on (green)/pause (grey) ►  For steps of +/- 1 mph (1 km/h),
indication make successive short presses upwards/
7. Speed setting value downwards on 3 to increase/decrease.

108
 Driving

►  For steps of +/- 5 mph (5 km/h), press and

hold upwards/downwards on 3 to increase/
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, dashes are
Primarily designed for driving on main
roads and motorways, this system only 6
decrease. works with moving vehicles driving in the
displayed flashing and then fixed instead of the
same direction as your vehicle.
Prolonged pressing and holding speed setting.
upwards/downwards on 3 causes a very Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
rapid change in vehicle speed. qualified workshop.
Adaptive cruise control
As a precaution, we recommend setting Highway Driver Assist For more information, refer to the
a cruise speed fairly close to the current
Only available on versions with the EAT8 General recommendations on the use
speed of your vehicle, to avoid any sudden
automatic gearbox and drive selector. of driving and manoeuvring aids and the
acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle.
This system automatically adjusts the speed Cruise control - particular
To change the speed setting using the speed and corrects the trajectory of the vehicle, using recommendations.
suggested by the Road signs recognition Adaptive cruise control with Stop&Go function in
This system automatically maintains the vehicle
displayed on the instrument panel: conjunction with Lane Positioning Assist.
speed at a value set by the driver (speed
–  When passing the sign: These two functions must be activated and in
setting), while respecting a safety distance from
►  Press 4-OK to save the suggested speed. operation.
the vehicle in front (target vehicle) previously set
This value is then immediately shown as the new For more information on Adaptive cruise
by the driver. The system automatically manages
speed setting on the instrument panel. control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to
the acceleration and deceleration of the vehicle.
–  After passing the sign: the corresponding sections.
With the Stop function, the system manages
►  Press 4-OK. The message “OK?" is
The system assists the driver by acting braking until the vehicle comes to a complete
displayed to confirm the request to save.
on the steering, acceleration and braking stop.
►  Press 4-OK again to save the suggested
within the physical limits and capacities of the With the Stop & Go function, the system
speed. The new speed setting value is displayed
vehicle. Certain road infrastructure elements manages braking until the vehicle comes to a
on the instrument panel.
or vehicles in the surroundings may not be complete stop and restarts the vehicle.
properly seen or may be poorly interpreted by
Off the camera and radar, resulting in an
The brake lamps come on if the vehicle
►  Press 1: the cruise control information display is slowed down by the system.
unexpected change in direction, a lack of
disappears. It can be dangerous to drive if the brake
steering correction and/or inappropriate
lamps are not in perfect working order.
management of acceleration or braking.

109
 Driving

Steering-mounted controls Information displayed on

the instrument panel
To do this, the system uses a camera fitted at the
top of the windscreen and a radar fitted in the
front bumper.

Primarily designed for driving on main

roads and motorways, this system only
works with moving vehicles driving in the
same direction as your vehicle.

If the driver activates the direction

indicator to overtake a slower vehicle,
1. Selection/deselection of cruise control only or
cruise control may temporarily reduce the
Highway Driver Assist (depending on version)
distance to the target vehicle to facilitate
2. Switch on/pause cruise control at the 5. Cruise control activated (green)/paused
overtaking, without exceeding the speed
previously saved speed setting (grey)
setting.
Confirmation of vehicle restart after automatic 6. Speed setting value
stop (version with Stop & Go function) 7. Speed suggested by the Road signs
3. Increase/Decrease the speed setting (if recognition function
cruise control activated) 8. Vehicle held stationary (version with
Activation of cruise control in progress (if Stop&Go function)
cruise control deactivated) 9. Inter-vehicle distance setting
Display and configuration of the inter-vehicle 10. Position of the vehicle detected by the
distance setting system
4. Activation of cruise control in progress
Use the speed suggested by the Road signs Use
recognition function
Selecting the system
For more information on the Road signs
►  With the engine running, press 1-ASSIST to
recognition function, refer to the corresponding
select cruise control mode.
section.

110
 Driving

The symbol for the Adaptive cruise control

system is displayed on the instrument
To change the speed setting using the
speed suggested by the Road signs
Cruise control remains active following a
gear change. 6
panel. recognition function and displayed on the
Switching on cruise control instrument panel: When cruise control is paused and the
–  When passing the sign: driver tries to reactivate it, the message
With an EAT8 automatic gearbox or a drive
►  Press 4-OK to save the suggested speed. "Activation refused, conditions unsuitable"
selector, your speed must be between 0 and
This value is then immediately shown as the new is temporarily displayed if reactivation is
112 mph (0 and 180 km/h).
speed setting on the instrument panel. impossible (required conditions not met).
System activation is also subject to the following
–  After passing the sign:
conditions:
►  Press 4-OK. The message "OK?" is Changing the programmed speed setting
–  driver's door closed.
displayed to confirm the request to save. with the Road signs recognition function
–  driver's seat belt fastened.
►  Press 4-OK again to save the suggested
– mode D selected on the automatic gearbox. ►  Press 4-OK to accept the speed suggested
speed. The new speed setting value is displayed
–  parking brake released. by the function on the instrument panel, then
on the instrument panel.
–  if the vehicle is stationary, brake pedal press again to confirm.
depressed. Pausing/resumption of cruise control
If the selected speed is far from the
►  Press 3 or 4-OK: the current speed becomes ►  Press 2-I I> or depress the brake pedal. The
current vehicle speed, a strong
the speed setting (minimum 19 mph (30 km/h)) symbol turns grey.
acceleration or deceleration is felt.
and cruise control is immediately activated Cruise control may also have been paused:
(green display). –  automatically, if the electronic stability control Changing the inter-vehicle distance
Modifying the speed setting (ESC) system is triggered.
–  by shifting to neutral or engaging reverse gear. ►  Press 3 to display the distance setting
To change the speed setting using the vehicle’s thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"),
–  by using the electric parking brake.
current speed: then make successive short presses upwards/
–  by unfastening the seat belt.
►  For steps of +/- 1 mph (1 km/h), make downwards to select a threshold.
–  by opening the driver's door.
successive short presses upwards/downwards After a few seconds, the option is accepted and
►  Press 2-I I> or 4-OK to reactivate cruise
on 3 to increase/decrease. will be memorised when the ignition is switched
control.
►  For steps of +/- 5 mph (5 km/h), press and off.
With an EAT8 gearbox or a drive selector,
hold upwards/downwards on 3 to increase/ The driver must keep a sufficient safety distance
following braking that has brought the vehicle
decrease. from the vehicle in front.
to a complete stop, if the traffic conditions do
Prolonged pressing and holding not allow the vehicle to begin moving again Temporarily exceeding the speed setting
upwards/downwards on 3 causes a rapid within 3 seconds of stopping, press 2-I I> or the ►  Depress the accelerator pedal. The system
change in vehicle speed. accelerator pedal to move off. is suspended as long as the acceleration is

111
 Driving

maintained. The speed next to the symbol Within 3 seconds of stopping, the vehicle
disappears from the instrument panel. (green symbol) gradually and automatically begins moving
Cruise control active, vehicle again.
Deselecting the system detected. Beyond 3 seconds of stopping, the driver must
►  Press 1-ASSIST until the symbols disappear
accelerate or press 2-I I> to move off.
from the instrument panel.
If the driver takes no action after the
Messages and alerts (green symbol) vehicle has been stopped, the electric
Cruise control suspended, parking brake is applied automatically after
The actual order of display of the about 5 minutes.
following brief acceleration by
messages or alerts may be different.
the driver.
While the vehicle is immobilised, the
(grey symbol)
(orange) following recommendations apply:
Cruise control selected, but
"Take back control" –  The driver should not leave the vehicle.
cannot be activated.
►  Brake or accelerate, depending on the –  Do not open the boot.
All the operating conditions have
context. –  Do not drop off or pick up passengers.
not been met.
(red) –  Do not engage reverse gear.

(grey symbol) "Take back control"

Cruise control selected, awaiting ►  Take back control of the vehicle When restarting the vehicle, beware of
activation. immediately: the system cannot manage the cyclists, pedestrians or animals who are
All the operating conditions are current driving situation. not taken into account by the system.
met. "Activation refused, conditions The driver must monitor their surroundings.
unsuitable"
(grey symbol) The system refuses to activate cruise control, as
the necessary conditions are not fulfilled.
Operating limits
Cruise control paused, but
Cruise control operates by day and night, in dry
cannot be reactivated. Stop & Go function
weather or moderate rainfall.
All the operating conditions have
(green symbols) Certain situations cannot be managed by the
not been met.
The system has brought the system and require driver intervention.
vehicle to a complete stop. The Cases not taken into account by the system:
symbol "I I" is displayed. –  Pedestrians, cyclists, animals.
–  Stationary vehicles (e.g. traffic jams,
breakdown).

112
 Driving

If the vehicle has undergone any of the

following modifications, do not use the 6
system:
–  Carrying long objects on roof bars.
– Towing.
–  Use of the "space-saver" type spare wheel
–  Vehicles crossing your lane. –  When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your
(depending on version).
–  Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. vehicle and the one in front.
–  Front end of the vehicle modified (for
Situations where the driver must suspend the
Some vehicles on the road may be example by adding long-range headlamps or
system:
poorly perceived or interpreted by the painting the front bumper).
camera and/or the radar (e.g. truck), which –  Obstructed radar and/or camera.
can lead to an incorrect evaluation of
distances and result in inappropriate
acceleration or braking of the vehicle.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction,
Pay particular attention: dashes are displayed instead of
–  When motorcycles are present and the speed setting.
–  Vehicles in a tight bend. when there are vehicles staggered across the
This warning lamp comes on,
–  When approaching a roundabout. traffic lane.
accompanied by a message and an
–  When entering a tunnel or crossing a
audible signal, to confirm the malfunction.
bridge.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If any of the following malfunctions
occurs, do not use the system:
–  Following an impact on the windscreen Lane positioning assist
–  When following a narrow vehicle. close to the camera or on the front bumper
Reactivate the system when conditions allow. (versions with radar). For more information, refer to the
Situations in which the driver is prompted to –  Brake lamps not working. General recommendations on the use
immediately resume control: of driving and manoeuvring aids.
–  Excessively sharp deceleration by the vehicle
in front of you.

113
 Driving

All operating conditions are met; the system is At any time, the driver can change the position of
active. the vehicle by intervening on the steering wheel
(orange) and maintaining the position until the system has
System malfunction. taken it into account. If the chosen position is too
If the driver no longer wishes to use the system off-centre, an automatic re-centering manoeuvre
for some time, they can deactivate it by pressing can occur. The system adjusts to the newly
The system identifies the limits of the traffic
the button again (confirmed when the symbol defined position.
lane and steers the vehicle inside this lane to
disappears).
maintain it in the lateral position chosen by the
Pausing/Suspending the
driver. The system status is saved when the
To do this, the system uses a camera placed on ignition is switched off. system
the upper part of the windscreen.
The driver must act promptly if they
This function is primarily suitable for driving on
motorways and main roads.
Operating conditions believe that the traffic conditions or the
–  Adaptive cruise control active. state of the road surface require their
Activation/Deactivation –  ESC system operational. intervention, by moving the steering wheel to
temporarily suspend system operation. Any
The Lane positioning assist system is –  ASR system activated.
–  No trailer detected. action on the brake pedal that causes the
automatically activated, after selecting Highway
–  No 'space-saver' spare wheel in use. Adaptive cruise control system to be paused
Driver Assist mode.
–  Vehicle not subject to strong lateral g-forces. will also cause the system to be paused.
For more information on the Highway Driver
Assist system, refer to the corresponding –  Direction indicators not activated.
If the system detects that the driver is not
section.
The selection is confirmed by the display of
Regulation holding the wheel firmly enough, it
The driver must hold the steering wheel triggers a series of gradual alerts and then
the symbols on the instrument panel or on the
properly. deactivates itself if there is no response from
head-up display (if fitted), representing the
When regulation is activated, the symbols are the driver.
steering wheel and the side lines.
The colour of the symbols depends on the displayed in green: with small steering inputs,
operating state of the system: the system steers the vehicle and keeps it in the If the function is suspended due to the
(grey) position chosen by the driver in the traffic lane. prolonged release of the force holding
One or more operating conditions is not This position is not necessarily the centre of the the steering wheel, the system must be
met; the system is paused. lane. reactivated by pressing the button again.
(green) The driver can feel movements in the steering
wheel.

114
 Driving

Automatic suspension
Suspension of the system is accompanied by a
itself once the operating conditions are met
again.
–  Action on the brake pedal (resulting in a pause
until cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator 6
specific audible signal. Paused by the driver pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal is
–  Triggering of the ESC system. depressed).
–  Travelling outside the lane limits.
–  Insufficient lane detection. In this case, the –  Pausing of the Adaptive cruise control system.
–  Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or
Active lane departure warning system function –  Deactivation of the ASR system.
dynamic action on the steering wheel.
can take over, and the system will reactivate

Driving situations and related alerts

The tables below describe the displays associated with the main driving situations. The actual order of display of these alerts may be different.
The locations of these symbols vary according to the display mode selected on the instrument panel and whether or not the head-up display is activated (if
fitted to vehicle).
Symbols Comments
Cruise control paused.
Lane positioning assist not selected.

(grey)

Cruise control on.

Lane positioning assist not selected.

(green)

115
 Driving

Symbols Comments
Highway Driver Assist system activated.
Lane positioning assist is operating normally (steering wheel correction active).
(green)

(green)

(green lines)
Highway Driver Assist system paused by the driver.

(grey)

(grey)

116
 Driving

Symbols Comments 6
Highway Driver Assist system activated.
All the operating conditions for lane positioning assist have not been met.
(grey)

(green)

Highway Driver Assist system suspended.

Cruise control and lane positioning assist are suspended.
(grey)

(green)

Messages Driving situations

"Keep your hands on the steering wheel" Prolonged driving without holding the steering wheel, holding it improperly or without
applying any force.
"Hold the steering wheel" Actual or imminent loss of lane positioning assist.
"Take back control" Simultaneous loss of cruise control and lane positioning assist.

117
 Driving

Operating limits a trailer is not connected or the trailer is not lane markings on the ground and the side of the
an approved type. road (depending on version).
The system may issue an alert when the –  Adverse weather conditions. This system is particularly useful on
vehicle is travelling on a long, straight –  Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk of motorways and main roads.
road with smooth road surface even if the aquaplaning, snow, ice).
driver thinks they are holding the steering –  In roadworks or toll booth areas.
wheel correctly. –  Driving on racing circuits.
–  Driving on a rolling road.
The system may not operate or may produce
unsuitable corrections to the steering in the
following situations: Malfunction Operating conditions
–  Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting, In the event of a malfunction, the
–  Vehicle speed between 40 and 112 mph (65
snowfall, rain, fog). Service warning lamp comes on
and 180 km/h).
–  Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, and this (orange) symbol appears on the
–  Road marked with a central dividing line.
low sun, reflections on a wet road surface, instrument panel, accompanied by the display of
–  Steering wheel held in both hands.
leaving a tunnel, alternating light and shade). a message and an audible signal.
–  Direction indicators not activated.
–  Windscreen area in front of the camera Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
–  ESC system activated and operational.
dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-covered, qualified workshop.
damaged or covered by a sticker. The system helps the driver only if there
–  Lane markings eroded, partially hidden (snow,
mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface joints). Active lane departure is a risk of the vehicle unintentionally
wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It
–  Travelling in a tight bend. warning system does not manage the safe driving distance,
–  Winding roads. vehicle speed or braking.
–  Presence of a tarmac joint on the road. For more information, refer to the The driver must hold the steering wheel with
Risk of undesirable operation General recommendations on the use both hands in a way that allows control to
of driving and manoeuvring aids. be maintained in circumstances where the
The system should be deactivated in the system is not able to intervene (for example, if
following situations: The system corrects the vehicle's trajectory by the central dividing line disappears).
–  Driving with a "space-saver" type spare alerting the driver as soon as it detects a risk of
wheel. involuntary lane departure or crossing of a verge
–  When towing or with a bicycle carrier or hard shoulder (depending on version). Operation
attached to a towing device, particularly when To do this, the system uses a camera, placed on As soon as the system identifies a risk of
the upper part of the windscreen, identifying the involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings

118
 Driving

detected on the ground or a lane boundary

(e.g. grass verge), it performs the trajectory
This warning lamp flashes during
trajectory correction.
While the direction indicators are activated and
for a few seconds after switching them off, the 6
correction necessary to restore the vehicle to its system considers that a change of trajectory is
The driver can prevent the correction by
original lane. intentional and no correction is triggered during
firmly holding the steering wheel
The driver will notice a turning movement of the this period.
(e.g. during an emergency manoeuvre).
steering wheel.
The correction is interrupted immediately if
the direction indicators are operated.

Driving situations and related alerts

The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations.
These alerts are not displayed sequentially.
Function status Display Comments
OFF Function deactivated.

ON None. Function active, conditions not met:

–  speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
–  no lane marking recognised,
–  ESC operation triggered,
–  "sport" driving.
ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (e.g. detection of a trailer, use of the
"space-saver" spare wheel supplied with the vehicle, malfunction).

ON None. Lane marking detected.

Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of line crossing is detected.
The driver's hands are on the steering wheel.

119
 Driving

Function status Display Comments

ON If, while correcting the trajectory, the system determines that the correction will not be
enough and that a solid line will be crossed: the driver is warned that they must provide
additional trajectory adjustment.
If the steering wheel is not held properly, an audible warning sounds, accompanied by
a message, until the trajectory correction is completed or the driver has grasped the
"Hold the wheel". steering wheel correctly.
The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple corrections are performed
in quick succession. The warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver
responds.

Operating limits The following situations may interfere

with the operation of the system or
–  Road in poor condition, unstable or with very
poor grip (risk of aquaplaning, snow, ice).
The system goes into standby automatically in
prevent it from working: –  Adverse weather conditions.
the following cases:
–  Insufficient contrast between the road –  Driving on racing circuits.
–  ESC deactivated or operation triggered.
surface and the side of the road (e.g. shade). –  Driving on a rolling road.
–  Speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater
–  Lane markings worn, hidden (snow, mud)
than 112 mph (180 km/h).
or multiple (roadworks, etc.), Deactivation/Activation
–  Electrical connection to a trailer.
–  Close proximity to the vehicle in front (lane
–  Use of a"space-saver" spare wheel detected
markings may not be detected).
(as detection is not immediate, deactivation of
–  Roads that are narrow, winding.
the system is recommended).
–  Dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
the brake or accelerator pedal. Risk of undesirable operation
–  Driving over lane markings. The system should be deactivated in the
–  Activation of the direction indicators. following situations:
–  Crossing the inside line on a bend. –  When changing a wheel or working near a
–  Driving on a tight bend. wheel. ►  Press and hold this button to deactivate or
–  Inactivity by the driver detected during –  Towing or with a bicycle carrier on a towing press briefly to reactivate the system at any time.
correction. device, especially with trailer not plugged in or Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of
–  Narrow lane detected. not approved. the indicator lamp in the button and this
warning lamp in the instrument panel.

120
 Driving

The system is automatically reactivated every

time the ignition is switched on.
without Park Assist) or between 19 and 87 mph
(30 and 140 km/h) (versions with Park Assist). 6
–  When overtaking a vehicle, the speed
Malfunction difference is less than 6 mph (10 km/h).
In the event of a malfunction, –  When overtaken by a vehicle, the speed
these warning lamps light up on difference is less than 16 mph (25 km/h).
the instrument panel, accompanied by the –  Traffic is flowing normally.
display of a message and an audible signal. The warning is given by a fixed warning lamp –  Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a that appears in the door mirror on the side in time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in
qualified workshop. question: the blind spot.
–  immediately, when being overtaken; –  You are driving on a straight or slightly curved
–  after a delay of about one second, when
Blind spot monitoring overtaking a vehicle slowly.
road.
–  Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan,
etc.
For more information, refer to the Activation/Deactivation
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
It is set via theDriving/Vehicle touch Operating limits
screen menu.
When starting the vehicle, the warning lamp
comes on in each mirror to indicate that the
system is activated.
The status of the system is memorised when the
ignition is switched off.

The system is automatically deactivated

when towing with a towing device
approved by CITROËN.

This system warns the driver of a potential

Operating conditions
danger posed by the presence of another vehicle
–  All vehicles are moving in the same direction
(car, lorry, motorcycle) in the vehicle's blind
and in adjacent lanes.
spots (areas hidden from the driver's field of
–  The speed of your vehicle must be between
vision) using sensors located on the sides of the
7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h) (versions
bumpers.

121
 Driving

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a

qualified workshop.

The system may be temporarily disturbed

by certain climatic conditions (e.g. rain, This system:
hail). –  warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of
In particular, driving on a wet road or going collision with the vehicle in front, a pedestrian or,
from a dry to a wet area can cause false depending on version, a cyclist.
alerts (e.g. presence of a cloud of water –  reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a
droplets in the blind spot interpreted as a collision or limit its severity.
vehicle). The speed will be reduced by a
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) (versions
sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. with camera only) or by a maximum of 31
Take care not to cover the warning zone in mph (50 km/h) (versions with camera and
the door mirrors, or the detection zones on radar).
No alert is triggered in the following conditions:
the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
–  presence of stationary objects (e.g. parked
labels or other objects; they may hamper
vehicles, safety rails, lampposts, signs). The system also takes motorcyclists into
correct operation of the system.
–  vehicles travelling in the opposite direction. account.
–  on winding roads or in case of sharp turns.
This system is comprised of three functions:
–  when overtaking or being overtaken by a
very long vehicle (e.g. truck, bus), which is both Active Safety Brake with –  Collision Risk Alert.
detected in a blind spot from behind and present Collision Risk Alert and –  Intelligent emergency braking assistance
(iEBA).
in the driver's field of vision from the front.
–  quick overtaking manoeuvre. Intelligent emergency –  Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
–  very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front braking assistance braking).
and behind are confused with a lorry or a
stationary object. For more information, refer to the
–  activation of the Park Assist function. General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Malfunction
If the event of a malfunction, this warning
lamp comes on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by the display of a message.

122
 Driving

The settings are changed via the

Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
It is possible that warnings are not given,
are given too late or seem unjustified. 6
Deactivation of the system is signalled by The driver must always stay in control of the
the illumination of this warning lamp, vehicle and be prepared to react at any time
accompanied by the display of a message. to avoid an accident.

Operating conditions and Following an impact, the system is

limits automatically deactivated.
Vehicle moving forward. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
ESC system operational. qualified workshop.
The vehicle has a multifunction camera located
Seat belts fastened for all passengers.
at the top of the windscreen and, depending on
version, a radar located in the front bumper.
Stabilised speed on roads with few bends. Collision Risk Alert
In the following cases, deactivating the system
This function warns the driver that their vehicle
This system does not replace the need via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised:
is at risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, or
for vigilance on the part of the driver. –  Towing a trailer.
with a pedestrian or cyclist present in their traffic
This system is designed to assist the driver –  Carrying long objects on roof bars.
lane.
and improve road safety. –  Vehicle with snow chains fitted.
It is the driver's responsibility to continuously –  Before using an automatic car wash, with the Modifying the alert trigger threshold
monitor traffic conditions in accordance with engine running.
This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity
applicable driving regulations. –  Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in
with which the function warns of the risk of
a workshop.
collision.
As soon as the system detects a –  Towed vehicle, engine running.
The threshold is set via
potential obstacle, it prepares the braking –  Following an impact to the windscreen close to
theDriving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
circuit in case automatic braking is needed. the detection camera.
►  Select one of the three pre-defined
This may cause a slight noise and a slight The system is automatically deactivated thresholds: "Far", "Normal" or "Close".
sensation of deceleration. when the use of certain types of The last threshold selected is memorised when
"space-saver" spare wheel (smaller diameter) the ignition is switched off.
Deactivation/Activation is detected, or if a fault with the brake pedal
Operation
switch or at least two brake lamps is detected.
By default, the system is automatically activated
Depending on the degree of risk of collision
at every engine start.
It can be dangerous to drive if the brake detected by the system and the alert trigger
lamps are not in perfect working order. threshold chosen by the driver, several different

123
 Driving

levels of alert may be triggered and displayed on Intelligent emergency The speed will be reduced by a
the instrument panel. maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) (versions
The system takes account of the vehicle
braking assistance (iEBA) with camera only) or by a maximum of 31
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the one This function supplements braking in the event mph (50 km/h) (versions with camera and
in front, the environmental conditions and the that the driver brakes, but not enough to avoid a radar).
operation of the vehicle (actions on the pedals, collision.
steering wheel, etc.) to trigger the alert at the This assistance will only be provided if the driver
presses the brake pedal. Operation
most relevant moment.
Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, The system operates in the following speed
warning that the vehicle in front is very Active Safety Brake ranges:
close. –  Between 3 mph and 50 mph (5 km/h and
The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. 80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle is detected.
Level 2 (red): visual and audible alert, –  Between 3 mph and 50 mph (5 km/h and
warning that a collision is imminent. 80 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected.
The message "Brake!" is displayed. –  Between 3 mph and 50 mph (5 km/h and
Level 3: in some cases, a vibration alert in the 80 km/h) when a cyclist is detected (versions
form of micro-braking can be given, confirming with camera and radar only).
the risk of collision. –  Between 3 mph and 50 mph (5 km/h and
80 km/h) (versions with camera only) or 87 mph
Where the speed of your vehicle is too (140 km/h) (versions with cameras and radar)
high approaching another vehicle, the when a moving vehicle is detected.
first level of alert may not be displayed: the This warning lamp flashes (for
level 2 alert may be displayed directly. approximately 10 seconds) as soon as
Important: the level 1 alert is not displayed the function applies the vehicle’s brakes.
when there is a stationary obstacle or With an automatic gearbox or drive selector,
when the "Near" trigger threshold has been in the event of automatic emergency braking
selected. bringing the vehicle to a complete stop, keep the
This function, also called automatic emergency
brake pedal depressed to prevent the vehicle
braking, intervenes following the alerts if the
from moving off again.
driver does not react quickly enough and does
With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic
not operate the vehicle's brakes.
emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a
The system aims to reduce the speed of impact
complete stop, the engine may stall.
or avoid a collision where the driver fails to react.

124
 Driving

The driver can maintain control of the

vehicle at any time by firmly turning the
Distraction detection If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert
is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. 6
steering wheel and/or firmly depressing the For more information, refer to the The system resets itself if one of the following
accelerator pedal. General recommendations on the use conditions is met:
of driving and manoeuvring aids. –  With the engine running, the vehicle has been
The brake pedal may vibrate slightly stationary for more than 15 minutes.
while the function is operating. Depending on version, the function consists of –  The ignition has been switched off for a few
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, either the "Coffee Break Alert" system alone or minutes.
automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 combined with the "Driver Attention Warning" –  The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
seconds. system. door is opened.
These systems are in no way designed As soon as the speed of the vehicle
Malfunction to keep the driver awake or to prevent
the driver from falling asleep at the wheel.
drops below 43 mph (70 km/h), the
system goes into standby.
In the event of a malfunction, this warning
It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling Driving time starts being counted again once
lamp lights up on the instrument panel,
tired. the speed reaches above 43 mph (70 km/h).
accompanied by the display of a message and
Take a break if you are feeling tired or at least
an audible signal.
every 2 hours.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a Driver Attention Warning
qualified workshop. Depending on version, the Coffee Break Alert
If these warning lamps come on Activation/Deactivation system may be combined with the Driver
after the engine has been switched This function is set via the touch screen Attention Warning system.
off and then restarted, contact a CITROËN Driving/Vehicle menu.
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the The function is activated by default when the
system checked. ignition is switched on.
These warning lamps light up on
the instrument panel to indicate Coffee Break Alert
that the driver's and/or front passenger's seat The system triggers an alert when it
belt is not fastened (depending on version). The detects that the driver has not taken a
automatic braking system is deactivated until the break after two hours of driving at a speed above
seat belts are fastened. 43 mph (70 km/h).
This alert is issued via the display of a message
encouraging the driver to take a break,
accompanied by an audible signal.

125
 Driving

The system assesses the driver's level of

alertness, fatigue and distraction by
Parking sensors The proximity information is given by an
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of
identifying trajectory changes in relation to the For more information, refer to the which increases as the vehicle approaches the
lane markings. General recommendations on the use obstacle.
To do this, the system uses a camera, placed on of driving and manoeuvring aids. When the distance between the vehicle and
the upper part of the windscreen. the obstacle becomes less than about thirty
This system is particularly suited to fast roads centimetres, the audible signal becomes
(speed higher than 43 mph (70 km/h)). continuous.
At a first alert level, the driver is warned by the The sound emitted by the speaker (right or
message "Be vigilant!", accompanied by an left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is
audible signal. located.
After three first-level alerts, the system triggers
Adjusting the audible signal
a further alert with the message "Dangerous
Depending on version, with
driving: take a break", accompanied by a more
This system detects and signals the proximity of CITROËN Connect Nav, pressing
pronounced audible signal.
obstacles (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) this button opens the window for adjusting the
In certain driving conditions (poor road using sensors located in the bumper. volume of the audible signal.
surface or strong winds), the system may
give alerts independent of the driver's level of Rear parking sensors Visual assistance
vigilance. ►  Engage reverse gear to start the system
(confirmed by an audible signal).
The following situations may interfere The system is switched off when reverse gear is
with the operation of the system or disengaged.
prevent it from working:
–  lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, Audible assistance
mud) or multiple (roadworks);
–  close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings
not detected); This supplements the audible signal, without
–  roads that are narrow, winding, etc. taking account of the vehicle's trajectory, by
displaying bars on the screen that represent the
distance between the obstacle and the vehicle
The system signals the presence of obstacles
(white: more distant, orange: close, red: very
within the sensors’ detection zone.
close).

126
 Driving

When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger"

symbol is displayed on the screen.
Only fixed obstacles are indicated
correctly. Moving obstacles detected at
The parking sensors are deactivated while the
Park Assist function is measuring a space. 6
the beginning of the manoeuvre may be For more information on the Park
Front parking sensors indicated mistakenly, while moving obstacles Assist function, refer to the corresponding
Supplementing the rear parking sensors, the that appear alongside the vehicle but were section.
front parking sensors are triggered when an not previously recorded will not be indicated.
When starting the vehicle, the graphic
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the
and audible aids are only available after
vehicle is below 6 mph (10 km/h). Objects memorised during the the touch screen has started up.
Front parking sensor operation is suspended if manoeuvre will no longer be stored after
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in switching off the ignition.
forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected Operating limits
or the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt,
Deactivation/Activation affecting distance measurements.
The sound emitted by the speaker (front
The settings are changed via
or rear) locates the obstacle relative to
the vehicle, in front or behind it.
the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. Malfunction
The system status is memorised when the
In the event of a malfunction when
ignition is switched off.
changing into reverse gear, this warning
Side parking sensors lamp lights up on the instrument panel,
accompanied by the display of a message and
an audible signal (short beep).
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

Reversing camera
The rear parking sensors system will be
Using four additional sensors located on the deactivated automatically if a trailer or For more information, refer to the
sides of the bumpers, the system records the bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device General recommendations on the use
position of obstacles during the manoeuvre and installed in accordance with the of driving and manoeuvring aids.
indicates them when they are located alongside manufacturer's recommendations.
the vehicle. In this case, the outline of a trailer is displayed
at the rear of the image of the vehicle.

127
 Driving

The green lines 3 represent distances of about 1

and 2 metres beyond the edge of your vehicle's
rear bumper.
The turquoise curves 4 show the maximum
turning angle in either direction.

Opening the tailgate causes the display

to disappear.

Clean the reversing camera regularly

The reversing camera is activated automatically using a soft, dry cloth.
when reverse gear is engaged.
The image is displayed on the touch screen.

The reversing camera function may be Top Rear Vision - 360

supplemented by the parking sensors. vision The screen is divided into two parts with a
contextual view and a view from above the
For more information, refer to the vehicle in its close surroundings.
General recommendations on the use The parking sensors supplement the information
of driving and manoeuvring aids. on the view from above the vehicle.
Various contextual views may be displayed:
With the engine running, these systems allow –  Standard view.
views of your vehicle’s close surroundings to be –  180° view.
displayed on the touch screen using one camera –  Zoom view.
for Top Rear Vision and two cameras for 360 AUTO mode is activated by default.
vision. In this mode, the system chooses the best
The blue lines 1 indicate the general direction of
view to display (standard or zoom).
the vehicle (the gap corresponds to the width of
You can change the type of view at any time
your vehicle including the mirrors).
during a manoeuvre.
The red line 2 represents a distance of about
►  Press the button in the bottom left-hand
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
corner of the touch screen.
bumper.
►  Select the type of view:
• "Standard view".
• "180° view".

128
 Driving

• "Zoom view".
• "AUTO view".
the system is activated when the vehicle has
already moved, the view from above can be fully
AUTO mode
6
The display is immediately updated with the type displayed.
of view selected.
The system status is not saved when the ignition Top Rear Vision
is switched off.
Rear view
Operating principle

This mode is activated by default.

Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic
view changes from the rear view (standard) to
the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is
approached at the level of the red line (less than
30 cm) during a manoeuvre.
Using one or two cameras, the close
To activate the camera located near the number
surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst Standard view
plate lamps, engage reverse gear and do not
manoeuvring at low speed.
exceed a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
An image from above your vehicle in its close
The system is deactivated:
surroundings is reconstructed (represented
–  Automatically, at speeds above approximately
between the brackets) in real time and as the
12 mph (20 km/h),
manoeuvre progresses.
–  Automatically, if the boot is opened.
It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when
–  When changing out of reverse gear.
parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle
–  By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left
to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the
corner of the touch screen.
vehicle remains stationary for too long.
With 360 vision, the image is created using
both cameras, when going forward and when
reversing.
When the function is activated, it is possible The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the
that the view from above is not displayed. If screen.

129
 Driving

The blue lines 1 represent the width of your Obstacles may appear further away than This view is only available via the view selection
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction they actually are. menu.
changes according to the position of the steering It is important to monitor the sides of the
wheel. vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the 360 vision
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm mirrors. The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted in
from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 Parking sensors also provide additional the grille, and a camera at the rear, located close
represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. information about the area around the vehicle. to the number plate lamps.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the Using these cameras, the system displays the
view selection menu. vehicle's near surroundings on the touch screen,
180° view
offering views from the rear of the vehicle (rear
Zoom view vision) when reverse gear is engaged and views
from the front of the vehicle (front vision) when
the gearbox is in neutral or a gear is engaged.

Rear vision

The camera records the vehicle's surroundings

during the manoeuvre in order to create a
view from above the rear of the vehicle in its
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be The system activates automatically when
The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a
manoeuvred around nearby obstacles. reverse gear is engaged.
parking space, making it possible to see the
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the The system is deactivated:
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
view selection menu. –  Automatically, at speeds above approximately
This view is not recommended for carrying out a
complete manoeuvre. 12 mph (20 km/h),
It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C.

130
 Driving

–  when shifting out of reverse (the rear view

image is replaced by the front view image after
►  Select "Visual parking assistance".
AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front
Standard view
6
7 seconds). vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a
–  By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left gear engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is
corner of the touch screen. engaged.
The system is deactivated:
If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to
–  Automatically above about 19 mph (30 km/h)
the towball, the area behind the vehicle
(the image disappears temporarily from 12 mph
on the view from above goes dark.
(20 km/h)).
The surroundings are reconstructed by the
–  By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left
front camera only.
corner of the touch screen.
The rear vision views are similar to those for the
Top Rear Vision function.
AUTO mode
The area in front of your vehicle is displayed on
For more information on the Top Rear the screen.
Vision function, refer to the corresponding The orange lines 1 represent the width of your
section. vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction
changes according to the position of the steering
Front and rear vision
wheel.
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm
This mode is activated by default. from the front bumper; the two orange lines 3
Using sensors in the front bumper, the automatic and 4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
view changes from the front view (standard) to This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is view selection menu.
approached during a manoeuvre.

With the engine running and the speed

below 12 mph (20 km/h), the system is
activated via the Driving/Vehicle touch screen
menu:

131
 Driving

Zoom view 180° view Park Assist

For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system provides active parking assistance:

it detects a parking space and then steers in the
appropriate direction to park in the space while
the driver controls the driving direction, gear
changes, acceleration and braking.
To help the driver monitor the manoeuvre, the
system automatically triggers the display from
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
the Top Rear Vision or 360 vision function and
during the manoeuvre in order to create a
activates the parking sensors.
view from above the front of the vehicle in its
The system measures the available parking
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
spaces and calculates the distances to obstacles
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.
using ultrasonic sensors built into the front and
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the The 180° view assists with exiting from a parking
rear bumpers of the vehicle.
view selection menu. space in forward gear, making it possible to
see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and
Obstacles may appear further away than cyclists.
they actually are. This view is not recommended for carrying out a
It is important to check the sides of the complete manoeuvre.
vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right
mirrors. C.
The parking sensors also supplement the This view is available only from the view
information on the vehicle's surroundings. selection menu.
The system assists with the following
manoeuvres:
A. Entering a "parallel" parking space
B. Leaving a "parallel" parking space
C. Entering a "bay" parking space

132
 Driving

Operation
►  When approaching a parking area, reduce
A manoeuvre selection page is displayed on the
touch screen: by default, the "Entry" page if the 6
vehicle has been running since the ignition was
the speed of your vehicle to 19 mph (30 km/h)
switched on, otherwise, the "Exit" page.
or less.
►  Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to
Activating the function activate the parking space search.
The selected manoeuvre can be changed at
The function is activated in the Vehicle/
any time, even while searching for an available
Driving touch screen menu.
space.
Select "Park Assist".
This indicator lamp comes on to confirm
Activating the function deactivates the the selection.
Blind spot monitoring system.
Parking space search When the system finds an available space, "OK"
You can deactivate the function at any ►  You should drive at a distance of between is displayed on the parking view, accompanied
time until the parking space entry or exit 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked by an audible signal.
manoeuvre begins, by pressing the arrow vehicles, without ever exceeding 19 mph
(30 km/h), until the system finds an available
Preparing for the manoeuvre
located in the top left-hand corner of the
display page. space. ►  Move very slowly until the request to stop
The parking space search stops over this limit. the vehicle is displayed: "Stop the vehicle",
The function automatically deactivates once the accompanied by the "STOP" sign and an audible
Selecting the type of manoeuvre vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h). signal.
Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions
For ''parallel'' parking, the space must at page is displayed on the screen.
a minimum be equal to the length of your ►  To prepare for the manoeuvre, follow the
vehicle plus 0.60 m. instructions.
For ''bay'' parking, the width of the space The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by
must be equal to the width of your vehicle the message "Manoeuvre under way",
plus 0.70 m. accompanied by an audible signal.
Reversing is indicated by this message:
If the parking sensors function has been "Release the steering wheel, reverse".
deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle menu The Top Rear Vision or Vision 360 function
of the touch screen, it will be automatically and the parking sensors are automatically
reactivated when the system is activated.

133
 Driving

activated to help you monitor your vehicle's close manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). –  system malfunction.
surroundings during the manoeuvre. Risk of injury! –  after 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a parallel
It is the driver's responsibility to constantly parking space and after 7 manoeuvres to enter a
During the manoeuvre monitor the traffic, especially vehicles coming parking bay.
The system controls the vehicle’s steering.  It towards you. Interrupting the manoeuvre automatically
gives instructions on the manoeuvring direction The driver should check that no objects or deactivates the function.
when starting "parallel" entry and exit parking people are obstructing the vehicle’s path. The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red,
manoeuvres, and for all "bay" entry manoeuvres. accompanied by the "Manoeuvre cancelled"
These instructions are displayed as a symbol The images from the camera(s) message on the touch screen.
accompanied by a message: displayed on the touch screen may be A message prompts the driver to take back
"Reverse". distorted by the terrain. control of the vehicle.
In shady areas, or in inadequate sunlight The function is deactivated after a few
“Go forwards". or lighting conditions, the image may be seconds; this indicator lamp goes off and
darkened and with lower contrast. the function returns to the initial display.
The manoeuvring status is indicated by these
symbols: The manoeuvre can be permanently interrupted End of the parking space entry or exit
Manoeuvre in progress (green). at any time, either by the driver or automatically manoeuvre
by the system. The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is
Manoeuvre cancelled or finished (red) Interruption by the driver: completed.
(the arrows indicate that the driver must –  taking over control of the steering. The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red,
resume control of the vehicle). –  activating the direction indicator lamps on the accompanied by the message "Manoeuvre
The maximum speeds during manoeuvres are opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. completed" on the touch screen.
indicated by these symbols: –  unfastening the driver's seat belt. When the function is deactivated, this
5 mph or 7 km/h, for parking space entry. –  switching off the ignition. indicator lamp goes off, accompanied by
7 Interruption by the system: an audible signal.
3 mph or 5 km/h, for parking space exit. –  vehicle exceeding the speed limit of When entering a parking space, the driver may
5 5 mph (7 km/h) during parking space entry be required to complete the manoeuvre.
manoeuvres, or 3 mph (5 km/h) during parking
During manoeuvring phases, the steering
wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold
space exit manoeuvres. Operating limits
–  activation of anti-slip regulation on a slippery –  The system may suggest an inappropriate
the steering wheel or put your hands between
road. parking space (parking prohibited, work in
the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out
–  opening of a door or the boot. progress with damaged road surface, location
for any objects that could interfere with the
–  engine stall. alongside a ditch, etc.).

134
 Driving

–  The system may indicate that a space has

been found but will not offer it because of a fixed
If the vehicle has undergone any of the
following modifications, do not use the
In the event of a power steering
malfunction, this warning lamp is 6
obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, function: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied
which would not allow the vehicle to follow a –  When carrying an object extending beyond by a warning message.
trajectory required for parking. the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
–  The system may indicate that a space has roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
been found but the manoeuvre will not be –  With a non-approved towball in place. workshop.
triggered, because the width of the lane is –  With snow chains fitted.
insufficient. –  When driving on a small-diameter or
–  The system is not designed for performing the "space-saver" type spare wheel.
parking manoeuvre on a sharp bend. –  When the wheels fitted are a different size
–  The system does not detect spaces that from the original ones.
are much larger than the vehicle itself or that –  After modifying one or both bumpers
are delimited by obstacles that are too low (added protection).
(pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, –  If the sensors have been repainted other
wire fences, etc.). than by the CITROËN dealer network.
–  If the boot is heavily loaded, the tilt of the –  With sensors not approved for the vehicle.
vehicle towards the rear may interfere with the
distance measurements.
Malfunctions
Do not use the function under the When the function is not activated, this
following exterior conditions: indicator lamp will flash briefly and an
–  Alongside a soft shoulder (e.g. ditch) or audible signal will be emitted to indicate a
quay or on the edge of a drop. system malfunction.
–  When the road surface is slippery (e.g. ice). If the malfunction occurs while the system is in
use, the warning lamp goes off.
If any of the following malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction occurs
occurs, do not use the system: during use, indicated by this warning lamp
–  If a tyre is under-inflated. coming on and the display of a message, it
–  If one of the bumpers is damaged. causes the function to deactivate.
–  If one of the cameras is faulty. In the event of a malfunction, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.

135
prefers

FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
WITH TOTAL QUARTZ LUBRICANTS

For more than 50 years, TOTAL and CITROËN

have shared common values: excellence, creativity
and technological innovation.
It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has developed
a range of TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants adapted for
engines in CITROËN vehicles, making them ever
more fuel efficient and environmentally friendly.
TOTAL and CITROËN test the reliability and the
performance of their products under extreme
motorsport conditions.
Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants when
servicing your vehicle; they are your assurance
of optimum engine life and performance.
 Practical information

Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating

correctly. In these temperature conditions, use
and audible signal are repeated with increasing
frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0. 7
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid
more than 50 % full. running out of fuel.
Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid For more information on Running out of fuel
containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
respectively. under shelter (heated garage).
A small arrow by the warning lamp
Travelling abroad indicates which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler flap is located on.
Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s
and EN16709 standards and containing up to engine.
Stop & Start
7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester In certain countries, the use of a particular
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even fuel may be required (specific octane rating,
mode; you must switch off the ignition.
occasionally, imposes special maintenance specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct
conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". operation of the engine.
For all additional information, consult a dealer. Refuelling
When refuelling, at least 5 litres must be added
Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 Refuelling in order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
standard. Opening the filler cap may create a noise caused
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres.
by an inrush of air. This vacuum is normal,
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel Reserve level: approximately 6 litres.
caused by the sealing of the fuel system.
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk Low fuel level To refuel in complete safety:
►  Always switch off the engine.
of damage to the engine and fuel system). When the low fuel level is reached, this
warning lamp lights up on the instrument
The only fuel additives authorised for use panel, accompanied by the display of a message
are those that meet the B715001 (petrol) and an audible signal. When it first comes on,
or B715000 (Diesel) standards. about 6 litres of fuel remain.
Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp
appears every time the ignition is switched on,
Diesel at low temperature accompanied by an onscreen message and
At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the an audible signal. When driving, this message
formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel

137
 Practical information

The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, Travelling abroad

which helps to reduce the level of harmful As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
emissions in the exhaust gases. different in other countries, the presence
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded of the misfuel prevention device may make
fuel. refuelling impossible.
The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to
petrol nozzles only. check with a CITROËN dealer if the vehicle is
suitable for the distribution equipment of the
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) countries visited.
(Depending on country of sale.)
This mechanical device prevents filling the tank
of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. Charging system
►  With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear-
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention
device is visible when the filler cap is removed.
(Electric)
central part of the filler flap to open it.
►  Take care to select the pump that delivers the
correct fuel type for your vehicle's engine (see a
Operation 400 V electrical system
reminder label on the inside of the filler flap). The electric drive system, which operates at a
►  Turn the filler cap to the left, remove it and voltage of approximately 400 V, is identified by
place it on its support (on the filler flap). orange cables and its components are marked
►  Insert the filler nozzle and push it in as far as with this symbol:
possible before starting to refuel (to minimise the
risk of splashing).
Do not continue after the nozzle’s third cut-
out. Doing so may cause malfunctions. When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
►  Put the filler cap back in place and turn it to fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into
the right. contact with the flap. The system remains closed
►  Close the fuel filler flap. and prevents filling. An electric vehicle’s power train can
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type become hot during use and after
vehicle, you must have the fuel tank filler nozzle. switching off the ignition.
drained and filled with the correct fuel before Comply with the warning messages shown
The use of a fuel jerrycan to fill the tank
starting the engine. on the labels, particularly inside the charging
remains possible.
flap.

138
 Practical information

High voltage system voltage is

dangerous and can cause burns or other
Damage to the vehicle or the traction battery
could result in the leakage of toxic gases or
In the event of an accident or impact
to the vehicle’s underbody 7
injuries or even fatal electric shock. fluids either immediately or later. CITROËN In these situations, the electrical circuit or the
Since damage to high voltage components is recommends that you: traction battery can be seriously damaged.
not visible, CITROËN recommends that you: –  Always inform the fire and emergency Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch
–  Never touch the components, damaged services in the event of an incident, warning off the ignition.
or not, and never let your jewelry or other that the vehicle is equipped with a traction Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
metallic objects come into contact with these battery. workshop.
components. –  Never touch the liquids leaking from the
–  Never work on the orange high voltage traction battery. When washing
cables or on any other high voltage –  Do not inhale the gases emitted by the Before washing the vehicle, always
component marked with the Electric risk label. traction battery which are toxic. check that the charging flap is closed
Any intervention on the high voltage system –  Move away from the vehicle in the event of correctly.
must be carried out by qualified persons in incident or accident, the gases emitted being Never wash the vehicle while the battery is
workshops qualified and approved to carry flammable and could cause a fire. on charge.
out this type of work.
–  Never damage, modify or remove the
High-pressure washing
orange high voltage cables or disconnect
To avoid damaging the electrical
them from the high voltage network.
components, it is expressly prohibited to
–  Never open, modify or remove the cover of
use high-pressure washing in the engine
the traction battery.
compartment or under the body.
–  Never work with cutting and forming
Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar
tools or heat sources near high voltage
when washing the bodywork.
components and cables.
In case of low level of fluid in the cooling
Never allow water or dust to enter the
tank, the refilling shall only be performed in a This label is intended solely for use by
connector or charging nozzle - risk of
qualified and trained workshop to verify that firefighters and maintenance services in
electrocution or fire!
the leakage is not in the traction battery. the event of any work on the vehicle.
Never connect / disconnect the charging
Any intervention on the high voltage system No other person must touch the device shown
nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of
must be carried out by qualified persons in on this label.
electrocution!
workshops qualified and approved to carry
out this type of work.

139
 Practical information

Traction battery –  Avoid charging the vehicle at negative Charging connectors and
temperatures (except if the vehicle ran more
This battery stores the energy that powers
than 20 minutes) or above +30°C.
indicator lamps
the electric motor and the thermal comfort
–  Do not use the vehicle's traction battery as
equipment in the passenger compartment. It is
a generator of energy.
discharged during use, and must therefore be
–  Do not use a generator to recharge your
regularly recharged. There is no need to wait
vehicle's traction battery.
for the traction battery to fall to its reserve level
before recharging.
The range of the battery may vary according In the event of damage to the traction
to the type of driving, the route, the use of battery
thermal comfort equipment and the ageing of its It is strictly prohibited to work on the vehicle
components. yourself.
Do not touch liquids coming from the battery,
The lifespan of the traction battery and in the event of skin contact with these
depends on multiple factors, such as products, wash abundantly with water and
climatic conditions, distance travelled and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
how often it has been fast-charged. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified 1. Charging connectors
workshop to have the system checked. 2. Deferred charging activation button
To preserve the mileage of your vehicle 3. Nozzle locking indicator lamp
and the durability of your traction battery, Fixed red: nozzle positioned correctly and
CITROËN recommends that you:
Disposal of the traction battery locked in the connector.
–  Do not fully charge the battery of your The traction battery is designed for the life of the Flashing red: nozzle incorrectly positioned or
electric vehicle daily (charge the traction vehicle if the recommendations of CITROËN are locking not possible.
battery below 80% as often as possible). followed. 4. Charging indicator lamp
–  Do not completely discharge the battery. If it becomes necessary to replace the battery,
–  Do not store the vehicle for a long period contact the CITROËN dealer for instructions on
of non-use (more than 12 hours) when the its disposal. Improper disposal carries the risk of
traction battery has a low or high charge level. severe burns, electric shock, and damage to the
Prefer a charge level between 20 and 40%. environment.
–  Limit the use of fast charging. In accordance with regulations, CITROËN
–  Do not expose the vehicle to temperatures ensures a second life or recycling of this
below -30°C and above +60°C for more than component in collaboration with qualified
24 hours. operators.

140
 Practical information

State of charging
indicator lamp
Meaning State of charging
indicator lamp
Meaning
Identification labels on charging
sockets/connectors
7
Identification labels are affixed to the vehicle,
Fixed white Welcome lighting on Fixed red Malfunction. charging cable and charger to inform the user
opening the flap and about which device needs to be used.
disconnecting the In case of impact, even light, against the
charging cable. charging flap, do not use it.
Do not dismantle or modify the charging
Fixed blue Deferred charging.
connector - risk of electrocution and/or fire!
Flashing green Charging. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Fixed green Charging complete. workshop.
The charging
indicator lamp goes
Charging cables, sockets
off after about 2
minutes as the and chargers
vehicle's functions go The charging cable supplied with the vehicle
into standby. (depending on version) is compatible with the
The indicator lamp electrical systems in the country of sale. When
The meaning of each identification label is as
comes on again travelling abroad, check the compatibility of local
follows:
when the vehicle is electrical systems with the charging cable.
unlocked with the A full range of charging cables is available from
Keyless Entry and your dealer.
Start system or when Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
a door is opened workshop for more information and to obtain
to indicate that suitable charging cables.
the battery is fully
charged.

Identification label Location Configuration Power type/Voltage range

Charging connector (vehicle side) TYPE 2 AC
C < 480 Vrms

141
 Practical information

Identification label Location Configuration Power type/Voltage range

Charging socket (charger side) TYPE 2 AC
C < 480 Vrms

Charging connector (vehicle side) COMBO 2 (FF) DC

K 50 V – 500 V

Standard charging, mode 2 Specific domestic charging cable - mode Control unit (mode 2)
2 (AC)
Domestic socket
(standard charging - alternating current (AC))

Mode 2 with a standard socket: 8 A maximum

charging current.
Identification label C on the charging
connector (vehicle side).
POWER
Specific domestic charging cable Green: electrical connection established;
(mode 2) charging can begin.
Mode 2 with a Green'Up socket: 16 A You must not damage the cable. CHARGE
maximum charging current. In the event of damage, do not use it and Flashing green: charging in progress or
To have this type of socket installed, call a contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified temperature pre-conditioning activated.
professional installer. workshop to replace it. Fixed green: charging complete.
FAULT
Red: fault; charging not permitted or must
be stopped immediately. Check that everything

142
 Practical information

is connected correctly and that the electrical

system is not faulty.
2. Always use a correctly earthed power
socket, protected by a 30 mA residual
11. This charging cable includes components
liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks.
7
If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a current device. Do not expose to flammable vapours.
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. 3. Always use an electrical socket protected 12. Only use this charging cable with CITROËN
Upon plugging the charging cable into a by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the vehicles.
domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come electrical circuit’s current rating. 13. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or
on briefly. 4. The weight of the control unit must not be unplug it) with wet hands.
If no indicator lamps come on, check the borne by the electrical socket, plug and 14. Do not force the connector if it is locked into
domestic socket's circuit-breaker: cables. the vehicle.
–  If the circuit-breaker has tripped, contact a 5. Never use this charging cable if it is
professional to check that the electrical system defective or in any way damaged. Control unit label - State of indicator
is compatible and/or carry out any necessary 6. Never attempt to repair or open this lamps
repairs. charging cable. It contains no repairable
–  If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, stop State of the
parts - replace the charging cable if it is
using the charging cable and contact a indicator lamp
damaged.
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. 7. Never immerse this charging cable in water. Off
Control unit label - Recommendations 8. Never use this charging cable with an
Refer to the handbook before use. extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a
conversion adaptor or on a damaged On
electrical socket.
9. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a
 

means of stopping charging. Flashing

10. Immediately stop charging, by locking and  

then unlocking the vehicle using the remote

1. Incorrect use of this charging cable may control key, if the charging cable or wall
result in fire, property damage and serious socket feel burning hot to the touch.
injury or death by electrocution!

POWER CHARGE FAULT Symbol Description

Not connected to the power supply or power is not
available from the infrastructure.

143
 Practical information

POWER CHARGE FAULT Symbol Description

The control unit is currently performing a self-test.

(green) (green) (red)

Connected only to the infrastructure or to the
infrastructure and to the Electric Vehicle (EV) but
no charging in progress.
(green)
Connected to the power supply and to the Electric
Vehicle (EV).
The EV is on charge or in a temperature pre-
(green) (green)
conditioning sequence.

Connected to the power supply and to the Electric

Vehicle (EV).
The EV is waiting for charging or the charging of
(green) (green)
the EV is completed.

Control unit malfunction. No charging allowed.

If an error indicator reappears after a manual reset,
the control unit must be checked by a CITROËN
(red)
dealer before the next charge.

The control unit is in diagnostic mode.

(green) (green) (red)

Manual reset procedure
The control unit can be reset by simultaneously disconnecting the charging connector and the wall socket.
Then, reconnect the wall socket first. For more information, refer to the handbook.

144
 Practical information

Accelerated charging, mode 3

Accelerated charging unit (depending on
Charging cable, mode 3 (AC)
Superfast charging, mode 4
Fast public charger
7
version) (superfast charging - direct current (DC))
(accelerated charging - single-phase or three-
phase alternating current (AC))

In mode 3 with an accelerated charging unit:

32 A maximum charging current.
Charging cable, mode 4 (DC)
(integrated into the fast public charger)
Identification labels C on the charging
connector (vehicle side) and on the socket
(charger side).

Accelerated charging unit

In mode 3 with an accelerated charging unit Do not disassemble or modify the
(Wallbox): 32 A maximum charging current. Identification label K on the charging
charging unit - risk of electrocution and/or fire!
connector (vehicle side).
Refer to the charging unit manufacturer's user
Only use fast public chargers where the cable
manual for the operating instructions.
length does not exceed 30 metres.

Charging the traction

battery (Electric)
To recharge, connect the vehicle to a domestic
electricity supply (domestic or accelerated
charging) or to a fast public charger (superfast
charging).

145
 Practical information

For a full charge, follow the desired charging accidents or serious injuries. ALWAYS make about every 3 months in order to recharge the
procedure without pausing it, until it ends sure the traction battery has a sufficient accessory battery and maintain an operating
automatically. Charging can be either immediate charge level. voltage.
or deferred (except fast public charger, mode 4).
You can stop domestic or accelerated charging
at any time by unlocking the vehicle and
Low load / Parking
If the outside temperature is negative,
Precautions
removing the nozzle. For superfast charging, Our electric vehicles have been developed in
it is recommended not to park your vehicle
refer to the fast public charger. accordance with the recommendations on the
outside for several hours at a low load (less
For more information on the charging displays maximum limits for electromagnetic fields, as
than 20%).
on the Instrument panel and the Touch screen, issued by the International Commission on Non-
refer to the corresponding section. Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP - 1998
Vehicle in storage for more than
Guidelines).
It is also possible to monitor the charging 1 month
In the event of a long period of non-use of Wearers of pacemakers or equivalent
progress using the MyCitroën App
the vehicle (beyond 4 weeks) without the devices
application.
For more information on Remote functions, possibility of charging when restarting, the Ask your doctor about what precautions
refer to the corresponding section. self-discharge may make it impossible to you should take, or ask the manufacturer
restart if the traction battery charge level of your implanted electro-medical device about
As a safety measure, the engine will not is a low or very low, especially at negative whether its operation is guaranteed in an
start if the charging cable is plugged into ambient temperatures. ALWAYS make sure environment which complies with the ICNIRP
the connector on the vehicle. A warning is that the traction battery has a charge between recommendations.
displayed on the instrument panel. 20% and 40% if you do not plan to use your
If in doubt
vehicle for several weeks.
Domestic or accelerated charging: do
Do not connect the charging cable.
Cooling the traction battery not remain inside or near the vehicle, or near
Always park the vehicle in a place with
The cooling fan in the engine the charging cable or charging unit, even for
temperatures between -10°C and 30°C
compartment comes on during charging to a short time.
(parking in a place with extreme temperatures
cool the on-board charger and the traction Superfast charging: do not use the system
can damage the traction battery).
battery. yourself and avoid approaching public fast
Disconnect the cable from the (+) terminal
charging points. Leave the area and ask a
of the accessory battery in the engine
Low load / Driving third party to recharge the vehicle.
compartment.
Driving when the charge level of the Connect a 12 V battery charger to the (+)
traction battery is too low can lead to the and (-) terminals of the accessory battery
vehicle breaking down and can lead to

146
 Practical information

For domestic or accelerated charging

Before charging
Do not leave the cable connected to the
domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit
Domestic charging, mode 2
7
or electrocution in the event of contact with or
Depending on the context: immersion in water!
►  Have a professional check that the
electrical system to be used complies with
applicable standards and is compatible with For superfast charging
the vehicle.
Before charging
►  Have a professional electrician install
Check that the fast public charging
a dedicated domestic power socket or
station and its charging cable are compatible
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)
with the vehicle.
compatible with the vehicle.
If the exterior temperature is below:
You should preferably use the charging cable
–  0°C, charging times may be extended.
available as an accessory.
–  -20°C, charging is still possible, but
For more information, contact a CITROËN
charging times may be extended even further ►  Connect the charging cable from the control
dealer or a qualified workshop.
(the battery has to be heated first). unit to the domestic socket.
When the connection is made, all of the indicator
During charging lamps on the control unit light up, then only the
After charging
While charging is in progress, unlocking POWER indicator lamp remains on in green.
Check that the charging flap is closed.
the vehicle will cause the charging to stop. ►  Remove the protective cover from the
If no action is taken on one of the openings charging nozzle.
(door or boot) or on the charging nozzle, the Connection ►  Insert the nozzle into the charging connector.
vehicle will lock again after 30 seconds and ►  Before charging, check that the drive selector The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing
charging will resume automatically. is in mode P, otherwise charging is not possible. green CHARGE indicator lamps in the flap, then
Never work under the bonnet: ►  Open the charging flap by pressing the those on the control unit.
–  Some areas remain very hot, even an hour push-button, and check that there are no foreign If this is not the case, charging has not
after charging ends - risk of burns! bodies on the charging connector. started; restart the procedure, ensuring that all
–  The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts connections are properly established.
or strangulation! The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
After charging
When charging is complete and while the
Check that the charging flap is closed.
charging cable is still connected, opening

147
 Practical information

the driver's door will display the charge level ►  Follow the instructions for use of the fast ►  Press OK.
on the instrument panel for about 20 seconds. public charger and connect the cable from the The setting is saved in the system.
fast public charger to the vehicle's connector. Activation
Accelerated charging, mode 3 The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing
green charging indicator lamp in the flap. Deferred charging is only possible with
If this is not the case, charging has not started; modes 2 and 3.
restart the procedure, ensuring that the
connection is properly established. ►  After programming the deferred charging,
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to connect your vehicle to the desired charging
indicate that the nozzle is locked. equipment.

►  Follow the accelerated charging unit Deferred charging

(Wallbox) user instructions.
Settings
►  Remove the protective cover from the
charging nozzle. At a CITROËN dealer or qualified
►  Insert the nozzle into the charging connector. workshop, with touch screen BLUETOOTH ►  Press this button in the flap within one
The start of charging is confirmed when the audio system minute to activate the system (confirmed by the
charging indicator lamp in the flap flashes green. By default, the deferred charging start time is set charging indicator lamp coming on in blue).
If this is not the case, charging has not started; to midnight (vehicle time).
restart the procedure, ensuring that the You can have the deferred charging start time Disconnection
connection has been properly established. modified.
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
On a smartphone or tablet
Superfast charging, mode 4
You can programme the deferred
charging function at any time via the
MyCitroën App application. Before disconnecting the nozzle from the
For more information on Remote functions, charging connector:
refer to the corresponding section. ►  If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then
unlock it.
In the vehicle, with 10-inch touch screen
►  If the vehicle is locked, unlock it.
►  In the Energy touch screen menu, The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to
►  Depending on version, remove the protective select the Charge page. confirm that the charging nozzle is unlocked.
cover from the lower part of the connector. ►  Set the charging start time.

148
 Practical information

►  Within 30 seconds, remove the charging

nozzle.
►  You can also pause charging by
pressing this button in the flap (in mode 4
recommend having them fitted by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop. 7
The charging indicator lamp comes on in white. only). If not fitted by a CITROËN dealer, they must
►  Hang up the nozzle on the charger. still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle
With selective door unlocking activated,
►  Depending on version, replace the protective manufacturer's instructions.
press the unlocking button twice to
cover on the lower section and close the Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions
disconnect the charging nozzle.
charging flap. are automatically deactivated while an
approved towing system is in use.
When charging is complete, the green When the charging nozzle is
For more information about driving with a
charging indicator lamp in the flap goes disconnected, a message on the
towing device fitted to a trailer and associated
out after about 2 minutes. instrument panel indicates that charging is
with the Trailer stability assist, refer to the
complete, even if the charging nozzle was
corresponding section.
Domestic charging, mode 2 disconnected before full charging was
completed.
The end of charging is confirmed when the green Comply with the maximum authorised
CHARGE indicator lamp on the control unit and towable weight, as indicated on your
the green charging indicator lamp in the flap
come on fixed. Towing device vehicle's registration certificate, on the
manufacturer's label and in the Technical
►  Replace the protective cover on the charging Load distribution data section of this guide.
nozzle and close the charging flap. ►  Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
►  Disconnect the control unit end of the heaviest items are as close as possible to the If using accessories attached to the
charging cable from the domestic socket. axle, and the nose weight approaches the towing device (e.g. bicycle carriers, tow
Accelerated charging, mode 3 maximum permitted without exceeding it. boxes):
Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing –  Comply with the maximum authorised nose
The end of charging is indicated by the charging
engine performance. The maximum towable load weight.
control unit and by the fixed lighting of the green
must be reduced by 10% per 1,000 metres of –  Do not transport more than 3 bicycles.
indicator lamp in the flap.
altitude. When loading bicycles on to a bicycle carrier
►  Hang up the nozzle on the charging unit and
close the charging flap. Use genuine towing devices and wiring over the towball, be sure to place the heaviest
Superfast charging, mode 4 harnesses approved by CITROËN. We bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.

The end of charging is indicated by the charger

Observe the legislation in force in the
and by the fixed lighting of the green indicator
country where you are driving.
lamp in the flap.

149
 Practical information

Electric motor 8. Label to note the key references Before each use
An electric vehicle cannot under any Verify that the towball is correctly fitted,
circumstances be fitted with a towing device. checking the follow points:
It is therefore not possible to tow a trailer or –  The green mark on the wheel is in line with
caravan. the green mark on the towball.
–  The wheel is in contact with the towball
(position A).
Towing device with quickly –  The security key lock is closed and the
key removed; the wheel can no longer be
detachable towball operated.
–  The towball must not be able to move in
Presentation its carrier; test by attempting to shake it with
No tools are required to install or remove this your hand.
genuine towing device. A. Locked position (the green marks are If the towball is not locked, the trailer can
opposite each other); the wheel is in contact become detached - risk of an accident!
with the towball (no gap).
B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite During use
the green mark); the wheel is no longer Never release the locking system with a
in contact with the towball (gap of around trailer or load carrier on the towball.
5 mm). Never exceed the maximum authorised
weight for the vehicle - the Gross Train
Affix the enclosed label in a clearly visible Weight or GTW.
location, close to the carrier or in the Always comply with the maximum authorised
boot. load on the towing device: if it is exceeded,
this device may become detached from the
1. Carrier Trailers with LED lamps are not vehicle - risk of an accident!
2. Protective plug compatible with the wiring harness of this Before driving, check the headlamp height
3. Connection socket device. adjustment and check that the lamps on the
4. Safety eye trailer operate correctly.
5. Detachable towball To ensure complete safety while driving For more information on Headlamp height
6. Locking/unlocking wheel with a Towing device, refer to the adjustment, refer to the corresponding
7. Security key lock corresponding section. section.

150
 Practical information

After use
When travelling without a trailer or 7
load carrier, remove the towball and fit the
protective plug into the carrier, to provide
clear visibility of the number plate and/or its
lighting.

Fitting the towball

►  The wheel 6 rotates a quarter turn anti- ►  Remove the protective cover from the
clockwise; take care to keep your hands clear! towball.
►  Attach the trailer to the towball.
►  Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety
eye 4 on the carrier.
►  Lower the connection socket 3 to put it in
position.
►  Insert the trailer plug and rotate it by a
quarter turn to connect it to the connection
socket 3 on the carrier.
►  Below the rear bumper, remove the protective
plug 2 from the carrier 1.
Removing the towball
►  Insert the end of the towball 5 into the carrier
►  Grasp the trailer's plug, perform a quarter
1 and push it upwards; it will lock into position
►  Check that the mechanism has correctly turn and pull to disconnect it from the connection
automatically.
locked into place (position A). socket 3 on the carrier.
►  Close the lock 7 using the key. ►  Lift the connection socket 3 to the right to
►  Remove the key. The key cannot be removed stow it away.
while the lock is open. ►  Detach the trailer's safety cable from the
►  Clip the cap onto the lock. safety eye 4 on the carrier.
►  Unhitch the trailer from the towball.
►  Replace the protective cover over the towball.

151
 Practical information

►  Remove the cap from the lock and press it

onto the head of the key.
►  Release the wheel; it automatically locks in
the unlocked position (position B).
Roof bars
As a safety measure and to avoid
damaging the roof, it is essential to use
transverse roof bars approved for your
vehicle.
Observe the instructions on fitting and use
contained in the guide supplied with the roof
bars.

Maximum load distributed over the

transverse roof bars, for a loading height
not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle carrier):
►  Insert the key into the lock 7. ►  Replace the protective plug 2 into the 80 kg.
►  Open the lock using the key. carrier 1. As this value may change, please verify the
►  Stow the towball in its bag to protect it from maximum load quoted in the guide supplied
knocks and dirt. with the roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed
Maintenance of the vehicle to the profile of the road to
Correct operation is only possible if the towball avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings
and its carrier are kept clean. on the vehicle.
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure Be sure to refer to national legislation in order
jet wash, the towball must be removed and the to comply with the regulations for transporting
protective plug fitted to the carrier. objects that are longer than the vehicle.

Work on the towing device

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Recommendations
►  Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using workshop. Distribute the load uniformly, taking care
the other hand, pull and turn the wheel 6 fully in to avoid overloading one of the sides.
a clockwise direction until it stops; do not release Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close
the wheel. as possible to the roof.
►  Extract the towball from the base of its Secure the load firmly.
carrier 1.

152
 Practical information

Drive gently: the vehicle will be more

susceptible to the effects of side winds and its
The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be
inserted into the opening of each anchorage
Installation tips
►  To fit the snow chains during a journey, stop
7
stability may be affected. point.
the vehicle on a flat surface at the side of the
Regularly check the security and tight
road.
fastening of the roof bars, at least before each
trip.
Snow chains ►  Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent
Remove the roof bars once they are no longer In wintry conditions, snow chains improve
movement of the vehicle.
needed. traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle
►  Fit the snow chains following the instructions
when braking.
provided by the manufacturer.
Sunroof Snow chains must be fitted only to the ►  Move off gently and drive for a few moments,
Check that the load does not pass below front wheels. They must never be fitted to without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h).
the roof bars so that it does not impede the "space-saver" type spare wheels. ►  Stop the vehicle and check that the snow
movements of the sunroof - risk of major chains are correctly tightened.
damage!
Observe the legislation in force in your It is strongly recommended that you
country relating to the use of snow practise fitting the snow chains on a level
Direct fitting on roof chains and maximum authorised speeds. and dry surface before setting off.
Use only chains designed to be fitted to the type
of wheel fitted to the vehicle: Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow to avoid
Original tyre size Chain type damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road
215/65 R16 Polaire XP9 120 (9 surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy
mm) wheels, check that no part of the chain or its
fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
215/60 R17 Polaire XP9 120 (9
mm)
195/60 R18 Polaire PSS 112 (10
mm)
Energy economy mode
This system manages the duration of use of
The transverse bars must only be fixed at the For more information on snow chains, contact a certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient
four anchorage points located on the roof frame. dealer or a qualified workshop. level of charge in the battery with the ignition off.
These points are concealed by the vehicle doors After switching off the engine and for a maximum
when the doors are closed. cumulative period of around 30 minutes, you can

153
 Practical information

continue to use functions such as the audio and

telematics system, dipped beam headlamps or
Load reduction mode instrument panel and disconnect the charging
nozzle if it is plugged in.
courtesy lamps. This system manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
Selecting the mode remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
A confirmation message is displayed when
reduction function temporarily deactivates certain
energy economy mode is entered, and the active
functions, such as the air conditioning and the
functions are placed on standby.
heated rear screen. The location of the interior bonnet
If a telephone call is in progress at the The deactivated functions are reactivated release lever prevents the bonnet being
time, it will be maintained for around 10 automatically as soon as conditions permit. opened when the left-hand front door is
minutes via the audio system’s hands-free closed.
system.
Bonnet
When the engine is hot, handle the
Exiting the mode Stop & Start exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay
These functions are automatically reactivated the Before doing anything under the bonnet, with care (risk of burns), using the protected
next time the vehicle is used. you must switch off the ignition to avoid any area.
To restore the use of these functions risk of injury resulting from an automatic When the bonnet is open, take care not to
immediately, start the engine and let it run: change to START mode. damage the safety catch.
–  For less than 10 minutes, to use the Do not open the bonnet under very windy
equipment for approximately 5 minutes. conditions.
–  For more than 10 minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately 30 minutes. Cooling of the engine when stopped
Let the engine run for the specified duration to The engine cooling fan may start after
Electric motor the engine has been switched off.
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Take care with objects or clothing that Take care with objects or clothing that
To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or
could be caught in the blades of the cooling could be caught in the blades of the fan!
continuously restarting the engine.
fan or in certain moving components - risk of
A flat battery prevents the engine from strangulation and serious injury!
starting. Before carrying out any work under the Opening
For more information on the 12 V battery/ bonnet, you must switch off the ignition, check ►  Open the left-hand front door.
Accessories battery/, refer to the that the READY indicator lamp is off on the
corresponding section.

154
 Practical information

►  Lower the bonnet and release it near the end

of its travel.
Diesel engine
7
►  Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked
correctly.

Because of the presence of electrical

equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly
recommended that exposure to water (rain,
washing, etc.) be limited.

1. Screenwash fluid reservoir

►  Pull the interior release lever, located at the
bottom of the door frame, towards you. Engine compartment 2. Engine coolant reservoir
The engine shown here is an example for 3. Brake fluid reservoir
illustrative purposes only. 4. Battery/Fuses
The locations of the following elements may 5. Fusebox
vary: 6. Air filter
–  Air filter. 7. Engine oil filler cap
–  Engine oil dipstick. 8. Engine oil dipstick
–  Engine oil filler cap.
Diesel fuel system
Petrol engine
This system is under very high pressure.
All work must be carried out only by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
►  Lift the exterior safety catch and raise the
bonnet.
►  Unclip the stay from its housing and place it
in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.

Closing
►  Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the
support slot.
►  Clip the stay in its housing.

155
 Practical information

Electric motor The fluids must comply with the It is normal to top up the oil level between two
manufacturer's requirements and with services (or oil changes). It is recommended
the vehicle's engine. that you check the level, and top up if necessary,
every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).
Take care when working under the In order to maintain the reliability of the
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine engine and emissions control system,
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the never use additives in the engine oil.
cooling fan could start at any time (even with
the ignition off).
Checking using the dipstick
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir For the location of the dipstick, please refer
2. Engine coolant reservoir (level only) Used products
to the illustration of the corresponding engine
3. Brake fluid reservoir compartment.
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
4. Battery/Fuses ►  Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and
fluids with the skin.
5. Fusebox pull it out completely.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health and
6. 400 V electrical circuit ►  Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean,
very corrosive.
7. Emergency circuit-breaker for emergency lint-free cloth.
services and maintenance technicians
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
For more information on the Charging system sewers or onto the ground.
(Electric), refer to the corresponding section. Empty used oil into the containers reserved
for this purpose at a CITROËN dealer or a
Checking levels qualified workshop.

Check all of the following levels regularly in

accordance with the manufacturer's service Engine oil ►  Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down,
then pull it out again to visually check the oil
schedule. Top them up if required, unless The level is checked, with the engine
level: the correct level is between marks A (max)
otherwise indicated. having been switched off for at least 30
and B (min).
If a level drops significantly, have the minutes and on level ground, either using the oil
Do not start the engine if the level is:
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN level indicator in the instrument panel when the
–  above mark A: contact a CITROËN dealer or a
dealer or a qualified workshop. ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped
qualified workshop.
with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick.
–  below mark B: top up the engine oil
immediately.

156
 Practical information

Oil grade
Before topping up or changing the
To know how often the brake fluid should be
replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing
(Electric)

Do not top up the coolant.

7
engine oil, check that the oil is suitable schedule.
for your engine and complies with the
Clean the cap before removing it to refill.
recommendations in the service schedule
Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed
supplied with the vehicle (or available from
container.
your CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop).
Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate
your warranty in the event of engine failure. Engine coolant If the level is close to or below
(Petrol or Diesel) the "MIN" mark, it is essential to contact a
Topping up the engine oil level It is normal to top up this fluid between CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please two services.
refer to the corresponding engine compartment
illustration.
The check and top-up must only be done with Screenwash fluid
the engine cold.
►  Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills Top up to the required level when
A level of coolant that is too low risks causing
on engine components (risk of fire). necessary.
major damage to the engine; the coolant level
►  Wait a few minutes before checking the level must be close to the "MAX" mark without ever Fluid specification
again using the dipstick. going above it.
►  Top up the level if necessary. The fluid must be topped up with a pre-mixed
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, it
►  After checking the level, carefully screw the product.
is essential to top it up.
oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in In winter (temperatures below zero), a fluid
When the engine is hot, the temperature of the
its tube. containing an anti-freeze agent which is
coolant is regulated by the fan.
appropriate for the temperature conditions
The oil level indication displayed on the As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at
must be used in order to protect the system's
instrument panel when the ignition is least one hour after switching off the engine
components (pump, tank, ducts, jets).
switched on is not valid for 30 minutes before carrying out any work.
following an addition of oil. In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need Filling with pure water is prohibited in all
to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around circumstances (risk of freezing,
the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to limescale, etc.).
Brake fluid allow the pressure to drop.
The level of this fluid should be close to Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap
the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake and top up to the required level.
pads for wear.

157
 Practical information

AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 12 V battery Air filter

An alert is triggered when the reserve level is The battery does not require any Depending on the environment and the
reached. maintenance. use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere,
For more information on the Indicators and in Check regularly that the terminals are correctly city driving), change it twice as often, if
particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to tightened (versions without quick-release necessary.
the corresponding section. terminals) and that the connections are clean.
To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in Oil filter
For more information on the precautions
accordance with regulations, you must top up the Change the oil filter each time the engine
to take before any work on the 12 V
AdBlue tank. oil is changed.
battery, refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi),
and in particular the supply of AdBlue, refer to Particle filter (Diesel)
the corresponding section. Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
The start of clogging of the particle filter is
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
indicated by the temporary lighting of this
specific technology and specification.
Checks Its replacement should be carried out only by
warning lamp, accompanied by an alert
message.
Unless otherwise indicated, check these a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
components in accordance with the regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
manufacturer's service schedule and according
to your engine.
Passenger compartment least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN filter
dealer or a qualified workshop. Depending on the environment and the Following prolonged operation of the
use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you
Only use products recommended by may, in exceptional circumstances, notice
city driving), change it twice as often, if
CITROËN or products of equivalent water vapour coming from the exhaust while
necessary.
quality and specification. accelerating. These emissions have no
In order to optimise the operation of A clogged passenger compartment filter impact on the vehicle’s behaviour and the
components as important as those in the can adversely affect air conditioning environment.
braking system, CITROËN selects and offers system performance and generate
very specific products. undesirable odours.
New vehicle
During the first few particle filter
regeneration operations, you may notice a
"burning" smell. This is perfectly normal.

158
 Practical information

Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
necessary to have the condition of the brakes
checked, even between vehicle services.
Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the
braking and road holding performance of the 7
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the vehicle. Regularly check the condition of the
maintenance (no oil change).
brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads tyres (tread and sidewalls) and rims as well as
Automatic gearbox are worn. the presence of the valve caps.
When the wear indicators no longer appear set
The gearbox does not require any After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in
back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is
maintenance (no oil change). wintry conditions, ice can form on the
less than 1.6 mm; replace the tyres as soon as
brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may
Manual parking brake be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and
possible.
Using different size wheels and tyres from those
If you notice excessive brake lever travel defrost them.
specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel
or decreased effectiveness, the parking
rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer
brake must be adjusted, even between two
services.
Brake disc/drum wear reading and have an adverse effect on road
For any information on checking brake holding.
This system must be checked by a CITROËN
disc/drum wear, contact a CITROËN Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles
dealer or a qualified workshop.
dealer or a qualified workshop. can cause the ESC to mistime.
Always mark the direction of rotation on the tyres
Electric parking brake
This system does not require any routine
Wheels and tyres that will be stored when fitting winter or summer
tyres. Store them in a cool, dry place and away
servicing. However, in the event of a The inflation pressure of all tyres,
from direct exposure to the sun's rays.
problem, do not hesitate to have the system including the spare wheel, must be
Winter or 4-seasons tyres can be
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified checked on "cold” tyres.
identified by this symbol on their
workshop. The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure
sidewalls.
label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven
For more information on the Electric for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles
parking brake, refer to the (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add
Shock absorbers
corresponding section. 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the It is not easy for drivers to detect when
label. shock absorbers are worn. Nevertheless,
the shock absorbers have a major impact on
Brake pads Under-inflation increases energy road holding and braking performance.
Brake wear depends on the style of consumption. Non-compliant tyre For your safety and driving comfort, it is
driving, particularly in the case of vehicles pressures cause tyres to wear prematurely important to have them regularly checked by a
used in town, over short distances. It may be and have an adverse effect on the vehicle's CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
road holding - risk of accident!

159
 Practical information

Timing and accessory kits may vary considerably depending on your The SCR system includes a heater for the
driving style. AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving
The timing and accessory kits are used
An alert system is triggered once the reserve in very cold conditions.
from the time the engine is started until it
level is reached: it is then possible to drive for a
is switched off. It is normal for them to wear over
further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is
time.
empty and the vehicle is immobilised.
Supply of AdBlue®
A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage
It is recommended that the AdBlue® be topped
the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the For more information on the Warning up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating
recommended replacement frequency, stated in and indicator lamps and the associated that the reserve level has been reached.
distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever is alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the
reached first. corresponding sections. For the correct operation of the SCR
system:

AdBlue® (BlueHDi) Once the AdBlue® tank is empty, a device

–  Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO
22241 standard.
required by law prevents the engine from
To respect the environment and ensure –  Never transfer AdBlue® to another container
being restarted.
compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without as it would lose its purity.
If the SCR system is faulty, the level of
adversely affecting the performance or fuel –  Never dilute AdBlue® with water.
emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet
consumption of its Diesel engines, CITROËN
the Euro 6 standard and the vehicle starts You can obtain AdBlue® from a CITROËN dealer
has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with
polluting the environment. or a qualified workshop, as well as service
a system that combines SCR (Selective Catalytic
In the event of a confirmed SCR system stations equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially
Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter (DPF) for
malfunction, it is essential to visit a CITROËN designed for passenger vehicles.
the treatment of exhaust gases.
dealer or a qualified workshop. After 685

SCR system miles (1,100 km), a device is automatically Recommendations on storage

activated to prevent the engine from starting. AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates
Using a liquid called AdBlue that contains
®
In both cases, a range indicator indicates above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a
urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of the distance that can be travelled before the cool area and protected from direct sunlight.
the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and vehicle is stopped. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for
water, which are harmless to health and the
at least a year.
environment.
Freezing of the AdBlue® If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has
The AdBlue® is contained in a special
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below completely thawed out at room temperature.
tank holding about 15 litres.
around -11°C.
Its capacity allows a driving range of Never store AdBlue® containers in your
approximately 4,000 miles (6,500 km), which vehicle.

160
 Practical information

Precautions for use

AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This fluid is
Never pour the AdBlue® into the Diesel
fuel tank. 7
non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when
kept in a cool place). If any AdBlue® is splashed, or if there are
In the event of contact with the skin, wash the any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
affected area with soap and running water. In the immediately with cold water or wipe with a
event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse damp cloth.
the eyes with large amounts of water or with an If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a
eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek sponge and hot water. ►  Turn the blue cap of the AdBlue® tank anti-
medical attention if you feel a persistent burning clockwise and remove it.
sensation or irritation. Important: in the event of a top-up after ►  With a container of AdBlue®: after checking
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth a breakdown because of a lack of the expiry date, read the instructions on the
with clean water and then drink plenty of water. AdBlue, it is essential to wait around 5 label carefully before pouring the contents of the
In certain conditions (high temperature, for minutes before switching on the ignition, container into the vehicle's AdBlue tank.
example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot without opening the driver’s door, ►  With an AdBlue® pump: insert the nozzle and
be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia unlocking the vehicle, inserting the key fill the tank until the nozzle automatically cuts
vapours have an irritant effect on mucous into the ignition switch, or bringing the out.
membranes (eyes, nose and throat). key for the "Keyless Entry and Start"
In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank:
Store AdBlue® out of the reach of system into the passenger compartment.
–  Add between 10 and 13 litres using
children, in its original container. Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10
AdBlue® containers.
seconds before starting the engine.
–  Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut-
Procedure ►  Switch off the ignition and remove the key out, if you are refilling at a service station.
from the switch to switch off the engine. The system only registers AdBlue® top-ups of
Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that
or 5 litres or more.
the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature ►  With Keyless Entry and Start, press the
of the vehicle is above -11°C. Otherwise the "START/STOP" button to switch off the engine. If the AdBlue® tank is completely empty
AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured – which is confirmed by the message
into the tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible" – it is
for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried essential to add at least 5 litres.
out.

161
 Practical information

Changing to free-wheeling ►  Release the brake pedal, then switch off the
ignition.
to lock the doors and, depending on version,
move the electronic key away.
In certain situations, it is necessary to put the When using a pressure washer, keep the jet
vehicle into free-wheeling mode (e.g. towing, on A message is displayed on the
nozzle at a minimum distance of 30 cm from
a rolling road, automatic car wash (Wash mode), instrument panel to confirm the unlocking
the vehicle (particularly when cleaning areas
rail or sea transport). of the wheels for 15 minutes.
containing chipped paint, sensors or seals).
The procedure varies according to the type of Promptly clean up any stains containing
gearbox and parking brake. After 15 minutes or reverting to normal
chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's
operation
Never leave the vehicle unattended with paintwork (including tree resin, bird
►  While depressing the brake pedal, restart the droppings, insect secretions, pollen and tar).
the vehicle into free-wheeling mode.
engine and select mode P. Depending on the environment, clean the
vehicle frequently to remove salty deposits
Keyless Entry and Start
You must not depress the brake pedal Advice on care and (in coastal areas), soot (in industrial areas)
and mud/salts (in wet or cold areas). These
while switching the ignition on again, then
switching it off. If you do, the engine will start,
maintenance substances can be highly corrosive.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
requiring you to restart the procedure.
General recommendations workshop for advice on removing stubborn
Observe the following recommendations to avoid stains requiring special products (such as tar
or insect removers).
/

damaging the vehicle.

Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed
Release procedure Exterior
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
►  With the vehicle stationary and the engine workshop.
Never use a high-pressure jet wash in
running, depress the brake pedal and select
the engine compartment - risk of
mode N. Interior
damaging the electrical components!
Within 5 seconds:
Do not wash the vehicle in bright sunshine or
►  Depress and hold the brake pedal, then When washing the vehicle, never use a
extremely cold conditions.
observe this order: switch off the engine and water hose or high-pressure jet to clean
move the push selector forwards or backwards. the interior.
►  Release the brake pedal, then switch on the When washing the vehicle in an Liquids carried in cups or other open
ignition. automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure containers can spill, presenting a risk of
►  Place your foot on the brake and press the damage to the instruments and controls and
electric parking brake control to release it. the controls located on the centre console. Be
vigilant!

162
 Practical information

To clean instrument panels, touch screens

or other displays, wipe gently with a soft,
Use a high-flow hose (temperature
between 25°C and 40°C).
Act quickly by reducing the stain from its
edges inwards. 7
dry cloth. Do not use products (e.g. alcohol, Place the jet of water perpendicular to the Remove as much substance or solids as
disinfectant) or soapy water directly on these surface to be cleaned. possible using a spoon or spatula, and
surfaces - risk of damage! Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water. remove as much liquid as possible using
absorbent paper.

Bodywork Textile Product/Procedure to use depending

High-gloss paint The dashboard, door panels and seats may
on the type of stain:
contain parts made of textile material.
–  Grease, oil and ink: clean with a pH-neutral
Do not use abrasive products, solvents, Maintenance detergent.
petrol or oil to clean the bodywork. –  Vomit: clean with sparkling mineral water.
Never use an abrasive sponge to clean Do not use aggressive cleaning products –  Blood: spread flour over the stain and allow
stubborn stains - risk of scratching the (e.g. alcohol, solvent or ammonia). to dry; remove with a slightly damp cloth.
paintwork! Do not use steam-cleaning systems - risk of –  Mud: allow to dry and then remove with a
Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to affecting the adhesion of the fabrics! slightly damp cloth.
plastic or rubber parts. –  Cake, chocolate, ice cream: clean with
Remove dust from the textile parts lukewarm water.
Use a soft cloth and soapy water or a pH regularly with a dry cloth, soft brush or –  Sugary and/or alcoholic drinks: clean with
neutral product. vacuum cleaner. lukewarm water, or lemon juice if the stain is
Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean Rub down the textile parts once per year with persistent.
microfibre cloth. a clean, damp cloth. After leaving overnight to –  Hair gel, coffee, tomato sauce, vinegar:
Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. dry, brush with a soft-bristled brush. clean with lukewarm water and lemon juice.
Comply with the instructions for use stated on For solid substances, then use a soft brush or
the product. Stain removal vacuum cleaner.
For liquid substances, then use a damp
Decals Do not rub the stain or it may spread or
microfibre cloth and then dry with another
you may cause the substance to
(Depending on version) cloth.
penetrate the surface.
Do not use a high-pressure washer to
clean the vehicle - risk of damaging or Leather
detaching the decals! Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular
care is essential for its durability.

163
 Practical information

It must be protected and nourished using a

specific leather product, to keep it supple and
preserve its original appearance.

Do not clean leather using unsuitable

cleaning agents such as solvents,
detergents, petrol or pure alcohol.
When cleaning items partly made from
leather, take care not to damage the other
materials with the specific leather product.

Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids,

quickly mop up any surplus.
Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable
to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has
been dampened with demineralised water
and thoroughly wrung out.
Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened
with soapy water or a pH-neutral product.
Dry with a soft, dry cloth.

164
 In the event of a breakdown

Warning triangle
This reflective and dismantlable device is to be
Assembling and placing the
triangle
1.5 BlueHDi engines
►  Switch on the ignition (without starting the
8
engine).
installed on the side of the road when a vehicle
►  Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
is broken down or damaged.
ignition.
Before getting out of the vehicle ►  Operate the starter motor to start the engine.
Turn on the hazard warning lamps, then If the engine does not start at the first attempt,
put on the safety vest to assemble and install do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.
the triangle.

Tool kit
Storage Set of tools supplied with the vehicle.
Its content depends on your vehicle's equipment:
–  Temporary puncture repair kit.
For versions supplied with a triangle as original –  Spare wheel.
equipment, refer to the illustration above.
For other versions, refer to the assembly Access to the tools
instructions provided with the triangle. Depending on version, the tool kit is stored in a
►  Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle, bag or in a storage box in the boot.
as required by local legislation.
These tools are specific to the vehicle
and may vary according to the level of
Running out of fuel equipment.
Use the straps on the boot side trim to stow the
folded triangle or its storage box.
(Diesel) Do not use them for any other purpose.

With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be

The jack must only be used to change a
primed if you run out of fuel.
wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Before starting to prime the system, it is
Do not use any jack other than the one
essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the
supplied with the vehicle.
fuel tank.
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
For more information on Refuelling and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), refer to workshop to obtain the one that was intended
the corresponding section. by the manufacturer.

165
 In the event of a breakdown

The jack meets European standards, as With temporary puncture repair kit 6. Jack with integrated handle
defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ To raise the vehicle.
CE. 7. Wheel bolt cap removal tool (depending on
The jack does not require any maintenance. equipment)
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on
List of tools alloy wheels.
For more information on the Spare wheel, refer
to the corresponding section.

Temporary puncture
4. 12 V compressor with cartridge of sealant
and speed limit sticker
repair kit
1. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (depending For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view
on equipment) the tyre pressure. explanatory videos.
2. Socket for the wheel security bolts (located in
the glove box) (depending on equipment) For more information about the Temporary
Made up of a compressor and a sealant
To adapt the wheelbrace to the special puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding
cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary
‘security’ bolts. section.
repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the
3. Removable towing eye nearest garage.
With spare wheel
For more information on Towing the vehicle It is designed to repair most punctures located
and using the removable towing eye, refer to the on the tyre tread.
corresponding section. The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of the compressor to the 12 V
power supply for long enough to repair a tyre
after a puncture.

For more information on the Tool kit,

refer to the corresponding section.
5. Wheelbrace
For removing the wheel bolts.

166
 In the event of a breakdown

Tyre inflation pressures are indicated on

this label. 8
For more information on Identification
markings, particularly this label, refer to the
corresponding section.

Should the pressure of one or more tyres

be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise ►  Connect the pipe from the compressor to the ►  Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant
the under-inflation detection system. bottle of sealant. to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten
For more information on Tyre under-inflation firmly.
detection, refer to the corresponding section. ►  Check that the compressor switch is in
position "O".
Repair procedure ►  Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under
the compressor.
Do not remove any foreign body ►  Connect the compressor's electric plug to the
(e.g. nail, screw) which has penetrated vehicle's 12 V socket.
the tyre. ►  Affix the speed limit sticker.
►  Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic
and apply the parking brake.
►  Follow the safety instructions (hazard
►  Turn the bottle of sealant over and secure it
warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility
in the notch provided on the compressor. The speed limit sticker must be affixed
jacket, etc.) according to the legislation in force
►  Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be inside the vehicle in the area close to the
in the country in which you are driving.
repaired, and place it in a clean place. driver, to remind them that a wheel is in
►  Switch the ignition off.
temporary use.
►  Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
►  Switch the ignition on.

167
 In the event of a breakdown

After use, do not discard the bottle into the Checking/adjusting tyre
environment; take it to a CITROËN dealer or
an authorised waste disposal site.
pressures
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of The compressor can be used, without injecting
sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer or sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the
a qualified workshop. tyre pressures.
►  Switch on the compressor by moving the ►  Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep
switch to position "I" until the tyre pressure it in a clean place.
reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected ►  Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect ►  Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk firmly.
of blowback). ►  Check that the compressor switch is in
position "O".
If after approximately 7 minutes, the
►  Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under
pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this
the compressor.
indicates that the tyre is not repairable;
►  Connect the compressor's electric plug to the
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
►  Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles vehicle's 12 V socket.
workshop for assistance.
(5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between ►  Switch the ignition on.
►  Move the switch to position "O". 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the ►  Start the compressor by placing the switch at
►  Disconnect the compressor's electric plug puncture. position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value
from the vehicle's 12 V socket. ►  Stop to check the repair and the tyre shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To
►  Remove the kit. pressure using the kit. deflate: press the black button located on the
►  Refit the cap on the valve. compressor pipe, near the valve connection.
With a tyre repaired using this type of kit,
►  Remove and store the bottle of sealant. do not exceed a speed of 50 mph If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is
The sealant product is harmful if (80 km/h) and do not drive more than not reached, the tyre is damaged;
swallowed and causes irritation to the 50 miles (80 km). contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
eyes. You must contact a CITROËN dealer or a workshop for assistance.
Keep this product out of the reach of children. qualified workshop to have the repair checked
and the tyre changed. ►  Once the correct pressure is reached, put the
The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the
switch in position "O".
bottle.
►  Remove the kit and stow it.
►  Refit the cap on the valve.

168
 In the event of a breakdown

Spare wheel Removing the spare wheel ►  Put the spare wheel back in place in its
housing. 8
Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view ►  Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns.
explanatory videos. ►  Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) in
the middle of the wheel.
►  Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain
For more information on the Tool kit,
the wheel correctly.
refer to the corresponding section.
►  Depending on version, put the tool box back
in place in the middle of the wheel and clip it in
Accessing the spare wheel place.

►  Slacken the central nut.

Removing a wheel
►  Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt). Parking the vehicle
►  Lift the spare wheel towards you from the Immobilise the vehicle where it does
rear. not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level,
►  Take the wheel out of the boot. stable and non-slippery.
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear
Putting the spare wheel back in place
to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,
The punctured wheel cannot be put unless it is set to automatic mode, and switch
under the boot floor. off the ignition.
The spare wheel is stored in the boot, under the With an automatic gearbox, select mode P
floor. to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,
To access the spare wheel, first refer to the Tool unless it is set to automatic mode, and switch
kit section. off the ignition.
Depending on version, the spare wheel Check that the parking brake indicator lamps
may be a standard (steel or aluminium) on the instrument panel are on fixed.
or 'space-saver' wheel. The occupants must get out of the vehicle
and wait where they are safe.
If necessary, place a chock under the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a
jack; use an axle stand.

169
 In the event of a breakdown

Wheel with wheel trim Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
When removing the wheel, first remove ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture slip or collapse - risk of injury!
using the wheelbrace. Take care to position the jack strictly at
When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel one of the jacking points A or B under the
trim, starting by placing its aperture in line vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack is
with the valve and then pushing it into place centred under the contact area on the vehicle.
all round its edge with the palm of your hand. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the
Wheel trims are identified by a "LEFT" mark ►  Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing - risk of
on the left-hand side and a "RIGHT" mark ensure that it is directly below the front A or injury!
on the right-hand side. Do not reverse these rear B jacking point on the underbody, whichever
when removing/refitting the wheel. is closest to the wheel to be changed.

►  Remove the bolts and store them in a clean

place.
►  Remove the wheel.
►  Extend jack 6 until its head comes into
contact with jacking point A or B; contact area A
or B on the vehicle must be properly inserted
►  To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of into the central part of the head of the jack.
the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels). ►  Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
►  Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to space between the wheel and the ground to
slacken the security bolt. easily admit the spare (not punctured) wheel.
►  Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.

170
 In the event of a breakdown

Fitting a wheel
Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type
After changing a wheel
With a "space-saver" type spare wheel
8
spare wheel

Deactivate certain driving aid functions

(Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control,
If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, the etc.).
washers A do not make contact with the steel ►  Lower the vehicle again fully. Do not exceed the maximum authorised
or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The wheel ►  Fold jack 6 and remove it. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
is held in place by the conical contact surface Driving with more than one "space-saver"
B of each bolt. type spare wheel is prohibited.

Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.
Have the tightening of the spare wheel's bolts
and its tyre pressure checked.
Have the punctured tyre examined. After
inspection, the technician will advise you on
whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must
►  Tighten the security bolt using the be replaced.
wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2.
►  Tighten the other bolts using the

►  Fit the wheel on the hub.

wheelbrace 5 only. Changing a bulb
►  Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
►  Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. (depending on equipment). In some weather conditions (e.g. low
►  Pre-tighten the security bolt using the ►  Store the tools. temperature or humidity), misting on the
wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. internal surface of the glass of the headlamps
►  Pre-tighten the other bolts using the and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear
wheelbrace 5 only.

171
 In the event of a breakdown

after the lamps have been on for a few lamp has been switched off for several Front lamps
minutes. minutes - risk of serious burns!
Do not touch the bulb directly with your Model with LED headlamps
Never look too closely at the light beam fingers; use a lint-free cloth.
of LED technology lamps - risk of serious It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
eye injury! (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb
of the same type and specification. To avoid
lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs.

Refitting the lamp units

Perform the operations in the reverse
order to dismantling.

The headlamps have polycarbonate

lenses with a protective coating:
Light-emitting diode (LED) 1. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps
2. Dipped beam headlamps
–  Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive headlamps and lamps 3. Main beam headlamps
cloth, nor with detergent or solvent Depending on version, the affected types of 4. Direction indicators
products. headlamps/lamps are: 5. Foglamps
–  Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH –  "LED" technology headlamps.
neutral product. –  Front foglamps.
–  When using a high-pressure washer on –  Daytime running lamps/sidelamps.
persistent marks, do not keep the lance –  Direction indicator side repeaters.
directed towards the headlamps, lamps or –  Side spotlamps.
their edges for too long, so as not to damage –  Third brake lamp.
their protective coating and seals. –  Number plate lamps.

If you need to replace this type of bulb,

Changing a bulb must only be done with
you must contact a CITROËN dealer or a
the ignition off and after the headlamp /
qualified workshop.
Do not touch the LED technology bulbs - risk
of electrocution!

172
 In the event of a breakdown

Model with halogen headlamps Halogen bulbs (Hx)

To ensure good quality lighting, check
that one of the bulbs on the corresponding
side has failed. 8
that the bulb is correctly positioned in its
housing.

Main/Dipped beam headlamps

1. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps (LED)

2. Main beam headlamps (H7)
3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7) ►  Turn the connector a quarter turn
4. Direction indicators (PY21W) anti-clockwise.
5. Foglamps (LED) ►  Pull the bulb connector.
►  Remove the bulb and replace it.
Opening the bonnet/Accessing the
bulbs Amber-coloured bulbs must be replaced
►  Remove the protective cover by pulling on by bulbs with identical specifications and
Proceed with caution when the engine is hot -
the tab. colour.
risk of burns!
►  Disconnect the bulb connector.
Take care with objects or clothing that could
►  Remove the bulb and replace it.
be caught in the blades of the cooling fan -
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
risk of strangulation!
order, directing the bulb’s positioning lug
downwards.

Direction indicators

Rapid flashing of the indicator lamp for a

direction indicator (left or right) indicates

173
 In the event of a breakdown

Rear lamps •  Press each of the notches in the upper part Make sure to engage the lamp unit in its
of the flap to unclip it. guides while keeping it in line with the
•  Tilt the flap and its support then extract the vehicle.
assembly. Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but
►  Disconnect the lamp unit connector. without damaging the lamp unit.
►  Unlock the nut using a 10 mm pipe wrench
then unscrew and remove it. Be careful not to
Foglamp (P21W)
drop it.
►  Dismantle the lamp unit and carefully extract
it, pulling it straight towards the outside.

1. Sidelamps (LED)
2. Brake lamps (P21W)
3. Reversing lamps (W16W)
4. Direction indicators (WY16W)

Changing bulbs
The bulbs are changed from inside the boot.
For access, pass your hand under the bumper
►  Open the boot.
on the left-hand side.
►  Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn to the left
►  Unclip the bulb holder and remove it. Be and pull it out.
careful not to disconnect the wiring harness. ►  Turn the bulb a quarter turn to the left and
►  For the brake lamp, turn the bulb a quarter pull it out.
turn and replace it. ►  Replace the bulb.
►  For the reversing lamp and direction
indicator, pull the bulb out and replace it.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
All work must be carried out only by a
►  Remove the access flap on the
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
corresponding side trim:

174
 In the event of a breakdown

The replacement of a fuse by a third party

could cause a serious malfunction of the
12 V battery / Accessory
battery
Automatic gearbox
Never try to start the engine by pushing 8
vehicle. the vehicle.

Installing electrical accessories Lead-acid starter batteries Electric motor

The vehicle's electrical system is
These batteries contain harmful Flat accessory battery
designed to operate with standard or optional
substances (sulphuric acid and lead). It is no longer possible to start the motor
equipment.
They must be disposed of in accordance or recharge the traction battery.
Before fitting other electrical equipment
with regulations and must never under any
or accessories to your vehicle, contact a
circumstances be discarded with household Precautions before working on the
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
waste. accessory battery
Dispose of used batteries at a designated Select mode P, switch off the ignition, check
CITROËN accepts no responsibility for
collection point. that the instrument panel is off and that the
the cost incurred in repairing the vehicle
vehicle is not being charged.
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from
Protect your eyes and face before
the installation of accessories not supplied or
handling the battery. Jump-starting another vehicle
not recommended by CITROËN and not
All operations on the battery must be carried Do not use the accessory battery to
installed in accordance with its
out in a well ventilated area and away from jump-start another vehicle or to charge
recommendations, in particular when the
naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid another vehicle's battery.
combined power consumption of all of the
any risk of explosion or fire.
additional equipment connected exceeds 10
Wash your hands afterwards.
milliamperes. Symbols
Frozen battery No sparks or naked flames, no smoking.
Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk
of explosion! Always protect your eyes. Explosive
If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a gases can cause blindness and injury.
CITROËN dealer or by a qualified workshop, Keep the vehicle's battery out of the reach
who will verify that the internal components of children.
have not been damaged and that the case The vehicle's battery contains sulphuric
has not cracked, which could lead to a risk of acid which can make you go blind or
leakage of toxic and corrosive acid. cause severe burns.

175
 In the event of a breakdown

For more information, refer to the Check beforehand that the backup battery the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting
handbook. has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity vehicle).
Explosive gases can be present close to at least equal to that of the discharged ►  Connect the other end of the green or black
the battery. battery. cable to the (-) terminal of flat battery A.
The two vehicles must not be in contact with ►  Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and
Accessing the battery each other. leave it running for a few minutes.
The battery is located under the bonnet. Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment ►  Operate the starter on the broken down
on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, vehicle and let the engine run.
lighting, etc.). If the engine does not start immediately, switch
Make sure that the jump leads are well away off the ignition and wait a few moments before
from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt, trying again.
etc.). ►  Wait for it to return to idle.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the ►  Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order.
engine is running. ►  Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
For access to the (+) terminal: the vehicle has one.
►  Release the bonnet by pulling the internal ►  Allow the engine to run for at least
release lever, then the external safety catch. 30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that
►  Raise the bonnet. the battery reaches an adequate state of charge.
(+) Positive terminal with a quick-release Driving immediately without having
terminal. reached a sufficient level of charge may
(-) Negative terminal. affect some of the vehicle's functions (e.g.
Stop & Start).
Starting using another
battery ►  Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the
Charging the battery using a
vehicle has one.
If the vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be
started using a backup battery (either external or
►  Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of battery charger
flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the For optimum service life of the battery, it is
from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a
(+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the essential to maintain an adequate state of
battery booster.
booster. charge.
Never start the engine by connecting a ►  Connect one end of the green or black cable In some circumstances, it may be necessary to
battery charger. to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of charge the battery:
Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster.

176
 In the event of a breakdown

–  When using the vehicle mainly for short

journeys.
►  Ensure that the charger cables are in good
condition.
►  Switch off all electricity-consuming devices
(audio system, wipers, lamps, etc.). 8
–  If the vehicle is to be taken off the road for ►  Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the ►  Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes.
several weeks. vehicle has one. After accessing the battery, it is only necessary
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified ►  Connect the cables of charger B as follows: to disconnect the (+) terminal.
workshop. •  the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal
of battery A. Quick-release terminal clamp
To charge the vehicle's battery yourself,
•  the negative (-) black cable to the (-) terminal Disconnecting the (+) terminal
use only a charger compatible with
of battery A.
lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of
►  At the end of the charging operation, switch
12 V.
off charger B before disconnecting the cables
from battery A.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the charger. If this label is present, use only a 12 V
Never reverse polarities. charger to avoid causing irreversible
damage to the electrical components.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery. 24V

►  Switch the ignition off. ►  Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover
►  Switch off all electrical consumers (audio 12V
on the (+) terminal.
system, lighting, wipers, etc.). ►  Raise lever A fully to release clamp B.
►  Remove clamp B by lifting it off.

Disconnecting the battery

In order to maintain an adequate state of
charge for starting the engine, we recommend
disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be
unused for an extended period.
Before disconnecting the battery:
►  Close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
►  Switch off charger B before connecting roof).
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.

177
 In the event of a breakdown

Reconnecting the (+) terminal If minor problems nevertheless persist following When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on
this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a the ground, always use an approved towing
qualified workshop. arm; rope and straps are prohibited.
Referring to the relevant section, reinitialise The towing vehicle must move off gently.
certain equipment: When the vehicle is towed with its engine
–  Remote control key or electronic key off, there is no longer braking and steering
(depending on version). assistance.
– Sunroof.
–  Electric windows. A professional towing service must be
–  Date and time. called if:
–  Preset radio stations. –  Broken down on a motorway or main road.
The Stop & Start system may not be –  Not possible to put the gearbox into neutral,
operational during the trip following the unlock the steering, or release the parking
►  Raise lever A fully. first engine start. brake.
►  Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal. In this case, the system will only be available –  Not possible to tow a vehicle with an
►  Push clamp B fully down. again after a continuous period with the automatic gearbox, with the engine running.
►  Lower lever A to lock clamp B. vehicle immobilised, the duration of which –  Towing with only two wheels on the ground.
►  Depending on equipment, lower the plastic depends on the exterior temperature and the –  Four-wheel drive vehicle.
cover on the (+) terminal. state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 –  No approved towbar available.
Do not force the lever when pressing on hours).
it, as if the clamp is not positioned Before towing the vehicle, it is essential
correctly, locking will then not be possible. to put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode.
Start the procedure again. Towing the vehicle For more information on Free-wheeling, refer
to the corresponding section.
General recommendations
Following reconnection Observe the legislation in force in the Electric motor
After reconnecting the battery, turn on the country where you are driving. An electric vehicle cannot under any
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is circumstances be used to tow another
engine, to enable the electronic systems to higher than that of the towed vehicle. vehicle.
initialise. The driver must remain at the wheel of the However, it may be used, for example, to exit
towed vehicle and must have a valid driving a rut.
licence.

178
 In the event of a breakdown

Towing constraints 8
Type of vehicle Front wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground
(engine/gearbox) ground ground with towbar
Internal combustion/Manual

Internal combustion/Automatic

Electric

In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).

Accessing the tools ►  Screw the towing eye in fully.

►  Install the towbar.
The towing eye is stored with the tool kit in the
►  Put the gearbox into neutral.
boot.
For more information on accessing the Tool kit, Failure to observe this instruction could
refer to the corresponding section. result in damage to certain components
(braking, transmission, etc.) and to the
Towing your vehicle absence of braking assistance the next time
To access the front screw thread: the engine is started.

Automatic gearbox
Never tow the vehicle with the driving
wheels on the ground and the engine off.
►  Unclip the cover by pressing on its left-hand
section. ►  Unlock the steering and release the parking
►  Release the cover downwards. brake.
To be towed:

179
 In the event of a breakdown

►  Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both

vehicles.
►  Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
short distance.

Towing another vehicle

To access the rear screw thread:

►  Unclip the cover by pressing at its right-hand

section.
►  Pull the cover downwards.
To tow:
►  Screw the towing eye in fully.
►  Install the towbar.
►  Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both
vehicles.
►  Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
short distance.

180
 Technical data

Engine technical data and

towed loads
must be reduced by 10% for each additional
1,000 metres of altitude. 9
The maximum authorised nose weight
corresponds to the weight permitted on the
Engines towball.
The engine characteristics are given in the When exterior temperatures are high, the
vehicle's registration document, as well as in vehicle performance may be limited in
sales brochures. order to protect the engine. When the exterior
Only the values available at the time of temperature is higher than 37°C, reduce the
publication are presented in the tables. towed weight.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain missing values.
Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle
The maximum power corresponds to the can adversely affect its road holding.
value type-approved on a test bed, under Braking distances are increased when towing
conditions defined by European legislation a trailer.
(Directive 1999/99/EC). When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed
a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the
For more information, contact a CITROËN dealer local legislation in force).
or a qualified workshop.

Weights and towed loads

The weights and towed loads relating to
the vehicle are indicated on the registration
document, as well as in sales brochures.
These values are also indicated on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum
altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value

181
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - Petrol

Engines PureTech 100 S&S PureTech 130 S&S PureTech 130 S&S PureTech 155 S&S
Gearboxes BVM6 BVM6 EAT8 EAT8
(Manual 6-speed) (Manual 6-speed) (Automatic (Automatic
8-speed) 8-speed)
Codes EB2ADTD_B MB6 EB2ADTS MB6 EB2ADTS ATN8 EB2ADTX ATN8
STTd STTd STTd STTd
Model codes BAHNEA BAHNSA BAHNSB BAHNNB
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 75 96 96 114
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,000 1,200 1,200 1,200
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 640 660 680 670
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 61 61 61 61

182
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - Diesel 9

Engines BlueHDi 110 BlueHDi 130
Gearboxes BVM6 EAT8
(Manual 6-speed) (Automatic 8-speed)
Codes DV5RCe MB6 STTd DV5RC ATN8 STTd
Model codes BBYHSA BBYHZB
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1,499
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 81 96
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,200 1,200
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 660 690
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 61 61

183
 Technical data

Electric motor
Model codes: BCZKXC
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 0
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 0
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 0

Electric motor
Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets
Max. power : EC standard (kW)/(hp) 100/136
Traction battery
Technology Lithium-Ion
Installed capacity (kWh) 50
Domestic charging Mode 2
Alternating current (AC) voltage 230 (single-phase)
Rating (A) 8 or 16
Accelerated charging Mode 3
Alternating current (AC) voltage 230 (single-phase or three-phase)
Rating (A) 16 or 32
Superfast charging Mode 4
Direct current (DC) voltage 400

184
 Technical data

Dimensions (mm)
These dimensions have been measured on an
Affixed to the right-hand door.
Bears the following information: 9
–  Manufacturer’s name.
unladen vehicle. –  European whole vehicle type approval
number.
–  Vehicle Identification number (VIN).
–  Gross vehicle weight (GVW).
–  Gross train weight (GTW).
–  Maximum weight on the front axle.
* Mirrors folded –  Maximum weight on the rear axle.
** Electric versions D. Tyres/paint code label.
Affixed to the driver's door.
Identification markings Bears the following information about the tyres:
–  Tyre pressures, unladen and laden.
Various visible markings for vehicle identification
–  Tyre specification, made up of the dimensions
and vehicle search.
and type as well as the load and speed indices.
–  Spare tyre inflation pressure.
Also indicates the paint colour code.

The vehicle may be originally equipped

with tyres with higher load and speed
indices than those indicated on the label,
without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres).
In the event of a change in the type of tyres,
contact a CITROËN dealer for the tyre fits
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), under approved for the vehicle.
the bonnet.
Stamped on the chassis.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the
dashboard.
Printed on an adhesive label visible through the
windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.

185
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

Touch screen First steps go into standby (screen and sound off) for at
least 5 minutes.
BLUETOOTH audio With the engine running, a press mutes The return to normal takes place when the
system the sound.
With the ignition off, a press turns the system on.
temperature in the passenger compartment
has dropped.
Increase or decrease the volume using
Multimedia audio system - the thumbwheel on the left-hand side.
Bluetooth® telephone To access the menus, press this button
Steering mounted controls
on the touch screen.
The functions and settings described Press the back arrow to go back a level.
vary according to the vehicle version and Steering mounted controls -
To clean the screen, use a soft,
configuration.
non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) Type 1
with no additional product.
For safety reasons and because they Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
require sustained attention by the driver, Do not touch the screen with wet hands. Radio:
the following operations must be carried out
Select the previous/next preset radio
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition Certain information is displayed permanently in
station.
on: the upper bar of the touch screen:
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.
–  Pairing the smartphone with the system in –  Air conditioning information (depending on
Media:
Bluetooth mode. version).
Select the previous/next track.
–  Using the smartphone. –  Bluetooth connection.
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.
–  Changing the system settings and –  Indication of location data sharing.
Radio:
configuration. Selection of the audio source:
Short press: display the list of radio
–  FM/AM/DAB radio stations (depending on
stations.
The system is protected in such a way equipment).
Long press: update the list.
that it will only operate in the vehicle. –  Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
Media:
The Energy Economy Mode message is Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
Short press: display the list of folders.
displayed when the system is about to enter –  USB memory stick.
Long press: display the available sorting options.
the corresponding mode. –  Media player connected via the auxiliary
Short press: change audio source (radio;
socket (depending on equipment).
USB; AUX if equipment connected; CD;
In very hot conditions, the volume may streaming).
be limited to protect the system. It may

186
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

Long press: display the call log. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
Menus 10
Short press during an incoming call: accept the Change the multimedia source.
call.
Radio
Short press during a call in progress: end the Short press: display the calls log.
call. Short press during an incoming call:
Confirm a selection. accept the call.
Long press during an incoming call: reject the
Increase volume. call.
Short press during a call in progress: end the
Decrease volume. call.
Radio (rotate): previous/next preset
Mute/restore sound by simultaneously station.
pressing the increase and decrease Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a
volume buttons. list. Select a radio station.
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing
Steering mounted controls - selected, access to presets.
Type 2 Radio: display the list of stations. Media
Media: display the list of tracks.

Voice commands:
This control is located on the steering
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk
(depending on equipment).
Short press, smartphone voice commands via
the system.
Increase volume.

Select an audio source.

Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume increase
and decrease buttons simultaneously
(depending on equipment).

187
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

Telephone Settings Radio

Choose the band
Press the "Radio" menu.

Press the "SOURCE" button.

Choose the band: FM, AM or DAB, depending
on equipment.

Selecting a station
Press one of the buttons for an automatic
Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®. Adjust the sound settings (balance, search for radio stations.
ambience, etc.), the display (language, Or
units, date, time, etc.) or configure the system Press on the displayed frequency.
Driving (privacy).
Enter the FM and AM waveband values
Air conditioning/Heating using the virtual keypad.
Or
Press this button to display the list of
stations received and available on the
waveband.

Radio reception may be affected by the

use of electrical equipment not approved
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
Activate, deactivate or configure certain
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
vehicle functions (depending on
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block
equipment/version). Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
reception, including in RDS mode. This
Manage various temperature and air flow
behaviour is normal in propagation of radio
settings.
waves and does not indicate any failure of the
audio system.

188
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

Presetting a station
Select a radio station or frequency.
To operate, this function needs good reception
of a radio station that transmits this type of
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio
10
message. While traffic information is being
Press the "Presets" button.
broadcast, the current media is automatically
Terrestrial Digital Radio
interrupted so that the TA message can be
Make a long press on an empty line to preset the
heard. Normal play of the media previously
station. An audible signal confirms the presetting
playing is resumed at the end of the message. Choosing the DAB radio
of the station.
Press the "Radio Settings" button. Terrestrial digital radio (DAB) provides higher
It is possible to preset up to 16 stations.
quality reception.
To replace a preset station by the Activate/Deactivate "Traffic The different "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a
currently playing station, make a long announcement (TA)". choice of radio stations arranged in alphabetical
press on the preset station. order.
Audio settings Press the "Radio" menu.
Press the "Radio Settings" button.
Press the "SOURCE" button.
Activating/Deactivating RDS In the list of available sources, choose "DAB
In the list, select "Audio Settings".
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Radio".
Activate/deactivate and configure the available
listening to the same station by automatically
options (sound balance, ambiances, etc.).
retuning to alternative frequencies. Activating FM-DAB Tracking
The sound balance/distribution is audio "DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory.
In certain conditions, tracking may not be
processing that allows the quality of the When the digital radio signal is poor, the
assured throughout the entire country as
sound to be adapted according to where the "FM-DAB tracking" allows you to continue
radio stations do not cover 100% of the
passengers are sitting in the vehicle. listening to the same station, by automatically
territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey. switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue
station (if there is one).
Press the "Radio Settings" button. Press the "Radio Settings" button.

Activate/Deactivate "RDS options". Activate "DAB-FM".

Playing TA messages If "FM-DAB tracking" is activated, there

may be a difference of a few seconds
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives
priority to TA alert messages.

189
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

when the system switches to "FM" analogue Playlists are updated whenever a USB memory Once connected in Streaming mode, the
radio with sometimes a variation in volume. stick is connected or the contents of a particular smartphone is considered to be a media
Once the digital signal quality is restored, the USB memory stick are changed. The lists source.
system automatically changes back to "DAB". are memorised: if they are not modified, the
subsequent loading time will be shorter.
Connecting Apple® players
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
not available on "FM", or if the "FM-DAB Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket
Depending on equipment using a suitable cable (not supplied).
tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, Play starts automatically.
out while the digital signal is too weak.
etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an Control is via the audio system.
audio cable (not supplied). The classifications available are those of
Media This source is only available if "Aux
Amplification" has been selected in the audio
the portable device connected (artists/
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
settings.
Selecting the source First adjust the volume on the portable device
podcasts). It is also possible to use a
classification structured in the form of a
Press the "Media" menu. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the library.
audio system. The default classification used is by artist. To
Press the "SOURCE" button. Controls are managed via the portable device. modify the classification used, return to the
Select the source (USB, Bluetooth or AUX,
first level of the menu then select the desired
depending on equipment). Bluetooth®streaming classification (playlists for example) and
Streaming allows you to listen to music from your confirm to go down through the menu to the
USB port smartphone. desired track.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first
port or connect the USB device to the adjust the volume on the portable device (to a The version of software in the audio system may
USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). high level). not be compatible with the generation of the
Then adjust the volume of the system. Apple® player.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
If play does not start automatically, it may be
hub.
necessary to start the audio playback from the Media settings
The system builds playlists (in temporary smartphone. Press the "Media Settings" button.
memory); this operation can take from a Control is from the portable device or by using
few seconds to several minutes at the first the system's touch buttons. Activate/deactivate track playback options and
connection. access the audio settings.

190
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

The audio settings are the same as the

audio settings for the radio. For more
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT or FAT32
format (File Allocation Table).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the list
10
information on the "Audio settings", refer to of devices detected.
We recommend using the original USB
the corresponding section. In the system, accept the connection request
cable for the portable device.
from the telephone.
Information and advice Procedure from the system
The system supports USB mass storage Telephone Press the Home button to access the
devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players
menus.
via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not Pairing a Bluetooth® Select the "Telephone" menu.
supplied.
Devices are managed using the audio system
telephone
Press "Manage connections".
controls. Up to 10 phones can be paired to the system.
The list of telephones detected is displayed.
Other devices, not recognised on connection, Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone
Select the name of the telephone in the list.
must be connected to the auxiliary socket using beforehand and ensure that it is "visible to all"
The system offers to connect the telephone with
a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth (telephone configuration).
two profiles:
streaming, if compatible. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is
–  as "Telephone": hands-free kit, telephone
used (from the telephone or from the system),
To protect the system, do not use a USB only.
ensure that the code is the same in the system
hub. –  as "Streaming": wireless playing of audio files
and in the telephone.
on the telephone.
The audio system will only play audio files with The services available depend on the
".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".mp3", ".mp4", ".m4a", The system cannot be connected to
network, the SIM card and the
".flac", ".ogg" file extensions and with a bit rate multiple telephones with the same profile.
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used.
of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps (300 Kbps No more than 2 phones can be connected
Check for services availability in the phone's
maximum for ".flac" files). simultaneously (1 per profile).
manual and with the operator.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. The Bluetooth profiles chosen on the
The profiles compatible with the system
The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and phone have priority over the profiles
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, DID, A2DP,
48 KHz. selected on the system.
AVRCP, SPP and PAN.
To avoid reading and display problems, we
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
recommend choosing file names less than 20 Go to the Brand's website for more information
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
characters long that do not contain any special (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Bluetooth function on the telephone.
characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).

191
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

Depending on the type of telephone, the To accept the call: Or make a long press
option is given to accept or not accept Make a short press on the steering
the transfer of contacts and the call log. mounted TEL button. on the steering mounted TEL button.
To reject the call:
Make a long press Press "Contacts".
Automatic reconnection
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone on the steering mounted TEL button.
connected is present again, it is automatically Calling a recently used number
recognised and within about 30 seconds Or Press "Telephone".
of switching on the ignition, the pairing is Press "End call" on the touch screen.
established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press "Calls".
Or
Managing paired telephones Making a call Make a long press
To connect or disconnect a paired telephone:
Select the "Telephone" menu. Using the telephone is not recommended
on the steering mounted TEL button.
while driving.
Press "Bluetooth" to display the list of Parking the vehicle.
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
paired devices. Make the call using the steering mounted
Press on the name of the telephone chosen in controls. A call in progress remains active in the
the list to disconnect it. vehicle for 10 minutes after switching off
Press again to connect it. the ignition. After that, the system switches off
Calling a new number and the call automatically redirects to the
Deleting a telephone Press "Telephone". telephone.
Press the "Bluetooth" button.
Press the "Keypad" button.
It is always possible to make a call
Press "Manage connections". directly from the telephone; as a safety
Enter the phone number using the digital
In the displayed window select "Delete". measure, first park the vehicle.
keypad.
The list of paired devices is displayed.
Press "OK" to start the call.
Press on the name of the telephone to delete.

Receiving a call Calling a contact

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
Press the "Telephone" menu.
superimposed display in the screen.

192
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

Settings When data and vehicle position sharing

are enabled, this symbol is displayed in
Date format:
Select the display format for the date. 10
the upper bar of the touch screen.
Adjusting the brightness
Press "Settings". Selecting the language
Press "Settings".
Frequently asked
Select "Display". questions
Press the buttons to adjust the Select "Languages" to change the The following information groups together the
brightness of the screen and/or of language. answers to the most frequently asked questions
the instrument panel (depending on version).
concerning the system.
Setting the date and time
Modifying system settings Press "Settings". Radio
Press "Settings".
The reception quality of the tuned radio
Press "Date/Time". station gradually deteriorates or the station
Press "System".
presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz
Press "Privacy" to access the privacy Setting the date: is displayed, etc.).
settings. Press the arrows to set the day, month The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s
Select "Units" to change the units of and year. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the
distance, fuel consumption and
First set the day, then the month. geographical area.
temperature.
►  Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar
Press "Factory settings" to return to the
to enable the system to check whether there is
initial settings.
Setting the time: a more powerful transmitter in the geographical
Press "System Info" to check the system
Press these buttons to set hours and area.
version.
minutes. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
Privacy settings Select or deselect the 24h format. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception,
including in RDS mode.
Three data privacy options are available:
In 12h format, choose "AM" or "PM". This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is
"No data sharing (data, vehicle
not indicative of an audio system malfunction.
position)"
The aerial is missing or has been damaged
"Only data sharing" The system does not automatically
(for example while entering a car wash or
manage the change between winter and
underground car park).
“Data and vehicle position sharing" summer time.
►  Have the aerial checked by a dealer.

193
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The connected device does not automatically Some telephones offer display options.
received stations. launch playback. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can
The name of the radio station changes. ►  Start playback from the device. be transferred in a specific order.
The station is no longer received or its name has Track names and playing times are not ►  Modify the telephone directory display
changed in the list. displayed on the audio streaming screen. settings.
Some radio stations send other information The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer
in place of their name (the title of the song for of this information. Settings
example). When the treble and bass settings are
The system interprets these details as the station Telephone changed, the ambience is deselected.
name. I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. When the ambience is changed, the treble
►  Press the "Radio Settings" button then The telephone's Bluetooth function may be and bass settings are reset.
select "Update list". The radio reception is switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and
cut off while searching for available stations ►  Check that the telephone has Bluetooth bass settings, and vice versa.
(approximately 30 seconds). switched on. ►  Modify the treble and bass or ambience
►  Check in the telephone settings that it is settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
Media "visible to all". There is a difference in sound quality
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with between audio sources.
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound
Some files supplied with the memory stick may ►  Check the compatibility of the telephone on settings can be tailored to different audio
greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services). sources, which can generate audible differences
stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing The volume of the telephone connected in when changing source.
time). Bluetooth mode is inaudible. ►  Check that the sound settings are appropriate
►  Delete the files supplied with the memory The volume depends on both the system and the to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound
stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the telephone. functions to the middle position.
file structure on the memory stick. Ambient noise affects the quality of the When the engine is off, the system switches
Some characters in information about the telephone call. off after several minutes of use.
currently playing media are not displayed ►  Increase the volume of the audio system, to When the engine is switched off, the system's
correctly. maximum if required, and increase the volume of operating time depends on the state of charge of
The audio system is unable to process certain the telephone if necessary. the battery.
types of character. ►  Reduce ambient noise (close windows, The switch-off is normal: the system
►  Use standard characters to name tracks and reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). automatically goes into energy economy mode
folders. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical and switches off to maintain an adequate charge
Playback of streaming files does not start. order. in the battery.

194
 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system

►  Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the

charge of the battery. 10

195
 MyCitroën Play

MyCitroën Play The system’s Open Source Software

(OSS) source codes are available at the
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
type.
following addresses: To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive
Multimedia audio system - https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional
Applications - Bluetooth® https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ product.
telephone Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
The functions and settings described First steps Certain information is displayed permanently on
vary according to the vehicle version and
With the engine running, a press mutes the main screen:
configuration, as well as the country of sale.
the sound. –  Air conditioning status information (depending
With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. on version), and direct access to the
For safety reasons and because they Increase or decrease the volume using corresponding menu.
require sustained attention by the driver, the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons –  Radio Media and Telephone menu status
the following operations must be carried out (depending on the equipment). information.
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition Use the buttons on either side of or below the –  Privacy status information.
on: touch screen to access the menus, then press –  Access to the touch screen and digital
–  Connecting the smartphone via Bluetooth, the virtual buttons on the touch screen. instrument panel settings.
USB or Wi-Fi. Depending on the model, use the "Source" Audio source selection (depending on
–  Using the smartphone. and "Menu" buttons below the touch screen to equipment):
–  Connecting to the CarPlay® or Android access the menus, then press the virtual buttons –  FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on
Auto applications (certain applications stop on the touch screen. equipment).
displaying when the vehicle is moving). At all times it is possible to display the rolling –  Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
–  Changing the system settings and menus by pressing the screen briefly with three Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
configuration. fingers. –  USB Memory stick.
On pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the
The system is protected so that it only In very hot conditions, the volume may
screen, you can switch between pages either
operates in the vehicle. be limited to protect the system. It may
by tapping the tab for the desired page or by
The message Energy economy mode is enter standby mode (with the screen and
swiping the pages to the left or right with your
displayed when the system is about to go into sound off) for 5 minutes or more.
finger.
standby. The system will resume normal operation
Press the back arrow to go back a level or
when the temperature in the passenger
confirm.
compartment has dropped.

196
 MyCitroën Play

Steering mounted controls Menus

Voice control: smartphone voice
Applications 11
commands. Radio Media
Increase volume.

Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume increase
and decrease buttons simultaneously
(depending on equipment).
Restore the sound by pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
Telephone (short press): start telephone Access configurable equipment.
call.
Call in progress (short press): access
Select an audio source or radio station.
telephone menu. Settings
Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call,
end call; when no call is in progress, access
telephone menu.
Telephone
Radio (rotate): automatic search for the
previous/next station.
Media (rotate): previous/next track, move
through a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing
selected, access presets.

Configure the sound (balance, ambience,

etc.), the display (language, units, date,
time, etc.), and some system functions.
Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.
Run certain applications from a
smartphone connected via CarPlay® or Android
Auto.

197
 MyCitroën Play

Driving Air conditioning Radio reception may be affected by the

use of electrical equipment not approved
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
18,5 21,5 block reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the
context of radio wave transmission, and
in no way indicative of an audio system
malfunction.

Activate, deactivate or configure certain Manage various temperature and air flow
vehicle functions. settings. Changing the waveband
Press Radio Media to display the main
Navigation Radio page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page.
Selecting a station Press "Band" to change waveband.
Press Radio Media to display the main page.
Press one of the buttons to perform an Press in the shaded area to confirm.
automatic search for radio stations.
Or
Move the slider to manually search for Presetting a station
frequencies up or down. Select a radio station or frequency.
Or Make a short press on the star outline. If
Press the frequency to enter the FM and the star is solid, the radio station is
Configure the navigation and select your
AM waveband values using the virtual already preset.
destination via CarPlay® or Android Auto.
keypad. Or
Press "OK" to confirm. Select a radio station or frequency.
Press "Preset".
Make a long press on one of the buttons
to preset the station.

198
 MyCitroën Play

Activating/Deactivating RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
Playing TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives
different and independent for each audio
source. 11
In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers,
listening to the same station by automatically priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this
Driver and Front only settings are common
retuning to alternative frequencies. function needs good reception of a radio station
to all sources.
Press Radio Media to display the main that transmits this type of message. While traffic
In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate
page. information is being broadcast, the current
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input"
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the media is automatically interrupted so that the
and "Touch tones".
secondary page. TA message can be heard. Normal play of the
Activate/deactivate "RDS". previously playing media resumes at the end of
the message. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press Radio Media to display the main with the Arkamys© system) uses audio
page. processing to adjust the sound quality
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the according to the number of passengers in the
RDS station tracking may not be vehicle.
secondary page.
available nationwide, as many radio
Activate/deactivate "TA".
stations do not cover 100 % of the country.
Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging©
This explains the loss of reception of the
Press in the shaded area to confirm. optimises the sound distribution inside
station during a journey.
the passenger compartment.

Displaying text information Audio settings

The "Radio Text" function displays information Press Radio Media to display the main DAB (Digital Audio
transmitted by the radio station relating to the
station or the currently playing song.
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Broadcasting) radio
Press Radio Media to display the main secondary page.
page. Press "Audio settings". Terrestrial Digital Radio
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Digital radio provides higher quality sound.
secondary page. Select the "Tone", "Balance" or "Sound" The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a
Activate/deactivate "News". tab to configure the sound settings. choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical
Press the back arrow to confirm. order.
Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press Radio Media to display the main
page.
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass,
Medium and Treble sound settings are

199
 MyCitroën Play

Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the If the "DAB" station being listened to is BluetoothStreaming®
secondary page. not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB
Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed
Press "Band" to select "DAB band". Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut
from your smartphone.
out when the digital signal becomes too weak.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated.
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
First adjust the volume on the portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
Media system.
FM-DAB Follow-up If play does not start automatically, it may be
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor, the
USB port necessary to start the audio playback from the
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB smartphone.
"FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue Control is from the portable device or by using
port or connect the USB device to the
listening to the same station by automatically the system's touch buttons.
USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue
station (if there is one). To protect the system, do not use a USB Once connected in Streaming mode, the
Press Radio Media to display the main hub. smartphone is considered to be a media
page. source.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory); this operation can take from a
secondary page.
few seconds to several minutes at the first
Connecting Apple® players
Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up".
connection. Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket
Reduce the number of non-music files and the using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Play starts automatically.
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition Control is via the audio system.
If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there is switched off or a USB memory stick is The classifications available are those of
may be a time offset of a few seconds connected. The audio system memorises these the portable device connected (artists/
when the system switches to "FM" analogue lists, which will subsequently load faster if they albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
radio, and in some cases a change in volume. have not been changed. podcasts). It is also possible to use a
When the digital signal quality is restored, the
classification structured in the form of a
system automatically changes back to "DAB". Selecting the source library.
To minimise this time lag, storing radio
Press Radio Media to display the main The default classification used is by artist. To
stations in the "DAB" band is recommended.
page. modify the classification used, return to the
Press the "SOURCES" button. first level of the menu then select the desired
Select the source. classification (playlists for example) and

200
 MyCitroën Play

confirm to go down through the menu to the

desired track.
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the list
11
We recommend using the original USB of detected devices.
The version of software in the audio system may
cable for the portable device. In the system, accept the connection request
not be compatible with the generation of the
from the telephone.
Apple® player.
Procedure from the system
Information and advice Telephone Press Telephone to display the main
The system supports USB mass storage
page.
devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players Pairing a Bluetooth® Press "Bluetooth search".
via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not
supplied.
telephone The list of detected telephones is
displayed.
Devices are managed using the audio system The services available depend on the Select the name of the chosen telephone
controls. network, the SIM card and the in the list.
Other devices, not recognised on connection, compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used.
must be connected via Bluetooth streaming, if Consult the telephone user guide and the Connection sharing
compatible. service provider to check which services are The system offers to connect the telephone with
To protect the system, do not use a USB available. 3 profiles:
hub. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only),
The Bluetooth function must be activated and
– “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
The audio system will only play audio files with the telephone configured as "Visible to all” (in the
audio files on the telephone),
".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file telephone settings).
– "Mobile internet data".
extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is
Select one or more profiles.
320 Kbps. used (from the telephone or from the system),
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. ensure that the code is the same in the system
Press "OK" to confirm.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. and in the telephone.
All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. If the pairing procedure fails, we Depending on the type of telephone, you may by
The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and recommend deactivating and then prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and
48 KHz. reactivating the Bluetooth function on the messages.
To avoid reading and display problems, we telephone.
recommend choosing file names less than 20 The ability of the system to connect just
characters long that do not contain any special one profile depends on the telephone.
characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). All three profiles may connect by default.

201
 MyCitroën Play

The profiles compatible with the system Press the "PHONE" button to access the Making a call
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, secondary page.
MAP and PAN. Press "Bluetooth connection" to Using the telephone is not recommended
display the list of paired devices. while driving.
Visit the Brand's website for more information Press on the name of the telephone Parking the vehicle.
(compatibility, additional help, etc.). selected in the list to disconnect it. Make the call using the steering mounted
Press again to connect it. controls.
Automatic reconnection
On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Deleting a telephone
connected is present again, it is automatically Calling a new number
Press the basket at the top right of the
recognised and within about 30 seconds Press Telephone to display the main
screen to display a basket alongside the
after switching on the ignition, the pairing is page.
telephone chosen.
established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Enter the phone number using the digital
Press the basket alongside the telephone
To modify the connection profile: keypad.
chosen to delete it.
Press Telephone to display the main Press "Call" to start the call.
page. Receiving a call
Press the "PHONE" button to access the
secondary page.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Calling a contact
Press "Bluetooth connection" to Press Telephone to display the main
Make a short press on the steering
display the list of paired devices. page.
mounted PHONE button to accept an
Press the "Details" button for a paired Or press and hold
incoming call.
device.
And
Select one or more profiles. the steering mounted PHONE button.
Make a long press

Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Contacts".

on the steering mounted PHONE button
Select the desired contact from the displayed list.
to reject the call.
Press "Call".
Or
Managing paired telephones
Press "End call".
This function lets you connect or disconnect a
device or delete a pairing. Calling a recently used
Press Telephone to display the main number
page.
Press Telephone to display the main
page.

202
 MyCitroën Play

Or
Press and hold
Unlock the smartphone for the
communication process between the
For more information about the 5 GHz
regulatory status of each country, refer to the 11
smartphone and the system to work. website of the audio system manufacturer.
the steering mounted button. As principles and standards are constantly
changing, we recommend keeping the
CarPlay® smartphone connection
Press "Recent calls". smartphone's operating system up-to-
Select the desired contact from the displayed list. date, together with the date and time on Depending on country.
the smartphone and the system. USB connection
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; as a safety On connecting the USB cable, the
measure, first park the vehicle. For the list of compatible smartphones,
CarPlay® function deactivates the
visit the Manufacturer's website in your
system's Bluetooth® mode.
country.
Setting the ringtone The "CarPlay" function requires the use of
a compatible smartphone and compatible
Press Telephone to display the main USB sockets
applications.
page. Depending on equipment, for more information
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay® or Connect the USB cable.
secondary page. Android Auto applications, refer to the "Ease of
Press "Ring volume" to display the use and comfort" section. The smartphone charges when connected by the
volume bar. USB cable.
Wireless connection
Press the arrows or move the slider to set From the system, press "Telephone" to
the ring volume. Before using CarPlay® or Android Auto display the main page.
wirelessly, ensure the Wi-Fi regulatory Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay®
Using CarPlay® or Android restrictions of your geographic location are interface.
Auto met.
CarPlay® interface may appear
Synchronising a smartphone enables users If the 5 GHz Wi-Fi network frequency is not
automatically.
to display applications that support the allowed in your location, select 2.4 GHz at the
smartphone’s CarPlay® or Android Auto first connection.
Check the Wi-Fi restrictions again when you When the USB cable is disconnected
technology on the vehicle’s screen. For CarPlay® and the ignition is switched off then back
technology, the CarPlay® function must first be travel to different locations and set the Wi-Fi
frequency accordingly. on, the system will not automatically switch to
activated on the smartphone. Radio Media mode; the source must be
The smartphone can be connected via USB changed manually.
cable or via a wireless connection.

203
 MyCitroën Play

The CarPlay® navigation can be accessed The "Android Auto" function requires the Connect a USB cable.
at any time by pressing the system's use of a compatible smartphone and
Navigation button. applications. From the system, press "Telephone" to
Wireless connection display the main page.
The first connection of Android Auto to If the device has already been connected to the
First activate the smartphone’s Bluetooth®
the system should be made by USB system via Bluetooth®, select the device settings
function.
cable. from the list of known devices and choose
From the system, press "Telephone" to
Android Auto® as the wireless connection mode.
display the main page.
If the device has never been connected to the
If the device has already been connected to the USB connection
system before, it will have to be paired (refer to
system via Bluetooth®, select the device settings Connect a USB cable. the corresponding section).
from the list of known devices and choose
The system detects if the smartphone is
CarPlay® as the wireless connection mode. The smartphone charges when connected by a compatible with Android Auto and offers to
If the device has never been connected to the USB cable. connect to it following the pairing process.
system before, it will have to be paired (refer to From the system, press "Telephone" to Subsequent automatic connection of the
the corresponding section). display the main page. smartphone requires activation of the Bluetooth®
The system detects if the smartphone is Press "Android Auto" to start the on your device.
compatible with CarPlay® and offers to connect application in the system. As soon as the connection is established,
to it following the pairing process. Depending on the smartphone, it may be press "Android Auto" to display the
Subsequent automatic connection of the necessary to activate the "Android Auto" Android Auto interface.
smartphone requires activation of the Bluetooth® function. Press and hold this steering-mounted
on your device. During the procedure, several screen control button and say "OK Google" to
As soon as the connection is established, pages relating to certain features are initiate the smartphone voice commands.
press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® displayed. Access to the different audio sources remains
interface. Accept to start and complete the connection. available in the margin of the Android Auto
Press and hold this steering-mounted When connecting a smartphone to the display, using the touch buttons located in the
control button and say "Siri" to initiate the system, we recommend enabling upper bar.
smartphone voice commands. Bluetooth® on the smartphone. Access to the menus for the system is possible
Android Auto smartphone connection at any time using the dedicated buttons.
Wireless connection
Depending on country. There may be a pause before
First activate the smartphone’s Bluetooth®
On the smartphone, download the applications become available,
function.
Android Auto application. depending on the quality of the network.

204
 MyCitroën Play

Applications Press this button to search and select a

recipient.
Modifying system settings
Press Settings to display the main page.
11
Select the "Quick messages” tab.
Viewing photos
Press "Configuration" to access the
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display
secondary page.
To protect the system, do not use a USB settings for messages.
Press "System configuration".
hub. Press this button to write a new message.
Press the "Units" tab to change the units of
The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected
distance, fuel consumption and temperature.
the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it.
Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the
Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected
initial settings.
page. message to display the secondary page.
Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the Returning the system to factory settings
existing text. activates the English language by default
Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message. (depending on version).

Press the "System info" tab to display the

Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.
versions of the various modules installed in the
system.
Press this button to display the details of
Press the "Privacy" tab,
the photo.
Press the back arrow to go back a level.
Settings or
Press Settings to display the main page.
Adjusting the brightness
Managing messages Press Settings to display the main page.
Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate
the private data mode.
Press Applications to display the main
Activate or deactivate:
page. Press Brightness.
Press "SMS".
– "No sharing (data, vehicle position)".
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of
– "Only data sharing”
Select the "SMS” tab. the screen and/or the instrument panel
– "Data and vehicle position sharing"
(depending on version).
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press this button to select the display Press in the shaded area to confirm.
settings for messages.

205
 MyCitroën Play

Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Press the back arrow to save the date.
secondary page.
Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Date and time". Select the display format for the date.
secondary page.
Press "Screen configuration". Select "Time". Press the back arrow again to confirm.
Press this button to set the time using the
Press "Brightness". virtual keypad.
Time and date setting is only available if
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Press "OK" to save the time.
"GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated.
the screen and/or the instrument panel
(depending on version). Press this button to set the time zone.
Press the back arrow to confirm. Wifi settings
Select the display format for the time Press Settings to display the main page.
Press "Animation". (12h/24h).
Activate or deactivate: “Automatic Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 Press Wifi to access network frequency
scrolling”. hour). setting.
Select "Animated transitions". Press the back arrow to save the settings.

Press the back arrow to confirm. Frequently asked

The system may not automatically
manage the change between winter and questions
Selecting the language summer time (depending on the country of
sale).
The following information groups together the
answers to the most frequently asked questions
Press Settings to display the main page.
concerning the system.
Press "Configuration" to access the Setting the date Radio
secondary page. Press Settings to display the main page.
Select "Language" to change the The reception quality of the tuned radio
language. station gradually deteriorates or the station
Press "Configuration" to access the
Press the back arrow to confirm. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz
secondary page.
is displayed, etc.).
Press "Date and time".
The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s
Setting the time Select "Date".
transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the
geographical area.
Press Settings to display the main page. Press this button to set the date.

206
 MyCitroën Play

►  Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar

to enable the system to check whether there is
stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing
time).
Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work.
Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the 11
a more powerful transmitter in the geographical ►  Delete the files supplied with the memory USB cables are of poor quality.
area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ►  Use genuine USB cables to ensure
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, file structure on the memory stick. compatibility.
basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Some characters in information about the Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work.
including in RDS mode. currently playing media are not displayed Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all
This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is correctly. countries.
not indicative of an audio system malfunction. The audio system is unable to process certain ►  Check the Google Android Auto or Apple
The aerial is missing or has been damaged types of character. website to see which countries are supported.
(for example while entering a car wash or ►  Use standard characters to name tracks and The volume of the telephone connected in
underground car park). folders. Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
►  Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Playback of streaming files does not start. The volume depends on both the system and the
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The connected device does not automatically telephone.
received stations. launch playback. ►  Increase the volume of the audio system, to
The name of the radio station changes. ►  Start playback from the device. maximum if required, and increase the volume of
The station is no longer received or its name has Track names and playing times are not the telephone if necessary.
changed in the list. displayed on the audio streaming screen. Ambient noise affects the quality of the
►  Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer telephone call.
"Radio" page. of this information. ►  Reduce ambient noise (close windows, turn
Some radio stations send other information down ventilation, slow down, etc.).
in place of their name (the title of the song for Telephone The contacts are not listed in alphabetical
example). I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. order.
The system interprets these details as the station The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Some telephones offer display options.
name. switched off or the device may not be visible. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can
►  Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the ►  Check that the telephone has Bluetooth be transferred in a specific order.
"Radio" page. switched on. ►  Modify the telephone directory display
►  Check in the telephone settings that it is settings.
Media "visible to all".
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with Settings
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. When the treble and bass settings are
Some files supplied with the memory stick may ►  Check the compatibility of the telephone on changed, the ambience is deselected.
greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services).

207
 MyCitroën Play

When the ambience is changed, the treble ►  Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the
and bass settings are reset. charge of the battery.
Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and
bass settings, and vice versa.
►  Modify the treble and bass or ambience
settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
When the balance settings are changed, the
distribution is deselected.
When the distribution setting is changed, the
balance settings are deselected.
Selecting a distribution setting imposes the
balance settings, and vice versa.
►  Modify the balance setting or the distribution
setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
There is a difference in sound quality
between audio sources.
To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound
settings can be tailored to different audio
sources, which can generate audible differences
when changing source.
►  Check that the sound settings are appropriate
to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound
functions to the middle position.
When the engine is off, the system switches
off after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system
automatically goes into energy economy mode
and switches off to maintain an adequate charge
in the battery.

208
 CITROËN Connect Nav

CITROËN Connect Nav The system is protected so that it only

operates in the vehicle.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Press the back arrow to go back a level. 12
The message Energy economy mode is Press "OK" to confirm.
GPS navigation - displayed when the system is about to go into
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
Applications - Multimedia standby.
type.
audio system - Bluetooth® To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive
System and map updates can be
telephone downloaded from the Brand's website.
cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional
product.
The functions and settings described The update procedure is also available there. Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
vary according to the vehicle version and Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
configuration, as well as the country of sale. The system’s Open Source Software
(OSS) source codes are available at the Certain information is displayed permanently
following addresses: in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch
For safety reasons and because they
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ screen (depending on equipment):
require sustained attention by the driver,
https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ –  Air conditioning status information (depending
the following operations must be carried out
on version), and direct access to the
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition
corresponding menu.
on:
–  Pairing the smartphone with the system via First steps –  Go directly to the audio source selection
option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of
Bluetooth. With the engine running, a press mutes titles depending on the source).
–  Using the smartphone. the sound. –  Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails,
–  Connecting to the CarPlay® or Android With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. map updates and, depending on the services,
Auto applications (certain applications stop Increase or decrease the volume using the navigation notifications.
displaying when the vehicle is moving). the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons –  Go to the settings for the touch screen and the
–  Watching a video (the video stops when the (depending on the equipment). digital instrument panel.
vehicle starts to move again). Use the menu buttons on either side of or below Audio source selection (depending on
–  Changing the system settings and the touch screen for access to the menus, then equipment):
configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. –  FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or equipment).
AM and DAB radio are not available on "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then –  Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
Hybrid vehicles. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing –  USB memory stick.
the screen briefly with three fingers.

209
 CITROËN Connect Nav

–  Media player connected via the auxiliary

socket (depending on equipment).
Steering mounted controls Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the list of
–  Video (depending on equipment). Voice control: detected stations.
This control is located on the steering
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk
(depending on equipment). Menus
Short press, system voice control.
Long press, voice commands from smartphone Connected navigation
or CarPlay®, Android Auto via the system.
Increase volume.

Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume increase
and decrease buttons simultaneously
In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to (depending on equipment).
create a profile for an individual or for a Restore the sound by pressing one of the two
group of people with shared interests, and volume buttons.
configure a wide range of settings (radio Media (short press): change the
presets, audio settings, navigation history, multimedia source.
Enter navigation settings and choose a
favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied Telephone (short press): start telephone
destination.
automatically. call.
Use real-time services, depending on equipment.
Call in progress (short press): access
In very hot conditions, the volume may telephone menu.
be limited to protect the system. It may Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call,
enter standby mode (with the screen and end call; when no call is in progress, access
sound off) for 5 minutes or more. telephone menu.
The system will resume normal operation Radio (rotate): automatic search for the
when the temperature in the passenger previous/next station.
compartment has dropped. Media (rotate): previous/next track, move
through a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing
selected, access presets.
Radio: display the list of stations.

210
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Applications Telephone Vehicle 12

Run certain applications from a Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain
smartphone connected via CarPlay® or messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions.
Android Auto. messages.
Check the status of the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning
connections. Settings
Radio Media

18,5 21,5
FM 87.5 MHz

Manage various temperature and air flow

Configure a personal profile and/or settings.
configure the sound (balance, ambience,
Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time,
display photographs. etc.).

211
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and

media:
"Play artist Madonna"
Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the
controls telephone:
Voice commands: "Call David Miller"
Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17
screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech,
commands" button located on the steering Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French,
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a
(depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected.
telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language
To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system.
always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are
follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms.
–  use natural language in a normal tone Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ...
without breaking up words or raising your The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate
voice. to address" and "Display POI in the city", are
–  always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available.
before speaking.
–  for best results, closing the windows and
sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous
Information - Using the
Press the Push To Talk button and tell me
interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember
–  before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this
other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for
displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you
menus and enabling voice-based interaction with
First steps the system.
need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to
undo something, say "undo". And to get
Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help".
navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some
"Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you
London" some examples or take you through it step by

212
 CITROËN Connect Nav

step. There's more information available in

"novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to
To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the
address, the contact name or an intersection. For
distance" or "arrival time". To learn more
commands, try saying "help with navigation". 12
"expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands
London", "navigate to contact, John Miller",
Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination
Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station
address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London
Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route
Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages
Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see
Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can
Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show
information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination"
There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you
You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest,
navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station".
radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood,
controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point
Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI
and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination".
your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select
"Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest
commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter
further by saying something like "select POI in
Voice commands
Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also
Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or
Navigate home
Tell me the arrival time "previous page".
Navigate to work
Stop route guidance
Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give
Help messages
Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the
Navigate to address 11 regent street, London language configured for the system.
You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance".
Help messages
To get information about your current route, you
can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining

213
 CITROËN Connect Nav

"Radio Media" voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available
only with a USB connection.
commands What's playing?
Voice commands Help messages
"Telephone" voice
Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands
-… "play" and then the item. For example, say "play
Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by
You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the
on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed.
example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands
Voice commands
or "turn on source, radio". Use the command
"play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude
Call David Miller*
hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna
Call voicemail*
or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller
Display calls*
Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages
Help messages
album, Thriller".
Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say
To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
"play" and then a song title, an album title, or
the contact name, for example: "Call David
Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song
Miller". You can also include the phone type, for
Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play
example: "Call David Miller at home". To make
Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the
a call by number, say "dial" followed by the
Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around
phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835
a displayed list, you can say "next page" or
417". You can check your voicemail by saying
You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action
"call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick
and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel"
message to", followed by the contact, and then
"tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action.
the name of the quick message you'd like to
FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for
send. For example, "send quick message to
example "tune to preset number five".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding
download has been performed.

214
 CITROËN Connect Nav

David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of

calls, say "display calls". For more information on
From the list of quick messages, say the name of
the one you'd like to send. To move around the
Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu
for the names of the supported messages. 12
SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next
The system only sends pre-recorded
To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last
"Quick messages".
line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say
page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action.
action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands
"cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation
Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving
"Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination
commands wait for me
Help messages To a new destination
If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method:
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main
"Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page.
voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…".
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or
The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or the key words for the
function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination.
an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria".
between each word. Or
When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method:
system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages
In order to be able to use the navigation,
Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to you must enter the "City", the "Street"
most recent message". When you want to send (suggestions are displayed automatically
Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for when you begin typing), then enter the
Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" using the virtual keypad, or select
and say something like "send quick message to

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding
download has been performed.

215
 CITROËN Connect Nav

an address from the "Contact" list or the To a recent destination To a contact

address "History".
Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main
page. page.
If you do not confirm the number, the Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the
navigation system will show one end of secondary page. secondary page.
the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations".
Press the "MENU" button to access the
Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab.
secondary page.
Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided
Select "Enter address".
the "Guidance criteria”. navigation.
Press "OK" to start guided navigation.
Then
To points of interest (POI)
Select the "Country".
Guided method:
Select "Position" to see the point of
Points of interest (POI) are listed in different
Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map.
categories.
Press Navigation to display the main
Change the keyboard "type" according to
the selected "language": ABCDE;
To "Home" or "My work" page.
Press Navigation to display the main Press the "MENU" button to access the
AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ.
page. secondary page.
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the
Press the "MENU" button to access the Select "Points of interest".
"Number", and confirm by pressing on
the displayed suggestions. secondary page.
Select "My destinations". Select the "Travel", "leisure",
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
"Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic”
criteria".
Select the "Preferred” tab. tab.
And/or
Select "Home". Or
Select "See on map" to choose the
Select "Search" to enter the name and
"Guidance criteria".
Or address of a POI.
Press "OK" to start guided navigation.
Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.

Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or

with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:

216
 CITROËN Connect Nav

You can only select this method of

using the service if a network connection
To a point on the map
Press Navigation to display the main
A marker is displayed in the middle of the
screen, with the "Latitude" and 12
is active; this may be either a "network "Longitude" coordinates.
page.
connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates:
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
use the Citroën Connect Box solution, or else DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds.
screen.
a "network connection provided by the user" DD for: Degrees, Decimals.
Select the destination by pressing on the map.
via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided
Tap the screen to place a marker and
In both cases, the system is automatically navigation.
display the sub-menu.
connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or
Press this button to start guided
permits. Press this button to save the displayed
navigation.
address.
Press Navigation to display the main Or
OR
page. Press this button to save the displayed
Press this button to enter the "Latitude"
Press the "MENU" button to access the address.
value using the virtual keypad.
secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And
Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude"
value using the virtual keypad.
Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of
the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message
the "Database". Press Navigation to display the main
Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page.
Channel)
mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Available in some countries.
"Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages
Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next are based on a European standard for traffic
image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on
Enter an address or the key words for the Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time.
destination (POI). map. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS
Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or Navigation system map and taken into account
region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to
Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads.
vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be
your search. displayed, depending on the applicable
Select the desired address to calculate the route.

217
 CITROËN Connect Nav

legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or
corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the "Stored” tab.
smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network.
communication process between the
Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the "Key"
correctly. network Wi-Fi and the "Password".
Press "OK" to establish a connection
Connected navigation USB connection between the smartphone and the
connection Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system.
The smartphone charges when
Depending on version, vehicle trim level and
connected by the USB cable. Usage restrictions:
subscription to online services and options.
Bluetooth connection With CarPlay®, connection sharing is only
Activate the Bluetooth function on the available with a Wi-Fi connection.
Network connection provided by the
telephone and ensure that it is visible to The quality of services depends on the quality
vehicle
all (see the "Connect-App" section). of the network connection.
With the Citroën Connect Box solution,
Wi-Fi connection
the system is automatically connected to
the Internet and connected services, and does
Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the
system and connect to it.
Authorize sending
not require the user to provide a connection via information
their smartphone. This function is only available if it has
Press Settings to display the main page.
OR been activated either via the
"Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu.
Network connection provided by the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "Notifications". secondary page.
user
Select "System configuration".
Select Wi-Fi to activate it.
Select the "Private mode" tab.
For the list of compatible smartphones, OR
visit the Brand's website in your country. Press Connect-App to display the main OR
page. Press "Notifications".
Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Private mode".

As processes and standards are Select "Wi-Fi network connection".

THEN
constantly changing, we recommend you

218
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Activate or deactivate: – "Give an audible warning".

– "Advise proximity of POI 1".
Press Navigation to display the main
page. 12
– "No data sharing except for company – "Advise proximity of POI 2". Press the "Declare a new danger zone"
vehicles". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. button located in the side bars or the
– "Only data sharing" upper bar of the touch screen (depending on
– "Sharing data and vehicle position" equipment).
The "Notifications", located in the upper
Select the "Type” option to select the type
Settings specific to bar, can be accessed at any time.
of "Danger area".
connected navigation Danger zone alerts may or may not be
Select the "Speed" option and enter it
using the virtual keypad.
Press Navigation to display the main displayed, depending on the applicable Press "OK" to save and send the
page. legislation and subscription to the information.
Press the "MENU" button to access the corresponding service.
secondary page.
When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the
Displaying fuel information
Select "Settings".
services are available. Press Navigation to display the main
page.
Select the "Map” tab.
The services offered with connected Press this button to display the list of
navigation are as follows. services.
Activate or deactivate:
A Connected Services pack: Press "POI on map" to display the list
– "Allow declaration of danger zones".
– Weather, of points of interest.
– "Guidance to final destination on foot".
–  Filling stations, Press one of the buttons to search for
These settings must be configured for each
–  Car park, "Stations".
profile.
–  Traffic, Activate/deactivate "Stations".
Press “OK” to confirm your selection.
–  POI local search.
A Danger area pack (optional). Press this button to display a secondary
Select the "Alerts” tab.
page.
Activate or deactivate: Declaration: "Risk areas Select the "Settings” tab.

– "Advise of car park nearby".

alert" Select the desired fuel.
– "Filling station alert". To send information about danger zones,
Press "OK" to save.
– “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon select the option:Allow declaration of
(triangle) to configure the alerts. danger zones

219
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Displaying charging station Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly
information. changing, we recommend keeping the
details Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to-
Press Navigation to display the main weather information. date, together with the date and time on
page. the smartphone and the system.
Press this button to display the list of The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will
services. be the maximum temperature for the day.
Press "POI on map" to display the list The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity
of points of interest. the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main
Press one of the buttons to search for page.
"Stations". Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay® or
Activate/deactivate "Stations". Applications Android Auto functions.

Press this button to display a secondary

USB sockets CarPlay® smartphone
page. Depending on equipment, for more information
on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay® or
connection
Select the "Settings" tab.
Android Auto applications, refer to the "Ease of Depending on country.

Select the desired connector type. use and comfort" section. On connecting the USB cable, the
For the list of compatible smartphones, CarPlay® function deactivates the
Press "OK" to save. visit the Manufacturer's website in your system's Bluetooth® mode.
country. The "CarPlay" function requires the use of
a compatible smartphone and compatible
Displaying weather applications.
Synchronising a smartphone enables
information users to display applications that support Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone’s CarPlay® or Android Auto charges when connected by the USB
page. technology on the vehicle’s screen. For cable.
Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® technology, the CarPlay® function Press "Telephone" to display the
services. must first be activated on the smartphone. CarPlay® interface.
Select "View map". Unlock the smartphone for the communication Or
process between the smartphone and the Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
Select "Weather". system to work. charges when connected by the USB
cable.

220
 CITROËN Connect Nav

From the system, press "Applications" to

display the main page.
During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain features are
Select the country of residence.
12
Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” displayed. Press "OK" to save and start the browser.
function. Accept to start and complete the connection.
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Access to the different audio sources remains
Connection to the internet is via one of
interface. available in the margin of the Android Auto
the network connections provided by the
display, using the touch buttons located in the
When the USB cable is disconnected vehicle or the user.
upper bar.
and the ignition is switched off then back
Access to the menus for the system is possible
on, the system will not automatically switch to
Radio Media mode; the source must be
at any time using the dedicated buttons. Bluetooth connection®
changed manually. In Android Auto mode, the function that The services available depend on the
displays rolling menus by briefly pressing network, the SIM card and the
the screen with three fingers is disabled.
Android Auto smartphone compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used.
Consult the smartphone user guide and the
connection There may be a pause before service provider to check which services are
Depending on country. applications become available, available.
depending on the quality of the network.
Install the "Android Auto" application on
the smartphone via "Google Play". The Bluetooth function must be activated
The "Android Auto" function requires the use Car Apps and the smartphone configured as
of a compatible smartphone and compatible "Visible to all".
Press Applications to display the main
applications. page. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is
Press "Car Apps" to display the applications used (from the smartphone or from the system),
Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
home page. ensure that the code is the same in the system
charges when connected by the USB
cable. and in the smartphone.
From the system, press "Applications" to
Internet Browser
If the pairing procedure fails, we
display the main page. Press Applications to display the main
recommend deactivating and then
Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android page.
reactivating the Bluetooth function on the
Auto” function. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected
smartphone.
Press "Android Auto" to start the Apps” function.
application in the system. Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser
home page.

221
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Procedure from the smartphone the vehicle does not have "Emergency and Press Connect-App to display the main
Select the name of the system in the list assistance call" services), after first activating page.
of detected devices. smartphone connection sharing. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
In the system, accept the connection request secondary page.
Select one or more profiles. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection".
from the smartphone.

Procedure from the system Press "OK" to confirm. Select the "Activation" tab to activate or
Press Connect-App to display the main deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing.
And/or
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Wi-Fi connection Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s
Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. network name and password.
secondary page.
Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm.
Press "Bluetooth connection".
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Select "Search". To protect against unauthorised access
secondary page.
The list of detected smartphones is and to make all systems as secure as
Select "Wi-Fi network connection".
displayed. possible, the use of a security code or a
Select the name of the chosen complex password is recommended.
Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or
smartphone in the list.
"Stored” tab.
Depending on the type of smartphone,
you may by prompted to accept the
Select a network. Managing connections
Press Connect-App to display the main
transfer of contacts and messages. Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi
page.
network "Key" and "Password".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "OK" to establish the connection.
Connection sharing secondary page.
The system offers to connect the smartphone Select "Manage connection".
with 3 profiles: The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi
– "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), connection sharing are exclusive. With this function, you can view the access to
– “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of connected services, the availability of connected
audio files on the smartphone), services and modify the connection mode.
– "Mobile internet data".
Wi-Fi connection sharing
Depending on equipment.
The "Mobile internet data" profile must Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system.
be activated for connected navigation (if

222
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Radio This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the

context of radio wave transmission, and
Press "OK" to confirm.
12
in no way indicative of an audio system
Selecting a station malfunction.
RDS station tracking may not be
Press Radio Media to display the main available nationwide, as many radio
page. stations do not cover 100 % of the country.
Press "Frequency". Presetting a station This explains the loss of reception of the
Press one of the buttons to perform an Select a radio station or frequency. station during a journey.
automatic search for radio stations. (refer to the corresponding section)
Or Press "Presets". Displaying text information
Move the slider to manually search for Make a long press on one of the buttons
The "Radio Text" function displays information
frequencies up or down. to preset the station.
transmitted by the radio station relating to the
Or
Press Radio Media to display the main Changing the waveband station or the currently playing song.
Press Radio Media to display the main
page. Press Radio Media to display the main
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. To change the waveband, press "Band…",
secondary page.
Select "Radio stations" on the secondary displayed at the top right of the screen.
Select "Radio settings".
page.
Press "Frequency". Activating/Deactivating RDS Select "General".
Enter the values using the virtual keypad. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Activate/deactivate "Display radio text".
First enter the units then click on the listening to the same station by automatic
decimals field to enter the figures after the retuning to alternative frequencies. Press "OK" to confirm.
decimal point. Press Radio Media to display the main
Press "OK" to confirm. page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Playing TA messages
Radio reception may be affected by the secondary page.
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives
use of electrical equipment not approved Select "Radio settings".
priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this
by the Brand, such as a USB charger function needs good reception of a radio station
connected to the 12 V socket. Select "General".
that carries this type of message. While traffic
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Activate/deactivate "Station follow".
information is being broadcast, the current
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may media is automatically interrupted so that the
block reception, including in RDS mode.

223
 CITROËN Connect Nav

TA message can be heard. Normal play of the

previously playing media resumes at the end of
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page.
Media
the message. Select "Radio settings".
Select "Announcements".
USB port
Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "General". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB
announcement". Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". port or connect the USB device to the
Press "OK" to confirm. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Activate/deactivate "Station follow". To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
DAB (Digital Audio Press "OK".
The system builds playlists (in temporary
Broadcasting) radio If “FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated,
memory); this operation can take from a
few seconds to several minutes at the first
there may be a time offset of a few
Terrestrial Digital Radio seconds when the system switches to "FM"
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
Digital radio provides higher quality sound. analogue radio, and in some cases a change
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a in volume.
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition
choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical When the digital signal quality is restored, the
is switched off or a USB memory stick is
order. system automatically changes back to "DAB".
connected. The audio system memorises these
Press Radio Media to display the main
lists, which will subsequently load faster if they
page. If the "DAB" station being listened to is have not been changed.
Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to not available on “FM” (“FM-DAB" option
display the "DAB" waveband. shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not Auxiliary socket (AUX)
activated, the sound will cut out while the
FM-DAB tracking digital signal is too weak.
Depending on equipment
Connect a portable device (MP3 player,
“DAB" does not cover 100 % of the territory.
etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an
When the digital radio signal is poor, “FM-DAB
audio cable (not supplied).
auto follow-up" enables you to continue listening
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
to the same station by automatically switching to
has been selected in the audio settings.
the corresponding FM analogue station (if there
First adjust the volume on the portable device
is one).
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
Press Radio Media to display the main
audio system.
page.
Controls are managed via the portable device.

224
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Selecting the source

Press Radio Media to display the main
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage
12
smartphone.
page. devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players
Control is from the portable device or by using
Select "SOURCES". via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not
the system's touch buttons.
Select the source. supplied.
Once connected in streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system
Watching a video smartphone is considered to be a media controls.
Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ source. Other devices, not recognised on connection,
Depending on country. must be connected to the auxiliary socket using
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth
Connecting Apple® players streaming, if compatible.
Video control commands are accessible Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using The audio system will only play audio files with
only through the touch screen. a suitable cable (not supplied). ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file
Play starts automatically. extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and
Press Radio Media to display the main
Control is via the audio system. 320 Kbps.
page.
Select "SOURCES". It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
The classifications available are those of
Select Video to start the video. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
the portable device connected (artists/
All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files.
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
To remove the USB memory stick, press The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and
podcasts).
the pause button to stop the video, then 48 KHz.
The default classification used is by artist. To
remove the memory stick. To avoid reading and display problems, we
modify the classification used, return to the
The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 recommend choosing file names less than 20
first level of the menu then select the desired
Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, characters long that do not contain any special
classification (playlists for example) and
WMV and RealVideo formats. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
confirm to go down through the menu to the
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
desired track.
Streaming Bluetooth® (File Allocation Table).
Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed The version of software in the audio system may
We recommend using the original USB
from your smartphone. not be compatible with the generation of the
cable for the portable device.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Apple® player.
First adjust the volume on the portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of the audio system.

225
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Telephone Procedure from the system The ability of the system to connect just
one profile depends on the telephone.
Press Telephone to display the main
All three profiles may connect by default.
Pairing a Bluetooth® page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
telephone The profiles compatible with the system
Or are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
The services available depend on the
Select "Search". MAP and PAN.
network, the SIM card and the
The list of detected telephones is
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Visit the Brand's website for more information
displayed.
Consult the telephone user guide and the (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Select the name of the chosen telephone
service provider to check which services are
in the list.
available. Automatic reconnection
Connection sharing On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone
The Bluetooth function must be activated The system offers to connect the telephone with connected is present again, it is automatically
and the telephone configured as "Visible 3 profiles: recognised and within about 30 seconds
to all” (in the telphone settings). – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), after switching on the ignition, the pairing is
– “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of established automatically (Bluetooth activated).
To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is To modify the connection profile:
audio files on the telephone),
used (from the telephone or from the system), Press Telephone to display the main
– "Mobile internet data".
ensure that the code is the same in the system page.
and in the telephone. The "Mobile internet data" profile must Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
be activated for connected navigation, secondary page.
If the pairing procedure fails, we
after first activating smartphone connection Select "Bluetooth connection" to display
recommend deactivating and then
sharing. the list of paired devices.
reactivating the Bluetooth function on the
telephone. Press the "Details" button.
Select one or more profiles.

Select one or more profiles.

Procedure from the telephone Press "OK" to confirm.
Select the system name in the list of Press "OK" to confirm.
Depending on the type of telephone, you may by
detected devices.
prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and
In the system, accept the connection request
messages.
from the telephone.

226
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Managing paired telephones

This function lets you connect or disconnect a
Select "End call" on the touch screen. Calling a recently used
number
12
device or delete a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the main
Making a call Press Telephone to display the main
page.
page. Using the telephone is not recommended Or
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the while driving. Press and hold
secondary page. Park the vehicle.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make the call using the steering mounted the steering mounted telephone button.
the list of paired devices. controls.
Press on the name of the telephone
Select "Calls".
selected in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it. Calling a new number Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

Press Telephone to display the main It is always possible to make a call

Deleting a telephone page. directly from the telephone; as a safety
Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital measure, first park the vehicle.
screen to display a basket alongside the keypad.
telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call.
Press the basket alongside the telephone Managing contacts/entries
chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main
Calling a contact page.
Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main Select "Contact".
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. Select "Create" to add a new contact.
superimposed display in the screen. Or press and hold
Make a short press on the steering Press the "Telephone" tab to enter the
mounted telephone button to accept an the steering mounted telephone button. contact’s telephone number(s).
incoming call. Press the "Address" tab to enter the
And Select "Contact". contact’s address(es).
Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press the "Email" tab to enter the
Select "Call". contact’s email address(es).
on the steering mounted telephone button Press "OK" to save.
to reject the call.
Or

227
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Press this button to sort contacts by Managing quick messages Access to email messages depends on
Surname+first name or by First the compatibility between the
Press Telephone to display the main
name+surname. smartphone and the onboard system.
page.
The "Email" function allows email Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
addresses to be entered for a contact, secondary page.
but the system is not able to send emails. Select "Quick messages" to display the Settings
list of messages.
Select the "Delayed", "My arrival", "Not Audio settings
Managing messages available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Telephone to display the main create new messages.
page. Press "Create" to write a new message. Select "Audio settings".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. Select the message chosen in one of the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound",
Select "Messages" to display the list of lists. "Voice" or "Ringtone".
messages. Press "Transfer" to select one or more Press "OK" to save the settings.
Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” recipients.
tab. Press "Play" to start playing the message.
Select the details of the message chosen The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
in one of the lists. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio
Press "Answer" to send a quick message Managing email processing to adjust the sound quality
stored in the system. Press Telephone to display the main according to the number of passengers in the
Press "Call" to start the call. page. vehicle.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Available only with the front and rear speaker
Press "Play" to listen to the message. secondary page. configuration.
Select "Email" to display the list of
messages. The Ambience setting (choice of 6
Access to "Messages" depends on the
Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and
compatibility between the smartphone
read” tab. Treble sound settings are different and
and the onboard system.
Select the message chosen in one of the lists. independent for each audio source.
Some smartphones retrieve messages or
Press "Play" to start playing the message. Activate or deactivate "Loudness".
email messages more slowly than others.

228
 CITROËN Connect Nav

The "Position” settings (All passengers,

Driver and Front only) are common to all
Press "OK" again to save the settings. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of
the screen and/or the instrument panel. 12
sources. Press Settings to display the main page.
The location for the photograph is
Activate or deactivate "Touch tones",
square; the system reshapes the original
"Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
photograph if in another format.
input". secondary page.
Press this button to reset the selected Select "System settings".
Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© profile.
optimises the sound distribution inside Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
Resetting the selected profile activates fuel consumption and temperature.
the passenger compartment.
the English language by default. Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial
settings.
Configuring profiles Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio
settings" with it. Resetting the system to "Factory
Press Settings to display the main page.
Select "Audio settings". settings" activates English and degrees
Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound",
secondary page. Select "System info" to display the versions of
"Voice" or "Ringtone".
Select "Setting of the profiles". the various modules installed in the system.
Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s
settings.
Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile 3” or Selecting the language
"Common profile". Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page.
Press this button to enter a name for the
Press Settings to display the main page.
profile using the virtual keypad. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "OK" to confirm. secondary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the
Press this button to add a photograph to language.
Select "Screen configuration".
the profile.
Insert a USB memory stick containing the
Select "Animation". Setting the date
photograph in the USB port.
Activate or deactivate:Automatic Press Settings to display the main page.
Select the photograph.
scrolling
Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the
Select "Brightness". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
photograph.
secondary page.

229
 CITROËN Connect Nav

Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. Navigation

I cannot enter the navigation address.
Select "Date".
The system may not automatically The address is not recognised.
Press this button to set the date.
manage the change between winter and ►  Use the "intuitive method" by pressing
summer time (depending on the country of the "Search…" button at the bottom of the
Press "OK" to confirm.
sale). "Navigation” page.
The route calculation is not successful.
Select the display format for the date.
The route settings may conflict with the current
Colour schemes location (for example, if toll roads are excluded
Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. but the vehicle is on a toll road).
"GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. ►  Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
As a safety measure, the procedure for
menu.
changing the colour scheme is only
I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts.
Setting the time possible when the vehicle is stationary.
You have not subscribed to the online services
Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. option.
►  If you have subscribed to the option:
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". - a few days may elapse before the service is
secondary page. activated,
Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then - services may not be selected in the system
press "OK" to confirm. menu,
Select "Time". - online services are not active ("TOMTOM
Press this button to set the time using the Whenever the colour scheme is
TRAFFIC" not shown on the map).
virtual keypad. changed, the system restarts, temporarily
The POIs do not appear.
Press "OK" to confirm. displaying a black screen.
The POIs have not been selected.
►  Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select
Press this button to set the time zone. POIs in the POI list.
Frequently asked The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
questions not working.
The audible warning is not active or the volume
Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 The following information groups together the is too low.
hour). answers to the most frequently asked questions
Activate or deactivate GPS concerning the system.
synchronisation (UTC).

230
 CITROËN Connect Nav

►  Activate the audible warning in the

"Navigation" menu and check the voice volume
The altitude is not displayed.
On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to
The aerial is missing or has been damaged
(for example while entering a car wash or 12
in the sound settings. 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites underground car park).
The system does not suggest a detour correctly. ►  Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
around an incident on the route. ►  Wait until the system has started up The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
The route settings do not take account of TMC completely so that there is GPS coverage by at basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception,
messages. least 4 satellites. including in RDS mode.
►  Configure the "Traffic info " function in Depending on the geographical environment This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is
the route settings list (Without, Manual or (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of not indicative of an audio system malfunction.
Automatic). reception of the GPS signal may vary. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
I receive a warning about a "Danger area" This behaviour is normal. The system is stations received.
that is not on my route. dependent on the GPS signal reception The name of the radio station changes.
As well as providing guided navigation, the conditions. The station is no longer received or its name has
system announces all "Danger areas" positioned My navigation is no longer connected. changed in the list.
in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may During start-up and in certain geographical Some radio stations send other information
provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on areas, the connection may be unavailable. in place of their name (the title of the song for
nearby or parallel roads. ►  Check that the online services are activated example).
►  Zoom the map to show the exact location (settings, contract). The system interprets these details as the station
of the "Danger area". You can select "On the name.
route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the Radio ►  Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio
warning duration. The reception quality of the tuned radio stations” secondary menu.
Certain traffic jams along the route are not station gradually deteriorates or the station
indicated in real time. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Media
On starting, a few minutes may elapse before is displayed, etc.). Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
the system begins to receive traffic information. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
►  Wait until traffic information is being received transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Some files supplied with the memory stick may
correctly (traffic information icons shown on the geographical area. greatly slow down access to reading the memory
map). ►  Activate the "RDS" function by means of the stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing
In certain countries, only major routes short-cut menu to enable the system to check time).
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic whether there is a more powerful transmitter in ►  Delete the files supplied with the memory
information. the geographical area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the
This is perfectly normal. The system is file structure on the memory stick.
dependent on the traffic information available.

231
 CITROËN Connect Nav

There may be an extended pause after The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with The contacts are not listed in alphabetical
inserting a USB stick. the system. order.
The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ►  You can check the compatibility of the Some telephones offer display options.
artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to telephone on the Brand's website (services). Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can
a few minutes. Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. be transferred in a specific order.
This is perfectly normal. Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the ►  Modify the telephone directory display
Some characters in information about the USB cables are of poor quality. settings.
currently playing media may not be displayed ►  Use genuine USB cables to ensure The system does not receive SMS.
correctly. compatibility. Bluetooth mode does not allow SMS text
The audio system is unable to process certain Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. messages to be sent to the system.
types of character. Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all
►  Use standard characters to name tracks and countries. Settings
folders. ►  Check the Google Android Auto or Apple When the treble and bass settings are
Playback of streaming files does not start. website to see which countries are supported. changed, the ambience is deselected.
The connected device does not automatically The volume of the telephone connected in When the ambience is changed, the treble
launch playback. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. and bass settings are reset.
►  Start playback from the device. The volume depends on both the system and the Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and
Track names and playing times are not telephone. bass settings, and vice versa.
displayed on the audio streaming screen. ►  Increase the volume of the audio system, to ►  Modify the treble and bass or ambience
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer maximum if required, and increase the volume of settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
of this information. the telephone if necessary. When the balance settings are changed, the
Ambient noise affects the quality of the distribution is deselected.
Telephone telephone call. When the distribution setting is changed, the
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. ►  Reduce the ambient noise level (close balance settings are deselected.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be windows, turn down ventilation, slow down, etc.). Selecting a distribution setting imposes the
switched off or the device may not be visible. Some contacts are duplicated in the list. balance settings, and vice versa.
►  Check that the telephone has Bluetooth The options for synchronising contacts are: ►  Modify the balance setting or the distribution
switched on. synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
►  Check in the telephone settings that it is contacts on the telephone, or both. When both There is a difference in sound quality
"visible to all". synchronisations are selected, some contacts between audio sources.
►  Deactivate then reactivate the telephone’s may be duplicated. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound
Bluetooth function. ►  Select "Display SIM card contacts" or settings can be tailored to different audio
"Display telephone contacts".

232
 CITROËN Connect Nav

sources, which can generate audible differences

when changing source. 12
►  Check that the sound settings are appropriate
to the sources listened to. We recommend
setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:,
Balance) to the middle position, setting the
musical ambience to "None", setting loudness
correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive"
in Radio mode.
►  In all cases, after applying sound settings,
adjust the volume level on the portable device (to
a high level) first. Then adjust the volume level
on the audio system.
When the engine is off, the system switches
off after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system
automatically goes into energy economy mode
and switches off to maintain an adequate charge
in the battery.
►  Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the
charge of the battery.
The date and time cannot be set.
Setting of the date and time is only available
if the synchronisation with the satellites is
deactivated.
►  Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting.
Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
synchronisation" (UTC).

233
 Event data recorders

Recording event data As a general rule, this data is temporary, is

not stored for longer than one operating cycle
(e.g. garages, manufacturers) or third parties
(e.g. roadside assistance agents) may read
Electronic control units are installed in your and is only used within the vehicle itself. The the vehicle's data. This also applies to work
vehicle. These control units process data control units often record this data (including the carried out under warranty and quality assurance
received from the vehicle's sensors, for example, vehicle's key). This function allows either the measures.
or data they generate themselves or exchange temporary or permanent storage of information This data is generally read via the OBD
with each other. Some of these control units are about the state of the vehicle, stresses on (On-Board Diagnostics) port fitted by law to
required for the correct operation of your vehicle, components, servicing requirements, as well as the vehicle. It is used to report on the technical
some others assist you while driving (driving or events and technical errors. state of the vehicle or its components and
manoeuvring aids), while others provide comfort Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, the facilitates the diagnosis of malfunctions, in
or infotainment functions. data stored is as follows: compliance with warranty obligations and for
The following contains general information about –  Operating state of system components quality improvement. This data, in particular the
how data is processed within the vehicle. (e.g. filling level, tyre pressures, battery charge information relating to stress on components,
You will find additional information about the status). technical events, operator errors and other
specific data which is downloaded, stored –  Faults and malfunctions in important system malfunctions, is sent to the Manufacturer, if
and transmitted to third parties and what it is components (e.g. lamps, brakes). necessary, along with the vehicle's identification
used for in your vehicle under the keyword –  System reactions in specific driving situations number. The Manufacturer's liability may also be
"Data protection". This information is directly (e.g. deployment of an airbag, triggering of engaged. The Manufacturer may also use the
associated with the references for the functions stability control and braking systems). operating data taken from the vehicle for product
in question contained in the corresponding –  Information about events which have recalls. This data may also be used to check the
vehicle handbook, or in the general terms and damaged the vehicle. customer's warranty and any claims made under
conditions of sale. –  For electric and rechargeable hybrid vehicles, warranty.
This information is also available online. the traction battery charge level and the Any malfunctions stored in the vehicle may be
estimated driving range. reset by an after-sales service company during
Vehicle operating data In particular circumstances (e.g. if the vehicle servicing or repair work, or at your request.
The control units process the data used for the has detected a malfunction), it may be necessary
operation of the vehicle. to record data which would otherwise simply not Comfort and infotainment
This data includes, for example:
–  Information about the state of the vehicle
be stored. functions
When taking your vehicle in for servicing
(e.g. speed, travel time, lateral acceleration, Comfort settings and personalised settings
(e.g. repairs, maintenance), the stored operating
wheel rotation rate, fastened seat belts display). may be saved in the vehicle and modified or
data may be read along with the vehicle's
–  Environmental conditions (e.g. temperature, reinitialised at any time.
identification number and used if necessary.
rain sensor, distance sensor). The personnel working for the servicing network

234
 Event data recorders

Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, this

may include:
Smartphone integration
(e.g. Android Auto® or
transmitter located in your vehicle or a mobile
device that you have provided (e.g. smartphone). 13
–  Seat and steering wheel position settings. The online services can be used via this wireless
–  Chassis and air conditioning settings. Apple®CarPlay®) connection. These include online services and
–  Personalised settings such as the interior If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can applications (apps) provided to you by the
lighting. connect your smartphone or another mobile Manufacturer or other suppliers.
You can enter your own data into the functions device to the vehicle in order to operate it using
of your vehicle's audio and telematic system, as the vehicle's integrated controls. Images and Exclusive services
part of the selected functionalities. sounds from the smartphone can be transmitted As regards the Manufacturer's online services,
Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, this through the audio and telematics system. the corresponding functions are described by
may include: Specific information is simultaneously sent the Manufacturer in an appropriate medium
–  Multimedia data such as music, videos or to your smartphone. Depending on the type (e.g. handbook, Manufacturer's website) and the
photos to be read by an integrated multimedia of integration, this includes data such as location, information about data protection is provided.
system. day/night mode and other general information Personal data may be used for online services.
–  Address book data to be used with an about the vehicle. For more information, please The exchange of data for this purpose takes
integrated hands-free system or with an refer to the user instructions for the vehicle or the place over a secure connection, using for
integrated navigation system. audio and telematics system. example the Manufacturer's dedicated computer
–  Entered destinations. Integrating a smartphone allows you to use systems. The collection, processing and use of
–  Data regarding the use of online services. its applications, such as a navigation app or personal data for the development of services
This data for the comfort and infotainment music player. No other integration between are carried out solely on the basis of a legal
functions may be stored locally in the vehicle the smartphone and the vehicle is possible, in authorisation, for example in the case of a
or saved to a device that you have connected particular active access to vehicle data. How the legal emergency call system or a contractual
to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB memory data is processed subsequently is determined agreement or else under a consent agreement.
stick or MP3 player). Data that you have entered by the supplier of the application being used. You can activate or deactivate the services and
yourself may be deleted at any time. The ability the change settings depends on the functions (some may be chargeable) and, in
This data may also be transmitted outside the application in question and on the operating some cases, the vehicle's entire connection to
vehicle at your request, particularly when using system installed on your smartphone. the wireless network. This does not include the
online services in line with the settings that you statutory functions and services such as the
have selected. Online services emergency or assistance call system.
If your vehicle is connected to a wireless
network, data can be exchanged between Third-party services
your vehicle and other systems. Connection If you use online services provided by other
to a wireless network is made possible via a (third-party) suppliers, these services are subject

235
 Event data recorders

to the responsibility, the data protection and

the terms and conditions of use of the supplier
in question. The Manufacturer often has no
influence over the content exchanged in this
regard.
Please therefore ensure that you are aware of
the nature, extent and purpose of the collection
and use of personal data as part of the third-
party services provided by the service provider
in question.

236
 Alphabetical index

180° rear vision   131 Air conditioning, automatic   50 Boot   35, 56
360 Vision   130 Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic   47, 50 Brake discs   159
Air conditioning, manual   47, 50 Brake lamps   174
Air intake   50 Brakes   159

A
Air vents   45 Braking   95
Alarm   35–36 Braking assistance system   69–70
ABS   69 Amplifier, audio   54 Braking, automatic emergency   122–124
Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)   141 Android Auto connection   204, 221 Braking, dynamic emergency   90–92
Accessories   66 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)   69 Brightness   205
Active Safety Brake   122–124 Antitheft / Immobiliser   29 Bulbs   173
AdBlue®   20, 160 Apple CarPlay connection   203, 220 Bulbs (changing)   171–172, 174
AdBlue® tank   161 Applications   221
Additive, Diesel   158 Assistance call   67–68
Assistance, emergency braking   70, 124
C
Adjusting headlamps   59
Adjusting head restraints   40 Audible warning   67
Adjusting seat   40–41 Audio streaming (Bluetooth)   200, 225 Cable, audio   224
Adjusting the air distribution   49–50 Cable, Jack   224
Adjusting the air flow   49–50 Capacity, fuel tank   137
Adjusting the date   206, 229
B
Cap, fuel filler   137
Adjusting the height and reach Care of the bodywork   163
of the steering wheel   42 Battery, 12 V   153, 158, 175–177 Central locking   31–32
Adjusting the lumbar support   41 Battery, ancillaries   175 Changing a bulb   171–172, 174
Adjusting the seat angle   41 Battery, charging   175–176 Changing a fuse   174
Adjusting the temperature   48, 50 Battery, remote control   33–34 Changing a wheel   169
Adjusting the time   206, 230 Blind   38–39 Changing a wiper blade   64
Advice on care and maintenance   139, 162 Blind spot sensors   121 Changing the remote control battery   33
Advice on driving   7, 84–85 BlueHDi   20, 158, 165 Changing to free-wheeling   178
Airbags   73, 75, 77 Bluetooth (hands-free)   201–202, 226 Charge level indicator (Electric)   21
Airbags, curtain   74–75 Bluetooth (telephone)   201–202, 226–227 Charger, induction   53
Airbags, front   74–75, 77 Bluetooth touch screen audio system   24 Charger, wireless   53
Airbags, lateral   74–75 Bodywork   163 Charging cable   142
Air conditioning   46–47, 49 Bonnet   154–155 Charging cable (Electric)   141

237
 Alphabetical index

Charging connector (Electric)   140, 145, Container, AdBlue®   160–161 Dials and gauges   9–10
147–148 Control, emergency boot release   35 Digital instrument panel   10
Charging flap (Electric)   140, 145, 147–148 Control, emergency door   32–33 Dimensions   185
Charging system (Electric)   5, 8, 26, 138, 156 Control, heated seats   42, 45 Dipstick   19, 156
Charging the traction battery Controls, steering mounted   93–94 Direction indicators   58, 173–174
(Electric)   21, 138, 142, 145, 147–148 Control stalk, lighting   57–58 Display, head-up   11
CHECK   22 Control stalk, wipers   62–63 Display screen, instrument panel   9
Checking the engine oil level   19 Control unit   141–142 Domestic charging
Checking the levels   156–157 Courtesy lamps   55 (Electric)   142, 147–148, 184
Checking tyre pressures Cruise control   104–105, 107–108 Doors   35
(using the kit)   166, 168 Cruise control, adaptive   104–105, 109 Drive Assist Plus   109
Checks   155, 158–160 Cruise control by speed limit Driver’s attention warning   125
Checks, routine   158–159 recognition   104–105 Drive selector (Electric)   94
Child lock   83 Driving   84–85
Children   72, 78–80 Driving aids camera (warnings)   101
Children (safety)   83
D
Driving aids (recommendations)   101
Child seats   72, 75–78 Driving economically   7
Child seats, conventional   78, 81–82 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Driving modes   95–96
Child seats, i-Size   80–82 Digital radio   199–200, 224 Dynamic stability control (DSC)   70
Child seats, ISOFIX   78–79, 81–82 Date (setting)   206, 229
Cleaning (advice)   139, 162–163 Daytime running lamps   58, 173
Closing the boot   31, 35
E
Deactivating the passenger airbag   74, 77
Closing the doors   31, 35 Deadlocking   29, 31
Collision Risk Alert   122–123 Deferred charging   27 EBFD   69
Configuration, vehicle   25–26 Deferred charging Eco-driving (advice)   7
Connected applications   221 (Electric)   26–27, 140, 145, 148 ECO mode   96
ConnectedCAM Citroën™   100 Defrosting   43, 50 Economy mode   153
Connection, Bluetooth   201–202, Defrosting, front   50 Electric motor   5, 8, 22, 26, 138,
221–222, 226–227 Demisting   43, 50 150, 156, 175, 178, 184
Connection, Wi-Fi network   222 Demisting, front   50 Electric windows   37
Connectivity   220 Demisting, rear   51 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)   69
Consumption figures   26 Demisting, rear screen   51 Emergency braking assistance (EBA)   70

238
 Alphabetical index

Emergency call   67–68 Flashing indicators   58, 173 Headlamps, dipped beam   173
Emergency switching off   88–89 Floor, boot, adjustable   56 Headlamps, halogen   59, 173
Emergency warning lamps   66, 165 Fluid, brake   157 Headlamps, main beam   60, 173
Emissions control system, SCR   21, 160 Fluid, engine coolant   157 Head restraints, front   40
Energy economy mode   153 Foglamp, rear   57, 174 Head restraints, rear   44–45
Energy flows   22, 26 Foglamps, front   57, 61 Head-up display   10–11
Energy recovery   21, 95 Folding the rear seats   44–45 Heated steering wheel   42
Engine   160 Frequency (radio)   223 Heating   45, 47
Engine compartment   155 Fuel   7, 137 Heating, programmable   27, 51
Engine, Diesel   137, 155, 165, 183 Fuel consumption   7 Hi-Fi system   54
Engine, petrol   155, 182 Fuel tank   137–138 High voltage   138
Engines   181–183 Fuses   174 Hill start assist   96–97
Environment   7, 34, 85 Histogramme, fuel consumption   26–27
ESC (electronic stability control)   69 Horn   67
Expanded traffic sign recognition   105
Exterior lighting   60 G
I
Gauge, fuel   137
Gearbox, automatic   92–94, 96, 159, 175

F
Gearbox, manual   92, 96, 159 Ignition   88, 227
Gear lever, manual gearbox   92 Ignition on   88
Fatigue detection   125 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear efficiency Ignition switch   86–87
Filling the AdBlue® tank   158, 161 indicator   97 Immobiliser, electronic   86
Filling the fuel tank   137–138 Glove box   52 Indicator, AdBlue® range   20
Filter, air   158 G.P.S.   217 Indicator, coolant temperature   19
Filter, oil   158 Indicator, engine oil level   19
Filter, particle   158 Indicators, direction   58, 173

H
Filter, passenger compartment   46, 158 Inflating tyres   159, 185
Fitting a wheel   169, 171 Inflating tyres and accessories
Fitting roof bars   152–153 Hazard warning lamps   66, 165 (using the kit)   166, 168
Fittings, boot   55 Headlamp adjustment   59 Information, vehicle   9, 234
Fittings, interior   52 Headlamps, automatic dipping   60–61 Infrared camera   102
Flap, fuel filler   137–138 Headlamps, automatic illumination   59 Instrument panel   9, 22, 24, 102

239
 Alphabetical index

Instrument panel, LCD   9 Leather (care)   163 Map reading lamps   55
Internet browser   218, 221 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes   58, 172, 174 Markings, identification   185
ISOFIX mountings   78, 81–82 Level, AdBlue®   158 Massage function   41
Level, brake fluid   157 Mat   54, 102
Level, Diesel additive   158 Menu, main   26

J
Level, engine coolant   19, 157 Menus (audio)   197–198, 210–211
Level, engine oil   19, 156 Menu short cuts   26
Jack   165–166, 169, 224 Levels and checks   155–157 Messages   228
Jump starting   176 Level, screenwash fluid   63, 157 Messages, quick   228
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs   58, 172, 174 Minimum traction battery charge
Lighting, cornering   61 level (Electric)   21

K
Lighting dimmer   23 Mirror, rear view   43
Lighting, exterior   57, 60 Mirrors, door   43, 51, 121
Key   28–29, 32–33 Lighting, guide-me home   29, 59–60 Mirror, vanity   52
Key, electronic   30–31 Lighting, interior   55 Misfuel prevention   138
Keyless Entry and Starting   28, 30–31, 87–88 Lighting, mood   55 Mobile application   27, 51, 148
Key not recognised   88–89 Lighting, welcome   59 Motor, electric   89, 156, 184
Key with remote control   28, 86 Loading   152–153 Mountings, ISOFIX   78, 81–82
Kit, hands-free   201–202, 226 Load reduction mode   154 Multimedia support   52
Kit, puncture repair   166 Locking   29, 31
Kit, temporary puncture repair   165–168 Locking from the inside   32
Locking the doors   32
Low fuel level   137 N
Lumbar   41
L
Navigation   215–217
Navigation, connected   218–220
Labels, identification   185

M
Lamp, boot   56

O
Lamps, parking   58
Lamps, rear   174 Mains socket (domestic network)   141
Lams with Full LED technology   61 Maintenance (advice)   139, 162 Obstacle detection   126
Lane assist   109, 113–115 Maintenance, routine   102, 158–160 Oil change   156
Lane departure warning active   118 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations)   101 Oil consumption   156

240
 Alphabetical index

OIl, engine   156 Priming the fuel system   165 Reminder, lighting on   57–58
On-board tools   56, 165–166 Profiles   229 Remote control   28–32
Opening the bonnet   154 Protecting children   74–80 Remotely operable functions
Opening the boot   30, 35 Proximity Keyless Entry & Start   30 (Electric)   27, 51, 148
Opening the doors   30, 35 Public fast charging station   141, 147 Removing a wheel   169–171
Opening the windows   28 Puncture   166–167, 169 Removing the mat   54
Replacing bulbs   171–172, 174
Replacing fuses   174

P R
Replacing the air filter   158
Replacing the oil filter   158
Pads, brake   159 Radar (warnings)   101 Replacing the passenger compartment
Paint   163, 185 Radio   198, 223 filter   158
Paint colour code   185 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Reservoir, screenwash   157
Park Assist   132 Broadcasting - DAB)   199–200, 224 Reset trip   24
Parking brake   89, 159 Range, AdBlue®   20, 158 Retractable support   52
Parking brake, electric   90–92, 159 RDS   199, 223 Rev counter   9–10
Parking sensors, audible and visual   126 Reading lamps   55 Reversing camera   102, 127–130
Parking sensors, front   127 Rear screen, demisting   51 Reversing lamps   174
Parking sensors, rear   126 Recharging the battery   175–176 Roof bars   152–153
Passenger compartment temperature pre- Recharging the traction battery Roof, opening   38–39
conditioning (Electric)   27, 51 (Electric)   138, 142, 145, 147–148 Running out of fuel (Diesel)   165
Pedestrian horn (Electric)   67, 85 Recirculation, air   50
Personalisation   10 Recovery   178–180
Plates, identification   185 Recovery of the vehicle   178–179
Player, Apple®   200, 225 Reduction of electrical load   154 S
Player, USB   200, 224 Regeneration of the particle filter   158 Safety, children   74–80
Port, USB   52, 200, 203, 220, 224 Regenerative braking (deceleration Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)   158
Post Collision Safety Brake   70 by engine braking)   94–95 Screenwash   63
Power   21 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Screenwash, front   62
Power indicator (Electric)   8, 21 detection system   99–100 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)   21, 160
Pressures, tyres   159, 167, 185 Reinitialising the remote control   34 Seat angle   41
Pre-tensioning seat belts   72 Reminder, key in ignition   87 Seat belts   71–72, 78

241
 Alphabetical index

Seat belts, rear   71 Stay, bonnet   154–155 Topping-up AdBlue®   161
Seat, rear bench   44 Steering mounted controls, audio   197, 210 Top Rear Vision   128–129
Seats, electric   41 Steering wheel, adjustment   42 Top Tether (fixing)   78, 81–82
Seats, front   40–41 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers, Total distance recorder   23
Seats, heated   42, 45 expressive   163 Touch screen   24–26, 51
Seats, rear   44–45, 76 Stopping the vehicle   86–88, 94 Touch screen tablet   25, 52
Selector, gear   92, 94 Stop & Start   24, 46, 50, 97–98, Towball, quickly detachable   150–152
Sensors (warnings)   102 137, 154, 158, 178 Towbar   149
Serial number, vehicle   185 Storage   52 Towbar with quickly detachable
Service indicator   18, 22 Storage box   56 towball   150–152
Servicing   18, 158–160 Storage wells   56 Towed loads   181–183
Settings, equipment   25–26 Sunshine sensor   46 Towing another vehicle   178, 180
Settings, system   205, 229 Sun visor   52 Traction battery (Electric)   21–22, 26,
Sidelamps   58, 173–174 Super-fast charging (Electric)   147–148, 184 138, 140, 184
Side parking sensors   127 Suspension   159 Traction control (ASR)   70
Silent vehicle warning sound (Electric)   67, 85 Switching off the engine   86, 89 Traffic information (TMC)   217
Smartphone   27, 52–53 Synchronising the remote control   34 Trailer   149
Snow chains   99, 153 Trajectory control systems   69
Socket, 12 V accessory   53 Triangle, warning   165
Socket, auxiliary   224
T
Trip computer   23–24
Socket, Jack   224 Trip distance recorder   23
Speakers   54 Tables of engines   184 Tyres   159, 185
Speed limiter   104–106 Tank, fuel   137–138 Tyre under-inflation detection   99, 167
Speed limit recognition   102, 104 Technical data   182–184
Speedometer   9–10, 102 Telephone   201–203, 226–228
Sport mode   96
U
Temperature, coolant   19
Spotlamps, side   60 Thermal comfort consumption indicator
Stability control (ESC)   69 (Electric)   22 Under-inflation (detection)   99
Starting a Diesel engine   137 Thermal comfort equipment   22 Unlocking   28, 30
Starting the engine   86, 89 Time (setting)   206, 230 Unlocking from the inside   32
Starting the vehicle   86–87, 94 TMC (Traffic info)   217 Unlocking the doors   32
Starting using another battery   88, 176 Tool box   56 Updating the date   206, 229
Station, radio   198, 223 Tools   165–166 Updating the time   206, 230

242
 Alphabetical index

USB   200, 203, 220, 224

V
Vehicle data recording and privacy   234
Ventilation   45–47
Video   225
Visibility   50
Vision, 180° forward   131
Vision 360°   128
Voice commands   212–215

W
Wallbox (Electric)   141
Warning and indicator lamps   12
Warning lamp, driver's seat belt
not fastened   72
Warning lamps   12, 22
Warning lamp, seat belts   72
Warnings and indicators   12
Washing   102
Washing (advice)   139, 162–163
Weights   181–183
Welcome lighting   29, 60
Wheel, spare   159, 165–166, 169
Windscreen, heated   50–51
Windscreen wipers   62–63
Wiper blades (changing)   64
Wipers   62
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive   63

243
 4DCONCEPT
Automobiles CITROËN declares, in accordance Groupe MAURY Imprimeur
with the provisions of European legislation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are 10-31-1282

used in the manufacture of the products that it

sells.

Reproducing and translating this document,

even partially, is strictly prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.

Printed in the EU
10-21
ANG. 21C41.0040

*21C41.0040*